Home

DL1640 User`s Manual

1. When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample _ Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s words S s words S s words S s words 500s 200 1M 200 1M 200 1M 200 1M 200s 500 1M 500 1M 500 1M 500 1M 100s 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 50s 2k 1M 2k 1M 2k 1M 2k 1M 20s 5k 1M 5k 1M 5k 1M 5k 1M 10s 10k 1M 10k 1M 10k 1M 10k 1M 5s 20k 1M 20k 1M 20k 1M 20k 1M 2s 50k 1M 50k 1M 50k 1M 50k 1M 1s 100k 1M 100k 1M 100k 1M 100k 1M 500ms 200k 1M 200k 1M 200k 1M 200k 1M 200ms 500k 1M 500k 1M 500k 1M 500k 1M 100ms 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 50ms 2M 1M 2M 1M 2M 1M 2M 1M 20ms 5M 1M 5M 1M 5M 1M 5M 1M 10ms 10M 1M 10M 1M 10M 1M 10M 1M 5ms 20M 1M 20M 1M 20M 1M 20M 1M 2ms 50M 1M 50M 1M 50M 1M 50M 1M ims 100M 1M 100M 1M 100M 1M 100M 1M 500us 200M 1M 200M 1M 100M 500k 100M 500k 200us 200M 400k 200M 400k 100M 200k 100M 200k 100us 200M 200k 200M 200k 100M 100k 100M 100k 50us 200M 100k 200M 100k 100M 50k 200M 100k 20us 200M 40k 500M 100k 100M 20k 500M 100k 10us 200M 20k 1G 100k 100M 10k 1G 100k 5us 200M 10k 2G 100k 100M 5k 2G 100k 2us 200M 4k 5G 100k 100M 2k 5G 100k Tus 200M 2k 10G 100k 100M 1k 10G 100k 500ns 200M 1k 20G 100k 100M 500 20G 100k 200ns 200M 400 50G 100k 100M 200
2. 13 33 uodo 9g 13 U JOUIEYLA a 13 12 Using the Web Server Function 13 34 12 Click Custom Level The Security Settings dialog box opens Security Settings E Es Settings We Active controls and plug ins Download signed Activex controls Disable Enable Prompt Ey Download unsigned Actives controls Disable Enable Prompt Ey Initialize and script Active controls not marked as safe Disable Enable Prompt 2 DA aoe Abin eeebeele sed shin ine aE F Reset custom settings ea to Medium low Reset ee 13 Adjust the security settings according to the following table Item Security Level Run ActiveX controls and plug ins Enable Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting Enable Download signed ActiveX controls Prompt 14 Click OK IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Using the Web Server Function Using the FTP Server Function with the Web Browser Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network see page 13 30 Click the FTP icon in the Web server window A window used to view the storage media of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L storage media view window appears The storage media view window may not appear In this case click the Refresh button of the Web browser A logon dialog box appears Log on The storage media view window appears Web
3. scale Trace Pccunulate Value Label DFF ON ON OFF 2000 11 01 09 54 07 ox _ Norma Stopped S00kS S _DISPLAY_ Fornat Interpot Graticule inure Single Sine y FA 2nsfdiv CH1 10 1 0 500 UVzdiv DC Full Scale Value of Vertica Axis Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V K 10 000m5 Eou D pOl Graticule Scale Value of Time Axis Explanation You can display the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis or the axis horizontal of each channel 8 6 IM 701610 01E 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 18 gt TRACE SNOT HELP amp ae y OO a e Cel HORZONTAT 45 aa O TRIG D sme ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY ea The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E Setting the Waveform Label 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Display Position Coupling 6 Offset Bandwidth OFF DN 0 00div 3 Press the Label soft key to display a keyboard and enter the waveform label according to the procedures described in section 4 1 CH1 Variable inear ScI Label X B Next 50 0 V ON CH1 272 8 7 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels Explanation Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 4 Press DISPLAY
4. Next 172 Note Ether Yes C7 is only displayed if the Ethernet interface option is installed If XXXXXX_XXX_XXX is displayed for your MAC address contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Check the MAC address and whether the Ethernet interface optional is installed The Presence of the Ethernet Interface Option The presence of the Ethernet interface is displayed under Ethernet in the Information window If Yes is displayed the Ethernet interface is installed e If No is displayed the Ethernet interface is not installed MAC Address The MAC address is a unique address that has already been set on the instrument and is necessary for transmission between nodes 13 23 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Relevant Keys EAR NAP SNAP HELP OCLI LTI TIo EASURE CURSOR FLEN msc Bonoco mara X Y_ MEN ENO PHASE SeruP JpisPLa opr mace SAvE o SHFT SEARCH O TRIG D ACTION DELAY POSITION o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED VsDIV TIME sDIV 0 cs o Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC a a a alibrationRemote Cnt1 USB Network ystem Cnf paa Next 172 3 Press the Others soft key to display the Others settings menu a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode 4
5. Operation Scale CH1 CH2 Center CH1 CH2 Sensitivity PS Unit Pass Thru Smoothing MATH Mi Displayati Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup MZ Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz 9 33 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM e 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms 9 34 Scaling 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 8 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual If you select Auto go to step 15 9 If you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Center 10 Press SELECT to display a menu used to set the position of the center in the waveform display 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the position of the center and press SELECT 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sensitivity 13 Press SELECT to display the menu used to set values in 1 div increments 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set values in 1 div increments and press SELECT Note If you set Center of Sensitivity after setting Scale to Auto Scale automatically reverts to Manual Setting the Unit 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 16 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 17 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 18 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 7 Smoothing Entering Labels 19 Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard then enter a l
6. 00 7 11 SECAM rrarena ahi canada cae eadecee ented 6 37 SELE Od Be dee meee epee mer nee eee ieee eee eer eee a 2 5 DEE TEST sasnuscanrauncl A abused svauenrsuads 15 8 SEli DiaGnOStiC TeSt viriseda ea 15 8 Send Mail Action cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 40 9 46 9 51 Sending a Test Mail x ccscsceassssscctsnci occ coeestissetactendecank tient 13 17 Sequential Store cccccececessssseeeeceseeesseeseeseeeeeess 1 16 7 5 Serial imena Essia 16 9 senal N mDe ecese a N jii Senal Pattern rynka Megidiamesninaiebieatad 8 28 Serial Pattern Search esosssenseenenernerrnrrnreerrrnne 1 27 8 19 Settings for a Network Printer cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 13 15 SE TURK V anakana a ade aes naeeceatse 2 4 SMET K E Vanna a a eee 2 4 SNOW MaDi E N 7 10 7 14 7 18 SIMPLE RY crises a AOS 2 3 Simple Tog Eimine T a aameer ae eeaiseaelas 1 8 Sine Interpolation nsnneeeenennnneeennneeessrnrrreerrnrreressrrrrreeen 1 18 Single N Mode eene a a 1 11 6 2 SMIE Mde misine N 1 11 6 2 SMOG arasa Ta r T N 9 40 SMTP Client Function ccccccseseeeeeceeeesseeeeseeeeesseeeeeeees 1 31 SMTP TIME GUE seit atic oisiieninusd E 13 25 SNAP SHOT Key dctdcccnesccsecsdancascnaiesecsaiteantomens eticnentcsials 2 5 SnapShots a ative anette et tees 1 33 4 18 11 21 SOM KEYS cteors siren O a 2 5 SPECIFICATIONS sa n N E jii Standard ACCESSOTSICS oneone aans iv STARTS TOR Key oecenc iat edits eaten eee 2 5 Statistical P
7. Mode a ycle Tracga la T Range1 Item Show 5 000di ste Cycle Setup Result f6T Range2 tatistics 5 600di 12 Press the Show Results soft key to display a list of the automatic measurement results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll vertically Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values From the left of the displayed parameters are ltem1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 Press SELECT to zoom the first cycle of the cursor You can change the order to ascending FWD or descending REV with the Sort soft key 2660716731 11 57 52 10k Normal S Measure Parameter List P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 00001 2 18756U 1 98333 1 16417 t 6 76176m 00002 2 18750V 1 08333V 1 10417V 1 7 06883mM a 4 0000OY MaxMin MaxMin Itemz Iten3 Sdy 0 69000U Utility Cnt Z il MEASURE Sort Max Min Item4 REV Max Min Item1 IM 701610 01E 9 21 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e 9 3 Statistical Processing Statistical Processing with History Data 1 2 Press MEASURE Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod l T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 1 2 5 600di Press the History Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing with history data MEASURE tatistics Cy
8. Sdey Width Int2xY High Duty Low Burst1 co 0Shot Burst2 a OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace When the target channel is Math1 or Math2 Int1XY and Int2XY are not displayed 7 Press SELECT to turn ON the parameter 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary 9 12 IM 701610 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Delay Delay Setup 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 IM 701610 01E Pressing the Delay Setup soft key displays the delay setting menu and the measurement channel dialog box Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Mode Measure Polarity Edge Count Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Reference Trace Polarity Edge Count CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode Press SELECT to select Time Degree or OFF source MEASURE Measure Polarity Time Edge Count Degree Reference Trace Edg
9. 5 8 5 6 The Preset Function Relevant Keys rm oak Sher HELP aT Ein eal FILE MISC Cavoea man SETUP Torey SPLAN Cory MAGE SAE ae ame O SHIFT HORZONTAL v e5 O TRIG D Sime ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY Operating Procedure Selecting the Channel 1 Press PRESET 2 Press the Select soft key to display the channel menu PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All CMOS 5V 16 1 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel Pressing All will select all the channels PRESET All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Exec Selecting the Preset Type 4 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All CMOS 5V 16 1 5 Set the type by pressing the soft key corresponding to CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V or User PRESET select MOS SY CMOS 3S 3U User Exec All Selecting the Probe Attenuation 6 Press the Probe soft key to display a menu used to select the attenuation 10A 1V 106A 1V 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 700937 701930 Exec 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation Explanation IM 701610 01E 5 6 The Preset Function Setting the V div Offset Voltage and Trigger Level When the Preset Type is User 8 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu Select Type Probe Exec All CMOS 5V 16 1 Press the User soft key PRESET se
10. SEARCH O TRIG D ACTION _ DELAY eo D TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Pressing START STOP starts or stops the waveform acquisition Waveform acquisition is in progress when the indicator above the key is lit suoieiadQ uowwo gt Explanation START STOP is pressed when starting or stopping waveform acquisition e When the indicator to the upper right of START STOP is ON waveform acquisition is started e When the indicator to the upper right of START STOP is OFF waveform acquisition is stopped Stopped is displayed on the upper left corner of the screen Operation when the Acquisition Mode is Set to Averaging Mode When the waveform acquisition is stopped the averaging process also stops When the waveform acquisition is restarted a new averaging process starts START STOP Operation while Accumulation is in Progress When the waveform acquisition is stopped accumulation is interrupted When the waveform acquisition is restarted a new accumulation starts Conditions in which the START STOP is Disabled e When the instrument is in the remote mode controlled via communication e When the instrument is printing or auto setup is in progress Note e Pressing FILE or HISTORY while the waveform acquisition is in progress stops the waveform acquisition If the waveform acquisition conditions are changed and the acquisition is restarted previously acquired data are cleared The snapshot function
11. Averaging Mode Averaging is a process in which waveforms are acquired repeatedly to obtain the average of waveform data of the same timing the same time in relation to the trigger point If this mode is active the instrument takes the linear or exponential average of incoming data and writes the results into acquisition memory The averaged data is then used to generate the display You can set the attenuation constant to a value from 2 to 256 in 2 steps and the averaging count to a value from 2 to 65536 in 2 steps Exponential Averaging Count Infinite Linear Averaging Count 2 to 65536 N Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn An N N An Value Obtained After nth Averaging Xn nth Measured Value Xn nth Measured Value N Number of Averaging Times N Attenuation Constant Acquisition Count 2 to 256 in steps of 2 in steps of 2 This averaging process is useful when you want to eliminate random noise Envelope Mode In normal mode and averaging mode the sample rate the number of times data is acquired per second in the acquisition memory drops if T div is increased see Appendix 1 Relationship between the time axis setting sample rate and record length However in the envelope mode the maximum and minimum values are determined at every time interval from the data sampled at 200 MS s high resolution mode 100 MS s The time interval used to determine the values is the twice sampling interval of th
12. Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E lt For a description of this function see page 1 9 gt NAP SNAP HELP AGERE ACQ START STOP MATH MENU ENU PHASE X Y MEN Serup ose1A CoPr NAGE savE o SH SEARCH O TRIG D Soe y Ga V DIV TIME DIV A Ga 7 MODE POSITION C9 Setting the Trigger Type 1 2 3 Press ENHANCED Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a f6 Count Hold Off Bet Pattern Level uS A gt BCN Coupling 1 6 68 Press the A Delay B soft key NHANCED A gt BCN Delay Bi Pattern Width OR Ty Hold Off Cus 0 08 Setting the Status and Condition for Conditions A and B 4 O m o Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed CH1 o2 C a XX h XX Condition ENHANCED Set condition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status of condition A will be set Press SELECT to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit In a similar fashion set condition B Bbunabbiuy 2 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 10 Pressing the Level Coupl
13. 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code 920 921 923 926 927 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 940 941 942 943 944 945 948 949 950 951 15 6 Message Cannot set the acquisition mode to Average when the trigger mode is set to Single or Single N It is not possible to make a setting that will result in the repetitive mode when the trigger mode is set to Single N Cannot set the trigger mode to Single or Single N when the acquisition mode is Average Cannot set the trigger mode to Single N during repetitive sampling mode Cannot set this parameter during repetitive sampling mode Not possible in the current record length Cannot carry out computation at the current record length The operation is not possible when waveforms are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu Setting or executing is not possible during the search operation Search pattern does not exist Execute the search Settings cannot be changed or executed during the history search operation The record cannot be selected History record does not exist Setting or executing is not possible during FFT recalculation Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One Cannot be configured or executed while updating the history all display Aborted when history display mode is set to One Cannot output color in this format Zones cannot be edited in
14. External Trigger Clock Mutual Input Terminal Sections 5 11 6 6 and 12 1 On the DL1620 it is labeled as EXT and is located on the front panel 2 iF R Bil use prepueraL usg 72 OP IB IEEE488 1 an Enn o amp JO C 3 fY Heal GO NO GO VIDEO OUT VGA SERIAL RS 232 fa m mm S a z TRIG OUT CH1 OUT E TTT DL i n BRAIN 7 EEE VA SS 2 1 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Rear View DC model 701610 701620 Power Connectors for the Circuit Breaker Probes Section 3 4 option Provides power to YOKOGAWA differential probes or current probes Protective grounding Terminal Power Connector Section 3 3 Main Power Switch Section 3 3 Ethernet Connector Chapter 13 Option or GP IB Connector Option For details about the communication functions refer to the Communication Interface Manual IM701610 17E Serial RS 232 Interface Connector For details about the communication functions refer to the Communication Interface Manual IM701610 17E CH1 OUT Connector USB PERIPHERAL Connector AN Connects to a USB printer keyboard or mouse USB Interface Connector For details about communication functions refer to the communication Interface Manual Doc IM701610 17E GO NO GO Output Terminal Section 9 14 Outputs the GO NO GO judgements Trigger Output Terminal Section 1
15. IM 701610 01E 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium The screen image can be stored to storage medium a floppy disk a Zip disk PC card network drive Ethernet interface option or internal flash memory For details see Section 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive Storing Data Format You can store the output data in the following formats The file extensions and file sizes reference value that are automatically assigned are also listed Output Data Format Extension File Size TIFF TIF 38 574 bytes approx 300 Kbytes BMP BMP 38 462 bytes approx 300 Kbytes PostScript SPS 79 061 bytes PNG PNG approx 4 Kbytes approx 8 Kbytes JPEG JPG approx 133 Kbytes approx 139 Kbytes When the color is OFF reference value The file sizes in parentheses are the sizes when the color is ON Color for TIFF BMP PNG and JPG Select ON ON Revers or OFF ON Outputs in 256 colors ON Revers Background color is not output ON GRAY Outputs in 16 shade grayscale OFF Outputs in Black amp White Comments You can add a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters on the screen and save the information Data Compression for BMP Files BMP formats can be compressed in RLE formats respectively and output However if color is OFF data in BMP format cannot be compressed Save Destination A list of available storage media is displayed in the File List dialog box
16. If an error occurs during operation an error code may appear on the screen This section describes the meanings of the error messages and the corrective actions which they require The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese see section 14 2 If the corrective action requires servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual for repairs In addition to the error messages listed in this section there are also communication related error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E Status Messages Code AJOJN O 11 13 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 15 2 Message Aborted hard copy Aborted file operation Completed data store Completed data recall Completed GO NO GO Set to remote mode by communication commands Local lockout by communication commands All settings will be initialized Power up with the RESET key depressed Completed action on trigger Executed unload Release the Preview mode Aborted the search Executed the search but no record was found that matched the conditions Executed the search but no pattern was found that matched the conditions Pattern contains points that are between Thr Lower and Thr Upper FFT will be performed on all records Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to
17. Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 can be saved The parameters that can be displayed are as follows Auto Measurement Mode Displayed Parameters ON Up to 12 parameters from all traces The parameters of channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence The parameters that appear higher in the parameter setting menu have precedence Statistics Up to 2 parameters from all traces Displays statistical data Channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence Voltage Axis Parameters P P Peak to Peak Value MAX MIN V Oshot Undershoot Value Max Maximum Voltage V Ovr Min Minimum Voltage V oa Overshoot Value Rms Root Mean Square Value High 11 7 2 xi 2 2 v Low Avg Average Voltage 1 n xi V LOW MIN HIGH LOW x 100 MAX HIGH HIGH LOW x 100 High Level Voltage V Low Level Voltage V Sdev Standard Deviation SDv 1 n xi2 xi 2 n 1 2 shows the corresponding name at the measurement item setting screen Oshot Oshot High Low Time Axis Parameters Rise Rise Time s Width Width s Greater than the Mesial Value Fall Fall Time s wd l l Freq Frequency Hz 1 PERIOD CWS Width s Smaller than the Mesial Value aoe Period s Duty Duty Ratio Width Period x 100 Avg Freq Mean Frequency in FR A Measuring Range Hz Avg Period Mean Period in
18. Message lick Sounda Offset Date Time Cancel ENG OFF DN PFF ON Turning ON OFF the Date and Time Display 4 Select ON or OFF by pressing SELECT Display Date Year Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Bysten Cnfg MISC Message Click Sounda Offset Date Time Cancel ENG OFF pN ON Setting the Date and Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Year Press SELECT to display the Year input box Set the year using the jog shuttle In a similar fashion set the Month Day Hour Minute and Second Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Set and press SELECT to confirm the settings ee oY 3 14 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Date YY MM DD The last two digits of the year are used to set the year YY Time HH MM SS The 24 hour clock is used Note The date and time are backed up by the built in lithium battery Leap years are taken into account 3 15 s u w nse N Huiyen B10jog e Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Value IM 701610 01E Direct Entry Using the Special Knob The following knobs can be used to directly enter values simply by turning them V DIV and TIME DIV knobs O TRIG D SEARCH ES DO o m PRESET amm SIMPLE ENHANCED o o V DIV TIME DIV ge gc ACTION DELAY Entry Usi
19. SUOI E19dO 19410 z Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting For corrective actions when a message appears on the screen read the following pages If servicing is required or if the instrument does not operate properly after taking the following corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Section The power cannot be turned ON The source voltage is outside the rated range The main power switch on the rear panel is not turned ON The backlight is turned OFF The screen colors are not appropriate Use a correct power supply 3 3 Turn ON the main power switch Nothing is displayed Press any key 14 3 Select appropriate colors for the screen 14 1 The display is abnormal The system is not operating Turn ON the power again 3 3 correctly The waveform display is Loaded waveform data from an Unload the loaded waveform 11 5 not updated external storage medium Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE activate local mode Execute a key test If the test fails 15 3 servicing is required The instrument is in the remote mode Other causes Keys do not work Triggering does not occur The trigger settings are not Set correct trigger settings Chapter 6 appropriate The measured values are Did not allow adequate warm up Allow at least 30 minutes for the odd time instrument to warm up after turnin
20. T div for Repetitive Sampling If repetitive mode is ON the sampling mode is switched to repetitive sampling for T div settings as follows Available T div setting varies according to the record length Record Length T div 1 kword 2 ns div to 200 ns div 2 ns div to 500 ns div 10 kwords 2 ns div to 2 us div 2 ns div to 5 ms div 100 kwords 2 ns div to 20 us div 2 ns div to 50 us div 1 Mword 2 ns div to 20 us div 2 ns div to 50 us div 4 Mwords 2 ns div to 20 us div 2 ns div to 50 us div 10 Mwords 2 ns div to 20 us div 2 ns div to 50 us div 32 Mwords 2 ns div to 20 us div 2 ns div to 50 us div Values in parentheses above are only available if the high resolution mode is ON Restriction During repetitive sampling waveform acquisition is not possible when the trigger mode is Single N 7 7 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 6 Using the History Memory lt For a description of this function see page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys NAP OO HELP CLEAR C6 e MEASURE CURSOR a me aca 400 sasron stanrisror MENU __ MENU SETUP aa DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D CD u SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION 2 V DIV TIME DIV Bios co Operating Procedure Recalling Data from the History Memory 1 Press HISTORY 2 Press the Select Record soft key HISTORY fe select Display eStart Reda earch Mod Record 0 Show Map 0 One A11 f End Re
21. aoe Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the Overview soft key displays the overview screen Pressing any key clears the overview screen MISC a a Netuork Bystem Cnf Next 1 2 a a A alibrationRemote Cnt1 USB Explanation IM 701610 01E 2003701 29 19 48 38 JE 0k screen is shown in the procedure System Overview CH1 10 1 50 0 Vzdiv Mode 1 701620 DC Full Record Length Max32MW CH CH2 16 1 50 0 Usdiy Option DC Full Printer Yes CH3 10 1 FDDiZIP PC CARD PC CARD J3 50 0 Usdiy PIB Yes DC Full Ether No CH4 10 1 USB H Yes 0 50 0 Vzdiv USB F Yes DC Full Others No Default Language ENG Soft Version 1 05 ROM Sum 270AH Linkage Date 62711729 Fri 69 39 Product ID i83 RITT Edge CH1 Auto This function allows you to check the ROM version model and installed options The 15 11 j O c D O gt O O 2 5 D Q O D Q Q 2 O D O e 5 15 5 Resetting the Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Position A protective circuit breaker is installed on the rear panel in place of a power supply fuse CIRCUIT BREAKER 32V DC 10A Circuit Breaker Activation If an overload occurs and excessive current flows the power supply is cut When this happens the reset button trips as shown in the figure below and the white indicator is exposed White indicator Reset button Resetting the Circu
22. me A External clock input External trigger input USB peripheral interface a Screen data Display processing circuit Display memory Data processing memory Tl gt e O Input Ll DoOouoooG ooo nput Oooooood opg Oooo ovgoo oo000 OOo o oo000 Oooo oo oo0o0 Screen data USB printer GP IB interface option or Ethernet interface option Serial RS 232 interface USB interface option o E Printer Computer VGA video output i Color LCD Bumn pier option GP IB option Ethernet RS 232 option FDD Zip drive or PC card GO NO GO O Trigger output O CH1 output The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Instead an external trigger external clock multi purpose terminal is installed in place of the CH4 terminal IM 701610 01E 1 1 Block Diagram 1 2 Signal Flow The signals to be measured enter at the input terminals and pass first to the attenuator ATT and preamplifier Adjusted vertical axis characteristics voltage and amplitude in accordance with the settings for input coupling probe attenuation V div and offset value are passed to the A D converter Voltages are converted to digital values by the A D converter The digital data is then processed by the data processing circuit digital file processing etc Further averaging and other types of processing are performed after cropping at the appropriate sampl
23. 4 lt lt Mainz 1k gt gt File List Path PC_Card Space 6623232 byte File Name Size Dat O Flash_Men PC_Card oO NetWork c lt old gt 2602 06 24 11 29 mr lt RECYCLED gt 1999 16 63 10 21 CYCLE6615 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 35 R W O CYCLE0014 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 28 R W h CYCLE0013 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 26 R W dp CYCLE0012 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 26 R W O CYCLE0011 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 20 R W CYCLE9616 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 18 R W TV CH1 CYCLE0009 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 17 14 R W Auto p CYCLE0008 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 16 17 R W w pe m fe If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message Note The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle IM 701610 01E 10 11 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Selecting the File Name 13 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu 14 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Auto Naming 15 16 17 File Name Auto Naming OFF DN Filename C IMAGE a Format Color fja aFile ListjaFile Name Thumbna i 1 Comment TIFF OFF PC_CardNR CYCLE000 ECYCLED 8 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to File Name Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard Enter the file n
24. 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format to select NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF or 1080 60p NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1680 5601 720760p Next 172 Selecting the Polarity 6 Press the Polarity soft key to select the polarity ENHANCED Type TV Type Polarity fig Level Field 6 Line rame Skip Tu NTSC Pos O Sdiv fj 2 x 5 248 IM 701610 01E 6 35 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Explanation 6 36 Setting the Trigger Level 7 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the trigger level to 0 5 div Selecting the Field Number 9 Press the Field soft key to select the number You cannot set TV Type when 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p or 1080 60p are set Selecting the Line Number 10 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Line press the Line soft key ENHANCED Type TV Type Polarity 6 Level Field ff Line rame Skip TU NTSC Pos 0 Sdiv i 2 x 5 248 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the line You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Depending on the TV Type setting pressing RESET sets the smallest line value to No 8 5 or 2 Selecting Frame Skip 12 Press the Frame Skip soft key repeatedly to select the frame skip This function lets you set a trigge
25. Cannot connect to the server Not yet connected to the ftp server This ftp function in not supported FTP Error Rwd FTP Error Cwd FTP Error Rm FTP Error List FTP Error Mkdir FTP Error Rmdir FTP Error Get FTP Error Put FTP Error GetData FTP Error PutData FTP Error AppendData FTP Error Client Handle FTP Error Others Cannot send data to a network printer Cannot send the e mail message Connecting to a NetDrive Wait until connection has been established Failed to initialize network The second time password is different from the first time Please repeat the second time password input Error in Setting 880 to 959 Code 880 881 884 886 894 899 901 916 IM 701610 01E Message Illegal date time Illegal file name Cannot change this parameter while data acquisition is in progress GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key Duplicated label Cannot change when Channel Display is OFF or Math settings are invalid Cannot change when ExtClock is active Cannot change settings during action on trigger 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Corrective Action Select Waveform Snap or Measure Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and c
26. Ifa scroll bar appears in the file list window you can turn the mouse wheel to scroll through the file list e To cancel the selection click anywhere outside the file list window The selection is cancelled and the file list window closes File Hane Size Date Attr Flash_Men FD lt DATAG 2666 61 61 6605 2662 67 05 p d 2662 67 05 8603 2662 67 05 2662 67 05 ET 7 6 Scroll bar 2002 07 01 Click the file directory or storage medium drive that you wish to select IM 701610 01E 4 9 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings 4 10 Setting V DIV and TIME DIV Setting V DIV When the waveform of a channel measuring voltage is displayed point near the V DIV value displayed at the upper left corner of the screen The pointer changes to Click the V DIV value for the channel that you want to set The selected V DIV value is framed in a box Turning the mouse wheel away from you increases the V DIV value turning it toward you decreases the V DIV value Setting TIME DIV Point near the TIME DIV value displayed at the upper right corner of the screen The pointer changes to Turning the mouse wheel away from you increases the TIME DIV value turning it toward you decreases the TIME DIV value Moving the pointer to the position indicated below changes the pointer You can change the V DIV or TIME DIV setting by turning the wheel Jorma 1 2O0k3S Msi 2002 07 05 19 04 54 Stopped 27
27. NAP SNAP HELP ca pan oe ea aca Q SETUP TEIT N IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION 2 V DIV TIME DIV CD a ees Operating Procedure Statistical Processing IM 701610 01E 1 2 Press MEASURE Pressing the Mode soft key displays the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Ez OFF Setup Setup ON f6T Range2 5 600di Press the Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Rangei tatistics Btatistics 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Pressing the Item Setup soft key displays the measurement parameter menu and the measurement channel menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next tatistics Setup Setup ON 6T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 0 P P o Freq 0 AYgFreq 0 Max 0 Period 0 AvgPer iod c Min Rise IntiTy 0 Avg Fall Int2Ty Rms idth Intixy Sdey Width Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1 co 0Shot Burstz 0Shot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ _ Source__ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the parameter you w
28. Press the Max Min Item1 to Min Max Item4 soft keys to emphasize the maximum and minimum of each measurement value in the display The displayed measurement values become Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 from the left Press the Sort soft key to sort the results ascending FWD or descending REV 9 5 SISAJEUY LUJIOJOARM e 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors Cursor Jump for V Cursor Marker Cursor Angle Cursor and Vertical History Cursor Only when Not Displaying the X Y Waveform See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical Marker Degree or Vertical History CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Vertical History 4 Pressing the Cursor Jump soft key displays a menu used to select the cursor you wish to jump and the jump destination CURSOR Type Trace ig Cursori ursor Jum 4 00 di ump Exec Vertical CH1 6 Cursor2 Ci to 21 4 6006di CURSOR Type Select Trace fg Pos x ursor Jum ump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 CURSOR Type Trace i Cursori e Refi Ref Valueursor Jun 4 000d i 2 00 di ump Exec Degree CH1 f6 Cursor2 j6 Ref2 360 Ci to 21 4 600di 2 00 di CURSOR Type Trace i Cursori a ursor Jump 4 000diy Show Cursor ump Exec Vertical CH1 6 Cursor2 Result Exec C1 to Z1 LHistory 4 600di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired jump type and select the cursor to jump and the jump destination Type Trace f Cursor 1 to Z1 J Ci to 22 C2 to Zi C2 to 22 4
29. The bandwidth limit can be set for each channel The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L combines the common analog filters with FIR and IIR filters allowing you to select the 20 MHz 1 28 MHz 640 kHz 320 KHz 160 kHz 80 kHz 40 kHz 20 kHz and 10 kHz bandwidth limits Full Bandwidth is not limited 20 MHz Analog and FIR filters are used to limit bandwidth 10 kHz to 1 28 MHz Analog FIR and IIR filters are used to limit bandwidth Analog Filter When using the analog filter independently the cutoff frequency 3 dB attenuation is approximately 24 2 MHz but when combined with the FIR filter it becomes approximately 20 MHz FIR Finite Impulse Response Filter The FIR filter is a secondary filter that uses data sampled at 200 MHz to filter a weighted moving average The calculation is done according to the following equation Yn Xn 2 2 xXn 1 Xn 4 where Yn is the n filtered data Xn is the n data before filtering Xn 1 is the n 1 data before filtering Xn 2 is the n 2 data before filtering The cutoff frequency becomes approximately 20 MHz when combined with the analog filter IIR Infinite Impulse Response Filter The IIR filter is a secondary filter that filters data sampled at 100 MHz Depending on the settings the following cutoff frequencies are available 1 28 MHz 640 kHz 320 kHz 160 kHz 80 kHz 40 kHz 20 kHz 10 kHz The attenuation characteristic is 40 dB decade IM 701610 01E 1 7 suonoun 1 3
30. When saving the results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters Comment is not available IM 701610 01E 11 25 WINIPs y 8BHe10 S 34 Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes Ey 11 8 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Saving the File 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort File ListlaFile Nane a E O A Canceling the Saving Operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec FILE ave Exec Measure Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Explanation The results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters can be saved in CSV format CSV file extension to a floppy disk a Zip disk or PC card A CSV file is a comma separated format file The CSV file is one of the common file formats used to exchange data between spreadsheet and database applications The data that are saved are the measurement results of the parameters that are specified in the automated measurement of waveform parameters Notes when Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters The restrictions are as follows Up to 82000 the number of items that are tur
31. command Note Up to 40 pixels per million of the color LCD may be defective Hed y283 JO 9S pue oweN Chapter 3 Before Making Measurements 3 1 Precautions During Use Safety Precautions When you are using this instrument read Safety Precautions on page v thoroughly as well as the following points Do not Remove the Cover from the Instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous When the instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment contact your dealer or nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual In Case of Irregularity If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord If such an irregularity occurs contact your dealer or the nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Power Cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord Also it should be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer See page ii for the part number to use when placing an order General Handling Precautions IM 701610 01E Observe the following precautions when handling the instrument Never Place Anything on Top of the Instrument Never place other equipment or objects containing water on top of the instrume
32. gt 93 g e 1080 601 1080 501 1080 24sF 2 to 2251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 565 Line Nos in cannot be set 45H 5H 5H 2245 2250 2251 Line No 1120 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 0 2 3 4 5 6 Field 1 htt h 1687 1688 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 728 f 1682 Line No gt 557 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 PIRI a ool lll aa en 5H 5 oa H ee pL sta i 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 60p 2 to 2251 Line Nos in cannot be set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Line No 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 2250 2251 e 720 60p 2 to 2251 Line Nos in cannot be set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 Line No 2250 2251 IM 701610 01E 6 37 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED 480 60p 8 to 2251 Line Nos in cannot be set lt H e e a e Po EF Wheels ele eg eluea a 2 Line No 524 525 526 568 2207 2208 2209 2251 Selecting the Polarity NTSC PAL SECAM and 480 60p Polarity Pos Polarity Neg Trigger Point Trigger Level T pe Trigger Level ptt pel Trigger Point A Synchronization Pulse Others Trigger Point Trigger Level Jad denise etn Trigger Level A Trigger Point Setting the Trigger Level Level Set the difference between the beginning of the synchronization pulse a
33. 98 Pihase Shitted DISMAY tices enrera s ra Tan ee olde Sule een ei ee tua sia ae eet 9 42 9 9 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 43 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using ZONES cece eceeeeteeee cece eee e tenses eeeaaeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeas 9 47 9 11 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output FUNCTION cece ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaaeeeeess 9 52 Chapter 10 Output of Screen Data 10 1 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option ccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 10 1 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option ccc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaneeeeeeeeeess 10 3 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Option 0 0 0 0 eee cece eee tttteeeeeeeees 10 6 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage MediumM ccceeeeeeeeeeee teers ee eeeeeeeees 10 10 Chapter 11 Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium Ade sIODDY DISKS oreari TN E 11 1 AE ZNO DISK cenaa a ota leaned a a send a N 11 2 IES SPC CAN nerna a N 11 4 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium i ceeeee eee ceeeneeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeaaaaes 11 5 115 Saving Loading Waveform Data sxc wesitietiarts wamanietnits tatters earn aes 11 9 11 6 sSaving LOading Setup Dala ic lecesieece i inea a e n E elt age ia wee 11 16 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeee
34. BlockNumber 1 TraceName CH1 BlockSize 1002 VResolution 1 5625000E 00 VOffset 0 0000000E 00 VDataType IS2 VUnit V VPlusOverData 32767 VMinusOverData 32769 VillegalData 32767 VMaxData 32766 VMinData 32768 HResolution 5 0000000E 09 HOffset 2 5000000E 06 HUnit S Date 2001 07 25 Time 01 45 00 CH2 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32769 32767 32766 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 ASCII Header File Format CH3 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32767 32769 32767 32766 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 CH4 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32769 32767 32766 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 App 15 3 x pu ddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo ModelVersion PhaseShift Note 2 1 MATH1 1002 6 1035156E 03 7 7000000E 01 IS2 DB 32767 32769 32767 32766 32768 2 0000000E 01 0 0000000E 00 Hz 2001 07 25 01 45 00 10020 1 02 MATH2 1002 1 2207031E 00 2 0000000E 04 IS2 V 32767 32769 32767 32766 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00
35. Follow steps 1 3 to select snapshot data waveforms 4 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a a Save Load Unload Utility Snap Selecting the Source Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the File to be Loaded 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Selecting the Snapshot Waveform to be Loaded 6 Press the Destination soft key to display a menu used to select the snapshot waveform File Name Flash_Men PC_Card NetWork Cire 2002 06 24 11 29 lt DATAG 2602 10 05 23 23 lt TEST 2600 07 12 16 50 CYCLE9G64 2002 06 24 18 22 CYCLE 603 2602 06 24 18 22 CYCLE0002 2002 06 24 18 16 CYCLE9661 2002 06 24 18 16 CYCLEG600 2602 06 24 18 16 CYCLE9604 i 2002 06 21 00 46 CYCLE0004 2602 06 21 90 46 FILE v Destinationa Filter Property oad Exec Snap1 SNP fe gt Snap 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired snapshot waveform to make the selection Load FILE Snapi Snap2 Snap3 Snap4 oad Exec Snap IM 701610 01E 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms Loading the File 8 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort fest inationa Filter Property Snap1 SNP fe gt Canceling the Loading Operation 9 P
36. H 96015 17 12 01 49 00040 17 11 29 48 H 00016 17 12 00 44 00041 17 11 28 43 H 00017 17 11 59 39 00042 17 11 27 38 00018 17 11 58 34 00043 17 11 26 33 00019 17 11 57 29 00044 17 11 25 28 H 00020 17 11 56 24 00045 17 11 24 24 00021 17 11 55 19 00046 17 11 23 19 H 00022 17 11 51 62 00047 17 11 21 44 H 00023 17 11 50 58 00048 17 11 20 39 H 00024 17 11 49 53 00049 17 11 19 34 00050 17 11 18 29 00037 17 11 34 25 24 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT Resetting the Search Results 25 If you set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or if you perform a search with all of the parameters Param1 Param4 set to OFF the search results will be reset Search for waveforms from the history memory function and display only the waveforms that fulfill specified conditions of particular parameters Search Criterion You can store various kinds of search criteria in Param1 Param4 Within those four search criteria you can specify the channel to be searched the search conditions and the searching range Condition IN Search for a waveform entering the specified range of the specified parameter OUT Search for a waveform extending outside the specified range of the specified parameter OFF Do not search for a waveform Item Setup Assign search parameters to each source channel Choose only one of the automated waveform measurement parameters Condition Range
37. Mode a a Cycle Mod f T Range1 Iten Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON Oe asad 1 2 Setting the Measurement Range 27 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 28 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start of the measurement range 29 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range2 30 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end of the measurement range Selecting the Target Waveform for Distal Mesial and Proximal Points 31 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 7 5 000di 32 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the measured waveform menu 33 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Next 272 Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Unit Dist Prox 34 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 35 Press the Dist Prox soft key to select the distal mesial or proximal unit Dist Prox 7 Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Distal Mesial Proximal 36 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 37 Press the Distal Mesial or Proximal soft key 38 Turn the jog shuttle to set the distal mesial or proximal point Setting the High Low Point 39 Press the Next
38. PR A Measuring Range s shows the corresponding neme at the measurement i item setting screen Period lt Width Width High 100 Proximal Line 10 Low 0 Rise Fall Pulse Pulse Count Set the measurement range PISN T Range to match the pulse When Pulse 3 width of the signal being measured T1 9 16 Distal Line 90 Mesial Line 50 Proximal Line 10 Mesurement Range T2 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E Reference Waveform Measurement Waveform 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Burst1 Burst2 Burst Width Set the measurement range Bst1 Bst2 T Range to match the burst width of the signal being measured 1 f f f f e Distal Line 90 Mesial Line 50 Width Burst2 __ I Measurement Range T1 cursor T2 cursor e Other Measurement Parameters Int1 TY The area under the positive amplitude Int2TY The area under the positive amplitude the area under the negative amplitude Int1XY The summation of the triangular area of the X Y waveform Int2XY The summation of the trapezoidal area of the X Y waveform eet AS E SE ae Proximal Line 10 For details regarding the area calculations see Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Delay between Channels The time difference between the rising or falling edges of trace
39. Servicing is required Check the output from the DC power supply being used Check the output from the DC power supply being used Reference Section 7 2 16 8 3 3 3 3 15 7 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN HunooysajqnoIL 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Relevant Keys CLEAR TRACE Gale EA Call se Jroa sar routes 400 aca stant sror SETUP Torey SPLAN Cory MAGE SAVE ae eae O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY ba JCD o A Operating Procedure Displaying the Self Test Menu 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the self test soft key menu MISC a a a a a alibrationRenote Cnt1 USB Network ysten Cnf nl ae 172 3 Press the Self Test soft key to display the self test menu Go to step 4 for a memory test step 9 for a key test step 13 for a printer test and step 16 for a floppy disk drive test a Zip drive test a PC card drive test or an accuracy test A A A A LCD raph Colorj Setup Seif Test USB List Next Info 2 2 Execute the Memory Test 4 Pressing the Test Item soft key displays the test item menu seif Test Test Item ie Exec Memory 5 Press the Memory soft key to be tested Self Test MISC Key Board Memory ZIP Printer Accuracy est io 6 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the memory test self Test MISC Test Item st Exec Memory 15 8 IM 701610 01E 15 3 Self Diagnos
40. Sro Look Pause Insert Home PageUp Delete End Page Doun Numeric Num Lock Lee ee ee EA Enter E 2 a EN 5 6 DE 8 2 ia ME gt D 5 Q x IM 701610 01E App 21 Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard ol 09 Keyboard Japanese When Pressed with the Control Key When the Soft Keyboard Is Displayed Other Shift Operation Shift Operation ACQ menu Ss MATH menu COPY DISPLAY menu ENHANCED menu FILE menu GO NOGO menu HISTORY menu IMAGE SAVE execution PRESET menu aaa ae M E POSITION menu Ke SHIFT condition TRIGMODE menu CURSOR menu SIMPLE menu a CH1 menu CH2 menu CH3 menu CH4 menu Same as left Return Enter Same as left Same as left Escape Same as left Back Space Same as left Same as left Return Enter Select Back Space Tab 3 MISC menu HELP SSS Caps Lock Same as left 7p D ow 2 Caps Lock App 22 IM 701610 01E Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard Select Soft key1 Select Soft key1 Select Soft key2 Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Select Soft key3 Select Soft key4 Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key5 Select Soft key5 Same as left Select Soft key6 Select Soft key6 F7__ Select Soft key7 Select Soft key7 ais een ees START STOP COPY IMAGE SAVE aa al Insert mode Decrement T Div Decrement T Div Same as
41. TRIG OUT norana aO 12 3 12 4 16 8 MUO GO E A E E E A E E E eectdeidabasuensaursenseudaede 1 8 THQGEF CONGINON onsin Na 6 22 Trigger Coupling 1 11 6 9 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 28 6 31 6 34 Trigger Delay siasatna a si aa 1 13 6 3 TRIGGER Group s nenas E E A N 2 3 TAOGE HOIG Olficoieec socczensietacsuscceduecuastansagtuisecdvennetectsatesacty 1 12 Trigger Hysteresis acsee a 1 12 Trigger Level 1 12 6 9 6 12 6 16 6 19 6 22 6 28 6 31 6 38 Tigger Modes ninurininatnnna aen 1 11 6 1 Tigger OUIDUE 23sec aver aeeeendiconeen 12 3 16 8 Trigger POSITION srren naa 1 13 6 4 Tagger SECTION isorosi an a N 16 2 TAGGEN SOPE ne A 6 9 6 12 Trigger Source ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeees 1 12 6 9 6 12 6 13 6 22 Trigger Type rarinsi paan aa aoneteaeaeane 1 8 Tro bleshooting ssscevageieadactanccuect Sea caded A enced 15 1 Turning Channels ON OFF ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 5 1 TENS IVI OGM sta ceicani eters ou tedadcasi SA 1 10 6 35 U USB IMC AGC sassa Savmitneaiies wtalantoasdgexi mameusaads 16 9 USB Keyboard cccccceeeccseessseeeeeenessseees 1 32 4 3 App 20 USB Printer ga ne ee 1 34 10 6 User Account Settings 2 cceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeees 13 22 IISEF IN GING nrasane aE e E ETRS 13 22 USOrPrESO bire EE scare ceoaneee 5 9 UTP unshielded twisted pair Cable c ccceeeeeseeeeees 13 1 V NOS Ol morem a e E tere a 1 21 9 2 9 8 NEI A E E ca A E A E E E EEEE A EAE 5 11 VIDIV K
42. VERTICAL A C_HORZonTAD TRIG D SEARCH oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV Operating Procedure Entering Settings for a Network Printer 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key then press the Net Print Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC A a a alibrationRemote Cnt USB Netuork Bystem Cnfgj Overview Next 1 2 a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Print Setup LPR Server 10 6 111 222 LPR Name PASSTHRU MISC a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Enter the printer server address If you are using a DNS specify it by name 5 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard 6 Enter the printer name Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Outputting the Screen Image Data 7 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 8 Press COPY ia T Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer LPR Client Function Press the Copy to soft key to select Net Print 10 C
43. a a edia Info Format Formatting a Floppy Disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it first Select the appropriate format for the floppy disk from the following choices The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L performs physical formatting 2DD 720 K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 720 KB 9 sectors 2HD 1 44 M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 44 MB 18 sectors wnip BHe10 S ay wo pue o e eq Buipeo7 pue Bunes g 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium Formatting a Zip Disk If you are using a new Zip disk you need to format it The format for 250 MB and 100 MB disks is as follows FDISK 1 partition hard disk format The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L performs logical formatting PC Card Partitions It is possible to set between 1 and 4 partitions Information about the Medium The following information is listed for the selected medium Media Name Name of the medium Media Size Total capacity Used Space Used space Vacant Space Free space Partition Size Number of partitions Note e Formatting a medium containing data erases the data completely The time it takes to format a floppy disk is approximately two minutes The time needed to format a 250 MB Zip disk is approximately 4 s A floppy disk cannot be formatted if it is write protected Floppy disks having a format other than the ones listed in this section cannot be used If an error message appears after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged Disks formatted to
44. a floppy disk Zip disk PC card or network drive when the Ethernet interface is installed MEASURE Key Sections 9 2 to 9 4 Displays the menu for performing automatic measurement of waveform parameters CURSOR Key Section 9 1 Displays the menu for cursor measurement SHIFT MATH Key Sections 9 5 to 9 8 Displays the menu for waveform computation Pressing the MATH key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu used to shift the phase GO NO GO Key Sections 9 9 9 10 Displays a menu related to GO NO GO SETUP Key Sections 4 2 to 4 4 Displays a menu used to initialize the settings to factory defaults perform auto setup which automatically sets the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L according to the input signal store or recall setting parameters and so on SHIFT Key Used to make the functions that are marked in purple on the panel operative Pressing this key activates shift mode pressing it again releases shift mode While the indicator above this key is lit shift mode is active IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs HISTORY Key Sections 7 6 to 7 8 Displays a menu used to recall data using the history memory function ACQ Key Sections 5 11 7 1 7 2 7 4 7 5 Displays the acquisition method menu START STOP Key Section 4 5 Starts or stops acquisition according to the selected trigger mode The indicator above this key is lit during acquisition Jog and Shuttle Dials jog shut
45. are not displayed on the DL1620 Type j CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Marker p ES s Moving the Cursor rA Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes 2000710731 11 11 25 JE _ Normal Stopped 21 T 500kS S ZMs iv CH1 10 1 0 500 Vzdiv DC Full 645 833nU Edge CH1 437 566nU Auto 729 167nU 0 000 V 5 979 167m z 104 167m V i CURSOR Type Select Trace B Pos x ursor Jum Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 Note IM 701610 01E When the T div is not set to repetitive sampling mode and the averaging mode is not set to averaging mode the sampled data may not appear on the V cursor on the interpolated display area when less than 500 points of data exist within 10 divisions horizontally or when less than 250 points of data exist in the Z1Z2 display area for Main amp Z1 amp Z2 waveform zoom In this case the V cursor value indicates the value of the nearest sampled data to the right of the cursor for interpolated display the sampled data is highlighted However the marker cursor is always displayed over the sampled data SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For Angle Degree Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Degree CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu C
46. e Ifa key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs e You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file e A maximum of 43 characters can be displayed in Path If the character string exceeds 43 characters is appended at the end File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 e When the setup parameters are loaded from a file the setup parameters of each key are overwritten with the loaded settings and cannot be set back to their previous settings It is recommended that the current setup parameters be saved before loading setup parameters from a file e The date and time and communication parameters are not saved Therefore when setup parameters are loaded from a file these parameters do not change e This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions e Files without the archive attribute are not displayed in the File List dialog box ma OO rrr 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medi
47. l The section that is detected is expanded and displayed in the zoom window When the edge is set to rising and the count is set to 2 1 26 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Serial Pattern Search Searches for a section of the waveform that has the same pattern as the specified waveform pattern specified using High or Low status or Don t Care The status of the waveform 64 statuses is detected at the rising or falling edge of the channel that is specified as the clock channel or at a constant time interval The matched pattern is displayed expanded in the zoom window CH1 CH2 Status Pattern of CH2 L H L L H Loo H L L Specified Status Pattern L L H L H x L L Searches Sections of the Waveform with the Same Status up to 64 Patterns as the Specified Waveform Pattern Conditions Clock Channel CH1 Timing to Check the Status Rising Channel on which to Perform the Search CH2 The Section that is Detected is Expanded and Displayed in the Zoom Window Parallel Pattern Search Detects a section of the waveform where the status specified as High Low or Don t Care of each channel CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 is the same as the specified status The status is detected at the rising or falling edge of the channel that is specified as the clock channel If the clock channel is set to None detection is performed on the status of all w
48. measurement range of Area2 using T Range3 and T Range4 In the initial setting the measurement range is 5 divisions of the display frame on the time axis You can limit this range The measurement range is specified using two vertical cursors for each area In Areai the measurement start point is the position where the fine dotted line is located and the measurement end point is the position where the coarse dotted line is located In Area2 both the measurement start point and measurement end point are where the fine dotted line is located The measurement ranges of Areal and Area2 can be specified redundantly T Rangei T Range2 T Range3 T Range4 T Range1 T Range3 T Range2 T Range4 Area2 Lg res i i Areal Area Area1 Dual Area Measurement Mode Mode If you set the mode in the Item Setup menu to ON the measurement result is displayed in the two areas You can select User1 through User4 Measurement Trace Trace You can select the trace from 11 types or from 8 types on the DL1620 CH1 CH2 Math1 None and Const1 through Const4 CH1 through 4 Math1 Math2 None and Const1 through Const4 Const1 through Const4 are constants that can be specified arbitrarily Measurement Parameters Items Select from 27 types of measurement parameters P P Max Min Rms Avg Sdev High Low OShot OShot Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Burst1 Burst2 Pulse Delay AvgFreq AvgPeri
49. waveform x 2 HDR Approx 2 K approx 3 K if Math1 and Math2 are ON ASCII CSV Approx 6 M depends on the input signal condition It takes more than 10 minutes to save the file Float FLD Approx 1 6 M 100 kwords 32 x 4 channels x number of history waveform x 4 Selecting the Waveform to be Saved You can save all waveforms or the specified waveforms from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 The vertical and horizontal axes and trigger settings of the waveform being saved are also saved For waveforms that are loaded using the history memory function you can save only the waveform currently displayed You can also save only the search results of the data in the history memory For details regarding data search of the history memory see sections 7 8 to 7 9 For snapshot waveforms see section 11 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms 11 13 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bunes z 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 14 Selecting the Range of the Waveform to be Saved Select the range region of the waveform from the following list of choices Only the data that have been saved by selecting Binary above in Selecting the data type file extension data size can be loaded in this instrument Main The range of the normal Main waveform It is the range defined by the displayed record length range displayed on the screen Z1 The range of zoom wave
50. zj r FILE ave Exec Binary Filter pe WF ka a Property File Lis PC_Card 15 Press SELECT to confirm the selection ma O IM 701610 01E 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Destination Directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed in angle brackets lt gt 17 Press SELECT to confirm the selection The Path ____ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting lt gt moves to a higher level directory Setting the File Name Comment 18 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu 19 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming File Name amp Comment Auto Naming OFF DN File Name coment oT 20 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 22 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 23 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 24 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 25 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 26 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in section 4 1 27 Press ESC to close the file name setting dialog box Note When Data Type is Float Comment is not available Saving the File 28 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to th
51. 03 Sdv 8 613E 01 6 281E 01 1 610E 02 1 218E 02 Cnt 2 360E 02 2 360E 02 2 360E 02 2 360E 02 235 2 042E 00 1 021E 00 0 000E 00 0 000E 00 234 0 000E 00 2 083E 02 0 000E 00 0 000E 00 233 8 833E 02 0 000E 00 0 000E 00 0 000E 00 232 4 167E 02 2 083E 02 0 000E 00 2 083E 02 231 4 167E 02 0 000E 00 2 083E 02 2 083E 02 Newest data For information related to cursors see section 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors IM 701610 01E 11 29 WINIPs BHe10 S ay wo pue o e eq Buipeo7 pue Bulnes z 11 9 Saving the Cursor Measurement Values Data Size Data size Number of measurement items x 15 x number of history waveforms File Extension The file extension is CSV The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note If a key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving an error occurs This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions i ie 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevan
52. 1 0 08 3 Press the OR soft key NHANCED A gt B N J A Delay B Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off uS 0 08 Setting the Edge Trigger of Each Channel 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 ENHANCED eHold OFF us 0 08 Window DFF ON Coupling 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 6 Press SELECT to select f or when the Window is ON IN OUT or IM 701610 01E 6 29 Bbunabbiuy 2 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 7 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Level Coup ing Level Hys Coupling HF Rej CH1 0 0 vI r I DC I OFF cz C 00v I corr c3 C 00v ico cha The Level setting for each channel can be input directly HANCED_ I using a USB keyboard i Type a a Windou feHold Off Set Pattern Level cus OR Coupling ON 0 08 The setting also applies to AB N trigger See section 6 8 When the Window is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trig
53. 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 40 Press the High Low soft key to select Auto or MaxMin IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters This function allows automated measurement of various parameters of the data stored in the acquisition memory Up to 32000 data points of the result of the automated measurement can also be saved to a file See section 11 8 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Restrictions Automated measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on the following waveforms e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Auto Measurement Mode ON Measures the specified item Statistic Performs statistical computation on the measured result of the specified item See section 9 3 Statistical Processing Selecting the High Low Method High Low High and Low correspond to the 100 level and the 0 level respectively that are used to measure rise and fall times and other parameters Select one of the two methods used to set the High and Low levels e Auto Based on the frequency of voltage levels of the waveform within the measurement range the higher amplitude level is set to High and the lower amplitude level is set to Low taking into account the occurrences of ringing and spikes This method is most suitable for measuring square waves and pulse waves e MaxMin The ma
54. 1 5 MB 8 Double click the file that you downloaded above The installation of the aforementioned three files starts Follow the instructions on the screen to install the files Checking the Web Browser Internet Explorer Security Settings Check Internet Explorer security settings The settings indicated in the table on the next page are the default settings If your browser security settings do not match those on the next page adjust them accordingly Otherwise the Web server function cannot be used The following explanation uses Internet Explorer 5 5 With other versions perform the equivalent steps accordingly 9 Click Internet Options on the Tools menu The Internet Options dialog box appears 10 Click the Security tab 11 Select a Web content zone The Web content zone varies depending on your network environment and browser settings Ask your network administrator to select the correct zone Internet Options a Es General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings 2 0O Internet Metue Trusted sites Restricted aites Local intranet This zone contains all web sites that Shes are on Your organization s intranet Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings click Custom Level To use the recommended settings click Default Level Custom Level Default Level
55. 10 DISDA Y eisai E 16 4 Display Fomati a che eweaensdlanecad ene encndcaaains 1 17 Display Interpolation ccccccsssccesseseecesseseeesneeeeeenaaens 1 18 DISPLAY REY vecaietirenianniintesasi echoes aataaser saute eee adaae 2 4 Display Settings vescrnsotoctisatesniscatandeecnsmeamacsawenesensaunes 1 17 Displayed Data Output FUNCTIONS ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 34 Bistakoa E teats tence ene neat acura 9 15 9 30 DING oer argh bast haga nia eels anata S 13 6 DINGS SS CNV CR aana a 13 6 Doman SUMING nna maguautuantoddinbenaneayeactine 13 6 Dual Area Measurement Mode cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 9 31 D ualAreaS sic gard ceenie train E 1 23 9 26 E EG GC enaa heb oiasas gras e Sa 8 28 Edge S Cali sergo ieren i E ATES 1 26 8 17 BOGE Tige anaiena aA aR 1 8 6 8 Effective Data Range ccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 ENHANCED KOY rerin ea aieea A AEREE 2 3 Enhanced THgGe Eases ET 1 8 Entering a Character String ccccceeeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Entering a VAMC asarrearen a a AA TA 4 1 Entering Numerical Values ccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 4 5 EVO IODC soner a a aah aeeeeoreteuces 7 3 E vel pe MOde creaa niaaa E AAR 1 15 Error IM EXECUTION esir E nes 15 3 Eror M SeMiNg esitenu a anan a EEEN 15 5 Emor Message S sxcacticen cs trcesacca decree stecnceieusaceceseyateecweanvade 15 2 Ethernet Interface c ccc cccceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3
56. 10020 10020 10020 1 1 1 0 0 0 The same header file format is used by all YOKOGAWA measuring instruments so it may contain some data which is not necessary for the instrument App 16 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Publicinfo Common Information FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber Trace TotalNumber DataOffset Version No of header file format Model name Endian mode Big Ltl Storage format Trace Block of binary file waveform data Number of the Group Total number of selected waveforms Start position of binary file waveform data Group1 Group Information TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Number of waveforms in the group Number of blocks in the group Name of each waveform Data size of each block of waveform Resolution coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Type of binary file waveform data for each waveform Units used for Y axis of each waveform no effect on data Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform exceeds this value Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform is below this value Maximum value of binary data for each waveform Minimum value
57. 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 13 4 Setting the Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 7 Move the cursor to the Net Mask field using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the settings menu 8 Enter the subnet mask address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the Default Gateway Set the default gateway if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 9 Move the cursor to the Gate Way field with the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the settings menu 10 Enter the default gateway address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the DNS 11 Move the cursor to DNS by turning the jog shuttle 12 Press SELECT to display the DNS setting menu TCP IP Setup DHCP IP Address 9 9 9 9 Net Mask 253 253 253 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 PN PN User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 13 Press SELECT to set the DNS to ON OFF or AUTO AUTO available only when DHCP is ON When DNS is set to AUTO the domain name and DNS server name are automatically set by restarting the instrument If DNS is set to ON the domain name DNS server name and domain suffix are displayed If DNS is set to OFF check the network cable connection and restart the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L DHCP IP Address 9 _9 4 9 Net Mask 259 255 255 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 DNS Domain Name id DNS S
58. 18756U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 70408M sale 1 68333 1 10417U 4 26318m 1 08333V t 1 08333V 4 58257Mm hi 87500 1 08333V 1 10417U 4 31178nV 600016 2 18750U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 41593m 00017 2 18750V 1 08333V 1 10417V 4 49231m BGG 1 08333 1 10417U 4 39857my AT 2 20833V t 1 10417U 1 10417U 4 65547my Sdy 5 93718mV Sdy 3 58885mU Qn 10 1 pe Udiy Full e CH1 0 po U Utility MEASURE Maximum Value of P P CH1 t 98 Cnt 38 MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin Item1 Itemz Iten3 Item4 Sort Fun REV Performs statistical processing on the same measurement parameters as those of the automated measurement of waveform parameters The following five statistics are determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters e Max Maximum value e Min Minimum value e Avg Average value e Sdv Standard deviation e Cnt Number of measured values used in the statistical processing For example if you selected P P of CH1 as an automated measurement parameter the maximum minimum average standard deviation and the number of measured values used in the statistical processing of the P P of CH1 are displayed The result of statistical processing that can be displayed is two parameters of automated measurement If you selected three or more parameters for automated measurement the first two parameters in the automated measurement p
59. 1k 2G 10k 100M 500 2G 10k 200ns 200M 400 5G 10k 100M 200 5G 10k 100ns 200M 200 10G 10k 100M 100 10G 10k 50ns 200M 100 20G _ 10k 20G 20G 10k 50 10k 50G 10k 50G 50G 10k 50 5 5k 50G 50G 50 25k soe 25k 50G 50G 2 5k 50G 50G 50G 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs N O1 AN Q O1 N N 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active gt x D D 5 2 x IM 701610 01E App 7 Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 100 kwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words 20 100k 20 100k 20 100k 20 100k 50 100k 50 100k 50 100k 50 100k 100 100k 100 100k 100 100k 100 100k 200 100k 200 100k 200 100k 200 100k 500 100k 500 100k 500 100k 500 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 2k 100k 2k 100k 2k 100k 2k 100k
60. 2 1 to 20 10 4 Mwords 1 to 4 2 8 Mwords 1 10 Mwords 1 32 Mwords 1 For each count of the trigger only the displayed waveform is preserved past waveform data is not preserved Values in parentheses above are only available if the high resolution mode is ON Display Set to One to display the selected record only Select the waveform to be displayed using Select Record from the specified range between Start Rec and End Rec Set to All to generate overlapped display of all history records from the Start Rec No to the End Rec No The waveform corresponding to the Selected Record No will appear brighter than the other waveforms Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 6 Using the History Memory Show Map A List of Time Stamps You can list the number of the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory and the time at acquisition end One screen displays 75 data points of information You can scroll through the data by using the jog shuttle Precautions and Restrictions You cannot use the history function while the acquisition mode is set to Average Displayed history records will be meaningless The history memory function cannot be used in repetitive sampling mode If you Suspend waveform acquisition before the current record has been fully read the record will not be recorded in the history You cannot use the history function while roll mode is selected History records are not lost when wavef
61. 59 16 Jek Normal Connection Logging List FTP CTL Server Sery Date Time User IP address Req Result Connect Log List The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L supports two clients but they cannot be used simultaneously When the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is being accessed from a PC or workstation i e when it s logged on Ci is displayed in the upper right part of the screen This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP client LPR client or Web server functions or the File operation The log is cleared when the power is turned OFF Before accessing a drive see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings You must restart the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L for the settings to take effect The files taken from a personal computer or workstation to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L have wvf hdr and set extensions You can access the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L s Zip drive floppy drive PC card or intern In ord al flash memory drive from a PC or workstation via Ethernet er to access these devices you must be running FTP client software on the PC or workstation User e Us 15 Account Settings er Name characters or less may be used The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Pa 15 ssword characters or less may be used The available characters consist of all ASCII ch
62. 5k 100k 5k 100k 5k 100k 5k 100k 10k 100k 10k 100k 10k 100k 10k 100k 20k 100k 20k 100k 20k 100k 20k 100k 50k 100k 50k 100k 50k 100k 50k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 200k 100k 200k 100k 200k 100k 200k 100k 500k 100k 500k 100k 500k 100k 500k 100k 1M 100k 1M 100k 1M 100k 1M 100k 2M 100k 2M 100k 2M 100k 2M 100k 5M 100k 5M 100k 5M 100k 5M 100k 10M 100k 10M 100k 10M 100k 10M 100k 20M 100k 20M 100k 20M 100k 20M 100k 50M 100k 50M 100k 50M 100k 50M 100k 100M 100k 100M 100k 100M 100k 100M 100k 200M 100k 200M 100k 100M 50k 200M 100k 200M 40k 500M 100k 100M 20k 500M 100k 200M 20k 1G 100k 100M 10k 1G 100k 200M 10k 2G 100k 100M 5k 2G 100k 200M 4k 5G 100k 100M 2k 5G 100k 200M 2k 10G 100k 100M 1k 10G 100k 200M 1k 20G 100k 100M 500 20G 100k 200M 400 50G 100k 100M 200 50G 100k 200M 200 50G 50k 100M 100 50G 50k 200M 100 50G 25k CE 25k 20ns soa 1ok_ fsoa 1ok fsoa iok 10k 10ns jso sk _ fsoG s fae fa fe fa 5ns 5oG 25k 506 EEC 2 5k 2ns 50G 1k 50G 1k soe Jik lso 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active App 8 IM 701610 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 Mword When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode
63. 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 7 2 Acquisition Mode You can select any of three acquisition modes as follows The default selection is Normal Normal The instrument writes sample data into acquisition memory without performing special processing Envelope The instrument finds the maximum and minimum sampled values per interval of 200 MS s 100 MS s when the high resolution mode is ON It then writes these values into acquisition memory and generates an envelope waveform showing max min levels for each point Setting Restriction This mode can be selected in normal mode when the time axis is 100 MS s or lower 50 MS s when the high resolution mode is ON For all other cases the acquisition mode is set to normal even if envelope is specified Average The instrument calculates average values and writes these into the acquisition memory If the acquisition count is set to Infinite the instrument uses exponential averaging and you are required to set a Weight value If the count is set to a numerical value from 2 to 65536 the instrument calculates simple averages using the specified number of readings Exponential Averaging Count Infinite Linear Averaging Count 2 to 65536 N Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn An 22 ON N An Value Obtained after nth Averaging Xn nth Measured Value Xn nth Measured Value N Number of Averaging Times N Attenuation Constant Acquisition Count 2 to 256
64. Ae nee TENUEANAE i Ec Display of Time Axis Direction The sampled data is read into the acquisition memory and a waveform is displayed based on this data The number of data stored into the acquisition memory differs depending on settings such as time axis settings trigger mode and acquisition mode The number of display lines in the time axis direction on a 10 div screen is 500 lines Processing therefore varies according to record length as described immediately below for more details on the relation between time axis acquisition mode record length of acquisition memory and displayed record length see Appendix 1 If displayed record length exceeds number of screen display points multiple data points are connected with a line and displayed at the same time axis position If displayed record length is less than number of screen display points the oscilloscope interpolates the data to generate the display See page section 1 4 Record Length of o s lind Dat Acquisition Memory y ampling Vata HM Display Record Length E XN 1 ny o o o Voltage Axis Time Axis 500 Lines gt 0 500 1 3 suonoun 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes 1 4 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Changing the time axis causes corresponding changes in the sampling rate and the acquisition record length F
65. Battery Box Say 701930 366973 701680 IM 701610 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Spare Parts IM 701610 01E The following optional spare parts are available On receiving these optional spare parts make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional spare parts or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Part Name Part No Minimum Q ty Remarks Roll chart B9850NX 5 Thermo sensible paper Total 200 MHz passive probe 700960 1 Input impedance 10 MQ Length 1 5m Front panel protection cover B9989FA 1 clear vi Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of Operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The Following Symbols are Used on this Instrument To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the user s manual or service manual IL gt Function grounding terminal This terminal should not
66. Ch3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 fold OFF Setting the Hold Off 4 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time SIMPLE Source gHold Off Cus Line 0 08 Explanation Triggers can be generated on the rising edge of the power signal that is being supplied to the instrument Waveforms can be observed in sync with the commercial power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Selecting the Trigger Source Select Line Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 13 IM 701610 01E 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 8 gt Relevant Keys MATH MENU ENU PHASE EA NAP P ACQ START STOP X Y Mi SETUP SPLA Gor mace SAVE o SHIT C HORIZONTAL fv Ar TRIGGER A EARCH O TRIG D TIME DIV Operating Procedure 6 14 Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type re re 6 Count fgHold off Set Patter Levely us A gt B N Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the A gt B N soft key NHANCED gt B N A Delay B Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off uS 90 08 Setting the Status and Condition for Conditions A and B 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B On the DL1620 settings for CH
67. Compact Flash using a PC card TYPE II adapter etc For details contact you dealer or YOKOGAWA sales offices appearing on the back cover of this manual Note You must use a PC card compatible computer when you want to use a PC card The PC cards mentioned above may not work properly depending on the type of computer that you are using Check the compatibility of your computer and PC card before working with a PC card Inserting the PC Card Insert the PC card facing left into the PC card interface The PC card interface is located on the back of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Removing the PC Card After confirming that the PC card is not being accessed press the PC card eject button next to the PC card interface Eject Button A N CAUTION e Wait at least one second after inserting the PC card before removing it Removing the PC card too quickly may damage the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Removing the PC card while it is being accessed can destroy data on the PC card When the PC card is being accessed an icon indicating the access status appears in the upper left part of the screen 11 4 IM 701610 01E 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium e When the instrument cannot read a preformatted medium reformat the medium All data will be eras
68. Condition Enter Pattern not Matched __ i Pattern Matched The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Trigger Condition Met When Activating the Trigger in Sync with the Clock Channel Set the trigger condition from the following list of choices True Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is being matched False Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern match condition is not satisfied CH1 Input Lo f i O CHEH CH2L CH2 Input a E s E CH4 X CH3 Clock CH Condition True l l l CH3 Input Belloni a The DL1620 is not equipped with Pattern not Pattern M channels 3 and 4 atched Pattern Trigger idien Met Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes Af Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC componen
69. For a description of this function see page 1 5 gt TRACE SNAP HELP E FILE misc GoNo Go uD SETUP setup psr a Gorr mace saz ae ae IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT Yma A CHORZONTAL ay O TRIG D smPue ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure 5 2 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Position soft key to set the jog shuttle action to Position Display Position Coupling Probe 6 Offset Je Banduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 172 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the vertical position You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 5 2 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform Range of Movement The vertical position can be moved in the range between 4 div from the center position in the waveform display frame Setting Resolution 0 01 div Confirming the Vertical Position For input waveforms and computed waveforms the ground level and vertical position are marked on the left of the waveform display frame 500 mV div Offset 1 V Offset Cancel OFF Position 0 div Ground Level gt Mark Vertical Position gt HON Mark Note handled as overflow data e Ifthe display wave
70. Format Information IMAGE SAVE MENU IM 701610 01E Format Color File Name Auto Naming List of Defaults Default Setting ON 0 div DC 10 1 OV Full OFF 50 V OFF CH1 50 V Menu Key MEASURE CH4 1 ms div All CURSOR CMOS 5 V 10 1 10k Normal Infinite OFF OFF Int CH1 OV Rise DC OFF A4 0 08 us 0 One 0 latest 1 OFF Set up ON Built in Normal OFF TIFF OFF ON MATH DISPLAY ZOOM POSITON DELAY GO NO GO SEARCH ACTION Soft Key Mode Item Setup Source ltem Dual Area Delay Setup Source Mode 1 cycle mode Time Range 1 Time Range 2 Trace Distal Mesial Proximal High Low Mode Type M1 Display M1 Setup M1 Label M2 Display M2 Setup M2 Label Format Interpolation Graticule Mapping Translucent Scale Value Trace Label Accumulate Mode Position Delay Mode Type Z1 Mag Z position Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy Image Save ACQ Count Send Mail Mail Count Default Setting OFF CH1 OFF OFF CH1 OFF OFF 5 div 5 div CH1 90 50 10 AUTO OFF OFF C1 C2 Math1 OFF C3 C4 Math2 Quad Sin Grid Auto OFF OFF OFF OFF Main 50 0S OFF Edge x2 0 div OFF OFF OFF OFF Infinite OFF 100 3 x pu ddy gt x Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard 104 Keyboard US When Pressed with the Control Key When the Soft Keyboard Is Displayed p Othe
71. Function 8 Enter a password of 15 characters or less for the login name If the login name is anonymous you don t need to enter a password Net Drive Setup FTP Server 150 0 222 111 Login Name YOKOGAWA Password HHH Time Out sec MISC a Net Drive Pn Others Connect Log List a Net Print Hl 9 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout Press SELECT to set the timeout time The available setting range is O to 3600 s Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings If Login Name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password Connecting Disconnecting to a Network Drive 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press SELECT to make the connection If the connection has been made successfully the icon appears in the upper right part of the screen Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Disconnect then press SELECT to close the connection The icon in the upper right of the screen is turned off Saving Loading the Waveform and the Setting Data 11 Press FILE and press the Utility soft key to display the File List FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 12 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to NetWork File List Path NetWork Space 214748364 byte File Name Size Tate Attr Flash_Men 1 ZIP Net
72. Internal Flash Memory Network Drive Specifications Outputs hard copy of screen Print the screen image to an external parallel printer through the USB PERIPHERAL terminal or Ethernet Supports ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 BU commands and PostScript Eternet interface option Output data formats PostScript TIFF BMP PNG JPEG 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed 2 Any of the built in drives floppy disk drive Zip drive or PC card drive can be selected Data Storage Item History Memory Floppy Disk Zip Disk PC Card 2 Internal Flash Memory Network Drive Specifications DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Save and restore waveform data settings other data Retains max 4000 waveforms recorded Retains max 16000 waveforms recorded 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed 2 Any of the built in drives floppy disk drive Zip drive or PC card drive can be selected Other Functions Item Initialization Function Auto setup Function Store Recall Preset Function Action on Trigger Send Mail Calibration Environment Setting Function Probe Compensation Signal Output Function Overview Function Self Test Function Help Function Thumbnail Specifications Automatically resets key settings to the factory settings Excludes date time settings settings related to the communication interface setti
73. Measurement Trend icon in the Web server window The Measurement Trend window where the trend display of waveform parameters can be set appears Web server window ess DL1640 Measurement Trend window KY Measurement Trend Page Measurement Trend Panel Graphi Trace Farameter Chant None MarkerPosition 0 00 Diy Graphe Trace Parameter Chant None MarkerPosition 0 00 Div Common Data Number Interval fioo E al Range Range 0 00 Div Range 10 00 Diy Statistics i Start Stop Note et a r 2 Tira Pe Te 3 oon li e This function retrieves the selected waveform parameters at the selected interval from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the computer and displays the trend To display the retrieved measurement values and trend Microsoft Excel 97 or later must be installed on the computer If the measurement value of a waveform parameter is not a normal number Not A Number the cell displaying the measurement value in Microsoft Excel is blank 13 41 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function 13 42 Setting the Trend Display Conditions Selecting the Waveform Parameter to Be Displayed Graph 1 and Graph 2 You can display two trend graphs For each graph you can specify the trend target waveform and the waveform parameter When the waveform parameter is Marker you can set Marker Position Selec
74. NO GO cable 866973 sold separately Do not use the GO NO GO cable 366973 sold separately for any other purpose than for carrying out GO NO GO determination on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L About the GO NO GO Cable 366973 Sold Separately Approx 1 5 m 6 To the DL1640 DL1640L RJ 12 Connector Wires are separated Modify them to suit your needs Color Pin No Signal Name Logic Yellow 2 NC White 3 GO OUT Negative Green 4 NO GO OUT Negative Blue 5 GND 9 53 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e Chapter 10 Output of Screen Data 10 1 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Printer Roll Chart Use only YOKOGAWA roll chart When you are using the printer for the first time use the roll chart supplied with the instrument When your roll charts have run out purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales offices listed on the back cover of this manual Part No B9850NX Specification Thermo sensible 30 m Minimum Quantity 5 rolls Handling the Roll Chart IM 701610 01E Thermosensible roll charts produce color using a thermal reaction therefore the following precautions must be taken Storage Precautions The roll chart begins to develop color at approximately 70 C It is very sensitive to heat damp light and chemicals both before and after use Keep roll charts in a dry cool and dark place Once the package is opened use the roll chart as soon as possible If the roll chart is left in co
75. NT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list The following are not possible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network e This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server or Web server functions e Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP When connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect e When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if Network Drive is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO e The time it takes to load waveform data from a network drive depends on the status of the network If there is enough space on your storage medium copy the waveform data to the storage media before loading it reducing loading time You can save data such as waveform and settings data to network drives via Ethernet in the same manner as with floppy disks or Zip disks Entering Settings for a Network Drive FTP Server Input the IP address of the FTP server the PC or workstation running the FTP server on the network to which waveform and setting data will be saved On networ
76. Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option File Name and Comments You must specify a file name Comments can be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and Types of Characters that can be Used Item Number of Characters Characters that can be Used File name 1 to 16 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Notes when Saving Setup Data You cannot save while the data acquisition is in progress Press START STOP to stop the acquisition The maximum number of files and directories that can be displayed in the File List is 2400 File Extension The File extension SET is automatically appended to the file Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with four digit numbers from 0000 to 2399 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of twelve characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the four digit number Specifying the Files to Display in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display SET Displays only the setup data files Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file 11 19 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes z 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data Note
77. No 99 VY a Sampling Mode lt Section 7 5 gt As explained earlier in Relationship between the time axis setting and sampling mode section 1 2 data sampling can be performed either in real time or in repetitive sampling mode depending on the time axis and record length The available time axis range under repetitive mode varies according to the acquisition settings For details see Appendix 1 Accumulated Waveform Display lt Section 8 6 gt This mode holds each waveform on the screen for a time that is longer than the update cycle so that multiple waveforms are overlapped The waveform age can be identified by color The following two modes are available Persist Overlaps the display of waveforms using the display color of each channel Color Overlaps the display of waveforms using 8 colors which signify the frequency of occurrence of the data values This function is useful when you want to observe jitters and temporary turbulence in waveforms IM 701610 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions History Memory lt Section 7 6 gt The oscilloscope automatically retains the last N waveforms recorded The value of N varies in the range 2 to 4000 for the DL1620 DL1640 2 to 16000 for the DL1640L depending on the record length and high resolution mode The oscilloscope retains all waveforms for the first N triggers then for each subsequent trigger the oscilloscope overwrites the oldest stored w
78. Number Select the number of measurement values measurement values retrieved from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the computer to be displayed in Excel from the following If the number of measurement values exceeds the selected number the values are cleared from the oldest values to display the newest measurement values 10 20 50 100 200 and 500 Retrieve Interval Select the retrieve interval from the following However of the selected waveform parameters select the interval to match the longest parameter cycle measured on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 2 s 5s 10 s 30 s and 60 s IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Measurement Range You can set the range on the time axis to measure the waveform parameter Range1 and Range2 are the start and end points respectively Selectable range 5 div Resolution Varies depending on the record length However the measurement start point cannot be set to the same point as the measurement end point or to a value to the right of the measurement end point Turning the Statistics Display ON or OFF The statistics Max Min and Average of the waveform parameters retrieved to the computer can be displayed e To display the statistics select the Statistics check box Clear the check box not to display the statistics The number of measurement values displayed in Excel is up to the number specified in Number of Displayed Measurement Values Data Number on
79. One Aborted the recalculation of the FFT Aborted statistical measurement processing Key invalid for this model Analysis aborted Data not detected Execute again after changing the settings or reacquiring the waveform The corresponding field was not found The frame contains indefinite data greater than Thr Lower but less than Thr Upper Bandwidth filter not set Power supply batter is flat Please do charge of the battery or replace Discription Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to change to local mode To allow key operation release the lockout using communication commands Reference Section 10 2 Chapter 11 4 4 4 4 9 9 9 10 4 2 6 15 11 5 11 7 10 2 7 7 7 8 8 9 7 7 7 8 8 9 8 9 5 7 7 4 IM 701610 01E Error in Code 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 to 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 to 620 621 622 to 641 656 to 663 646 to 653 654 665 666 667 668 669 671 676 677 679 680 681 682 683 684 IM 701610 01E Execution 600 to 879 Message Invalid file name No storage media inserted Storage media failure File not found Storage media is protected Storage media failure Invalid file name Storage media full Cannot delete a directory if there are files in the directory File is protected Physical format error File system failure File is damaged File system failure Storage media failure Storage media f
80. PHASE X Y MEN JEN SETUP pista Corr mace SAE o GHT SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV aa Operating Procedure Mail Settings 1 2 11 12 13 16 Press MISC Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC ia a a alibrationRenmote Cnt USB Netuork Bystem Cnf Next 1 2 Press the Mail Setup soft key to display the mail settings menu A a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comnect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Move the cursor to Mail Server using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Mail Server abCd wxyz co jp Mail Address nopgrefgh co jp Comment Interval PFF Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i MailBaseTine Mail Test MISC a a a a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Enter the mail server name If you are using a DNS specify it by name Move the cursor to Mail Address using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter the mail address of 40 characters or less If necessary move the cursor to Comment using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter a comment or 30 characters or less Move the cursor to Mail Base Time using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the k
81. Rng to Z2 soft key depending on the display format of the zoom waveform to set the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 respectively Changing the Range of the X Y Waveform Display 9 Pressing the Fit X Y Rng to Z1 or Fit X Y Rng to Z2 soft key depending on the zoomed waveform display format sets the X Y display range to the Z1 or Z2 zoom range Explanation The zoomed waveform of two locations can be displayed simultaneously dual zoom Note that if the number of displayed points is less than or equal to 50 or 40 zooming is not possible Selecting the Display Mode of Zoomed Waveforms Mode Main Displays only the main unzoomed waveform Z1 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 Z2 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 Main amp Z1 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the bottom window Main amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of 8 zoom box 2 in the bottom window Z1 amp 22 Displays the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the top window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the bottom window lt Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the lower left window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the lower right window Zoom Rate Z1 Mag Z2 Mag The maximum zoom rate varies dependin
82. SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to 0 3 div Setting the Time 11 Use the jog shuttle to set the count then press SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to minimum resolution 1 sample rate Set Time1 and Time2 if you selected T1 lt PLS lt T2 or T1 lt PLS lt T2 in step 6 Setting the Start Point 12 Use the jog shuttle to set the search start position then press SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to 5 div 13 Press ESC to close the dialog box 8 25 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function 8 26 Setting the Search Results Display Position When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 14 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Result a nag 5 iB 21 Pos Searched men Loa indow 0 000di Pattern po Width Zz Ie zz fag G A ros No Match Executing the Search 15 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The search results are displayed in the zoom waveform display position selected in step 14 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying Previous Search Results 16 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the displayed search results numbers The higher the number the more recent the search resul
83. STP cable to a hub or router 4 Turn ON the power to the instrument 100BASE TX Compatible Adapter Hub or Router apa mN Personal Computer d u p d goo o or Workstation a p Network Card UTP Cable or STP Cable Straight Cable When Making a One to One Connection to the PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power to the instrument and PC or workstation 2 Connect one side of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX terminal on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or STP cable to a hub or router 4 In the same manner connect the PC or workstation to a hub or router 5 Turn ON the power to the instrument 100BASE TX Compatible Adapter Hub or Router Personal Computer or Workstation SF aaa UTP Cable or STP Cable Straight Cable Network Card Note When connecting the PC or workstation one to one a network card a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX autoswitching card is required for the PC or workstation When using a UTP cable straight cable be sure to use only a category 5 cable Avoid connecting the PC or workstation directly to the instrument without going through the hub or router We cannot guarantee results using a direct connection 13 2 IM 701610 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Relevant Keys CLEAR SNAP HELP OCLI IT TL IN Crne msc Jfonocd mart X Y MENI EN PHASE ACQ START STOP CETUR p1sP1Av orv mace save o S
84. Stop 82 T 500k yey 2ns liv CH1 10 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full The phase of CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 waveforms is shifted and the result is displayed Computation can also be carried out on phase shifted waveforms Allowable Shift Range The phase can be shifted in the following range Time value between record length 2 to record length 2 resolution 1 sample rate The sample rate varies depending on the record length or T div setting For details see Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Notes when Shifting the Phase If you change the T div setting after shifting the phase the shift on the screen does not change but the specified time value change in accordance with the T div setting IM 701610 01E 9 9 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E lt For a description of this function see page 1 33 gt CLEAR NAP om TRACE zZ SNAP HELP L gue l H p Fue misd conceo jarn CES E ZA START STOP wee PHASE X Y MENU MENT P SETUP DsPLat Gory mace Save o SH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY C OO o s o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED a crs Setting the Mode 1 Z 3 Press GO NO GO Pressing the Mode soft key displays a menu used to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO Mode Press t
85. The typical value is a representative or standard value It is not a warranted value IM 701610 01E 16 3 a suonesiyioeds 16 3 Time Axis Item Time Axis Range Timebase Precision Time Axis Precision EXT CLOCK IN Specifications DL1620 DL1640 2 ns div to 800 s div record length is 8 Mwords 2 ns div to 500 s div record length is 100 kword or 1 Mwords 2 ns div to 50 s div record length is 10 kwords 2 ns div to 5 s div record length is 1 kwords DL1640L 2 ns div to 800 s div record length is 16 Mwords high resolution mode or 4 Mwords 2 ns div to 640 s div record length is 32 Mwords high resolution mode is OFF 2 ns div to 500 s div record length is 100 kwords 1 Mwords or 10 Mwords 2 ns div to 50 s div record length is 10 kwords 2 ns div to 5 s div record length is 1 kwords 0 005 0 005 50 ps 1 digit Connector Type BNC Maximum Input Voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms 10 kHz or less Input Frequency Range 40 Hz to 5 MHz continuous clock only Sampling Jitter 10 ns or less Minimum Input Level 0 3 Vp p for the DL1640 DL1640L 0 1 Vp p for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Threshold Level 2 V 5 mV resolution for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V 5 mV resolution for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10 V 50 mV resolution for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ 28 pF Minimum Pulse Width A
86. Upper Lower Set the range that defines the specified parameter s condition Logic Search AND Search for waveforms fulfilling all of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 OR Search for waveforms fulfilling at least one of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 7 17 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Parameter Measuring Range T Range1 T Range2 Set the measuring range of the specified parameter This is the portion of the waveform used to determine the values of the parameter Search Range of the Historical Data The search range extends from the Start Rec to the End Rec Search Method Search in order starting with the newest waveform Show Map Timestamp List Only searched waveforms are displayed in Show map When Search Mode is OFF all waveforms are displayed 7 18 IM 701610 01E Chapter 8 Display 8 1 Changing the Display Format Relevant Keys Operating Procedure 1 2 IM 701610 01E lt For a description of this function see page 1 17 gt Se AP CoPY MAGE SAVE a SHET SEARCH O TRIG D oO i SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION TIME DIV Press DISPLAY Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Quad Sine FAO A ON ON OFF 1 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format Quad is
87. V div to 1 kV div 1000 1 2 V div to 10 kV div 10A 1V 20 mA div to 100 A div 100A 1V 0 2 mA div to 1 kA div Setting the V div Using the Variable Parameter in the CH Menu You can set the V div using a resolution that is finer than the resolution provided by the V div knob and vertically expand or reduce the displayed waveform The waveform acquisition can be started with the changed V div setting Range The following table shows the range when the probe attenuation setting is 10 1 V div Setting with V div Knob Setting Range of Variable Setting Resolution 20 mV div 2 0 mV to 50 0 mV 0 2 mV 50 mV div 5 0 mV to 100 0 mV 0 5 mV 100 mV div 10 mV to 200 mV 1 mV 200 mV div 20 mV to 500 mV 2 mV 500 mV div 50 mV to 1000 mV 5 mV 1 V div 0 10 V to 2 00 V 0 01 V 2 V div 0 20 V to 5 00 V 0 02 V 5 V div 0 50 V to 10 00 V 0 05 V 10 V div 1 0 V to 20 0 V 0 1 V 20 V div 2 0 V to 50 0 V 0 2 V 50 V div 5 0 V to 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 V div 10 V to 200 V 1V When the probe attenuation is 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 the values are 1 10 10 and 100 times respectively IM 701610 01E 5 9 Displaying Inverted Waveforms Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 4 gt TRACE SNAP HELP of LL TTT OO MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC caneca nan RESET SELECT PT aca stanrisroP SETUP a DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT PNE A ae SEARCH O TRIG D Smee ENHANC
88. V0 av cus C X_I 000v oaan CH4 X I 0 000 vJ 0 3div Mathi X_I 000d 03i athe Hysteresis The Level and Hysteresis settings for each channel or Math function can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Start Point 5 606di4 Type Parallel Pattern IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Clock CH 6 Move the cursor over to the clock channel with the jog shuttle then press SELECT When selecting CH1 CH4 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1620 proceed to step 7 If you select None skip to step 10 Setup 60di 9 3div Math2 x Start Point 5 606di Type Parallel Pattern Setting the Clock Channel Pattern 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT to select or Setting the Clock CH Level 8 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to O V Setting the Hysteresis of the Clock Channel 9 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press SELECT again Use the arrow
89. When connecting a USB mouse connect the mouse directly to the USB PERIPHERIAL connector as shown below You can connect disconnect the USB mouse regardless of whether the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is ON or OFF supports Hot Plug When the power is turned ON the mouse is detected and enabled approximately 6 seconds after it is connected _S _ _ a a ea e Do not connect USB devices other than a USB keyboard USB mouse or USB printer to the USB PERIPHERAL connector There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L However do not connect two mouses to both connectors at the same time Confirming the Type of USB Mouse that is Connected The procedure to confirm the type of USB mouse connected to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is the same as the procedure to confirm the type of USB keyboard See page 4 4 IM 701610 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings USB Mouse Operation Operations Similar to the Front Panel Keys on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Top Menu Displaying the Top Menu Right click the screen The front panel keys on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are displayed as the top menu Selecting Items on the Top Menu Point to the item that you wish to select and click the item The setup menu corresponding to the selected item is displayed at the bottom of the screen The top menu disappears Pointing to an item with a submenu items with a gt mark displayed to the right displays the submenu As wit
90. a probe correct measurement cannot be performed due to the load effect 3 9 s u w nse N Huryen 3104 g e 3 4 Connecting a Probe Probe Specifications for the probe 700960 supplied with the instrument after calibration Item Specifications Setting 1 1 Conditions Setting 10 1 Input impedance 10 MQ 2 approx 14 pF 1 MQ 1 0 approx 150 pF When used with capacitance this instrument Attenuation ratio 10 1 3 When used with this instrument Frequency band DC to 200 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used with this instrument Rise time 1 8 ns or less 58 ns or less When used with this instrument Maximum 600 V DC AC peak input voltage or 424 Vrms Frequency is 100 kHz or lower Connector type BNC BNC Total length 1 5 m 1 5 m 1 When the probe s attenuation is 1 1 never input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage of this instrument When Using a Probe other than the One Supplied with the Instrument To measure a signal which contains harmonics of approximately 200 MHz use a probe with a frequency band of 200 MHz or higher Correct measured values cannot be displayed if the probe s attenuation ratio is not 4 21 10 1 100 1 or 1000 1 Setting the Probe Attenuation Follow the operating procedure given in section 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation so that the probe s attenuation matches the one displayed below Probe in the soft key menu If they d
91. a description of this function see page 1 15 gt MENU __MENU X Y Setup pise a Corr mace save o SHET EARCH TIME DIV Setting the Acquisition Mode 1 2 3 Press ACQ Press the Mode soft key to display the acquisition mode menu Record Mode fe Count i Res Moderepetitive Time Base Length 1M Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode from Normal Envelope or Average You may not be able to select some modes depending on the record length and sample rate settings Record Norma 1 Enve lope Average fi Res Mode Length 1M DFF ON Lo A A Repetitive Time Base ON Ext Setting the Acquisition Count 4 Press the Count soft key This is not available when the trigger mode is Single or Single N ACQ Record Mode i Count i Res ModeRepetitive Time Base Length 1M Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext Turn the jog shuttle to set the acquisition count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the count to Infinite When the acquisition mode is Average and you have selected Infinite go to step 6 Setting the Attenuation When the Acquisition Mode is Average and the Count is Set to Infinite 6 ie Press the Weight soft key AQ Record Mode Count f Weight Hi Res ModeRepetitive Time Base Length 1M Average Infinite 16 ON ON Ext Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation IM
92. all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified Status The Number of Times Pattern B is to be Met 1 to 10 times Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note _ If you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If the status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated 6 16 IM 701610 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED
93. div DC to 200 MHz 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 80 MHz 10 Hz or less When using the 10 1 probe standard accessory 1 Hz or less 1 ns or less Larger of 1 25 mV or 0 15 div typical 200 MHz 35 dB typical 8 bits 24 LSB div 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10A 1V 100A 1V 10 kHz to 20 MHz band limit ON OFF Realtime sampling mode 200 MS s Repetitive sampling mode 50 GS s High resolution mode ON DL1620 DL1640 4 Mwords CH DL1640L 16 Mwords CH High resolution mode OFF DL1620 DL1640 8 Mwords CH DL1640L 32 Mwords CH 1 As measured following calibration after 30 minute warmup with internal clock timebase under standard operating conditions as described on section 16 11 2 For repetitive events The frequency region for single shot is DC to sampling frequency 2 5 or the frequency region for the repetitive event whichever is less 3 Measured under following conditions input block shorted 10 kWord record length Normal acquisition mode accumulation OFF 1 1 probe attenuation 4 The typical value is a representative or standard velue Itis not a warranted value 5 6 Setting automatically made to match the type of optional current probe being used respectively 700937 and 701930 IM 701610 01E 16 1 a suoesoadsS 16 2 Trigger Section Item Trigger Mode Trigger Source Trigger Coupling HF Rejection Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Level Setting Range Trigger Level Resolution Trigg
94. et Pattern Level Cus OR Coupling OFF DN 6 08 6 32 IM 701610 01E 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Center Level and Window Width 5 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a dialog box used to set the center level window width trigger coupling and HF rejection On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Center Width Coupling HF Rej cHi 0 6 UL 50 0 UL_mc__ _ FF cHz CH3 0 0 vI 50 0 VI DC I OFF cH The Center and Width settings for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard Ia Window Coup 1 ing 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window center level Center 7 Press SELECT to display the center level menu 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the center level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the window center level to 0 V 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window width 10 Press SELECT to display the window width menu 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the window width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the initial value Bbunaebbiy 2 Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 12 The coupling and HF rejection settings also apply to the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Explanation This function sets up a
95. files that are required to use the Web server function described later Logging on to the Web Server DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 2 3 Start Internet Explorer Enter the IP address of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L for example 192 168 0 101 or the host name of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L for example dl1600 1 if a DNS server is available on the network as shown below Enter the IP address http 192 168 0 101 Enter the host name http DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 1 ae E Measurement Instruments Web Service Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back amp G4 Gisearch Favorites lt 3 G4 Sp x Press the ENTER key on the keyboard A network password input dialog box appears Enter the user name and password Enter the user account see the previous page used to access the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L In the example below DLUSER and are entered as the user name and password respectively Ifthe user name of the user account is set to anonymous default setting the password is not required Click OK If the logon to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Web server is successful the Web server window appears Enter Network Password E ajx Please type your user name and password Site d 600 1 Realm USER_AREA User Name DLUSER Password zz Save this password in your password list Cancel Web server window 4 Measurement Inst
96. following files are required when using the Web Server function s data capture measurement trend or command script functions For the installation procedure see Installing Files Required for the Web Browser page 13 32 Msvbvm60 d1l1l cmdlgjp dll comdlg32 o0cx Tested Combinations of OS and application software OS Web Browser Spreadsheet Software Windows NT Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 98 Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 98 Second Edition Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 2000 Professional Internet Explorer 5 0 5 5 6 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows Millennium Edition Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Microsoft Excel 97 2000 2002 Windows XP Professional Internet Explorer 6 0 Microsoft Excel 2002 The spreadsheet software is required when displaying the trend of waveform parameters with the Web server function 13 28 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Environment Connection to the Network Connect the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the network using the Ethernet For the connection procedure see section 13 1 TCP IP Configure the network environment and IP address for communication using the Ethernet interface For the procedure see section 13 2 Communication interface Set the communication interface to Network For the procedure see Setting the Communication Interface to Network page 13 30 User account Set
97. for the DL1620 is Set as the Clock Channel Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list f Search the status when the waveform changes from below the specified level to above the specified level Search the status when the waveform changes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div When None is Set as the Clock Channel Interval Set the interval at which to search the status When the Type is Parallel Pattern Clock CH Select a clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 that will provide the standard timing for searching the status Select NONE to check the status of all the data Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div Channels Specified as Clock Channels Level Set the level for determining rising and falling The range for the setting is an on screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Pattern Choose from the following f Check the pattern when the waveform changes from above to below the specified level 4 Checks the pattern when the waveform changes from below to above the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for the setting is 0 3 to 4 div Channels Other than Clock Channels Pattern Set using the H L or X
98. for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 0 3 Vp p for the DL1640 DL1640L 0 1 Vp p at DC to 100MHz for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p at DC to 100MHz for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 Vin 5 mv resolution for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 12 1 yndyno euis oaplA DyY Andinoc 1066 Andy 406611 12 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input External Clock Input Terminal 12 2 Input Terminal DL1640 DL1640L Rear Panel EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN lt 40Vpk 1MQ DL1620 Front Panel 1MQ 28PF lt 40Vpk 1MQ The external trigger input terminal can also be used as an external clock input terminal If you wish to drive the instrument with an external clock connect a clock signal to this terminal Specifications Connector Type Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Range Input Impedance Input Range Threshold Level Minimum Input Amplitude Minimum Pulse Width BNC at 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or less 40 Hz to 5 MHz continuous clock only approx 1 MQ and 28 pF 2 V for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10V for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL162
99. jog shuttle to move the cursor As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes 2000 12 13 12 55 07 Ea jiok_ sCNrmal 25 p 1M5S7s Stopped Insfliv CH1 16 1 50 0 Usdiy DC Full Cursor1 Edge CH1 f Auto 3 000MS 6 25660 Restrictions Cursor measurements cannot be made on the following waveforms e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Cursor Types and Measurement Items Type When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform H Horizontal Cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 e V Vertical Cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor Also choose the order of the data X1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the X axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 DX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 9 9 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors Marker Cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values M1 Marker 1 to M4 Marker 4 can be set on different waveforms Y1 to Y4 The Y axis values of M1 to M4 DY2 The differen
100. key Display Position Coupling Probe f s Offset J Banduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 172 3 Press the Variable soft key CH1 Invert Variable Linear Sci Label Next ON 0 100 v ON CH1 272 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle Note Ifthe V div setting is changed by rotating the V DIV knob the Variable value is set to the modified V div value If Variable is reset with RESET the V div setting returns to the value set with the V div knob before setting Variable 5 11 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 8 Setting V div Explanation 5 12 The V div voltage axis sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid There are two methods available in setting the V div Setting the V div Using the V div Knob The settings are 1 V div 2 V div 5 V div and their tenfold multiples This setting will become the reference for the range that can be set using the Variable parameter described next and the resolution V div Setting Range The V div setting range for each probe attenuation value is shown in the table below Probe Attenuation Setting Range 1 1 2 mV div to 10 V div 10 1 20 mV div to 0 1 kV div 100 1 0 2
101. keyboard The name of directory file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard File Name Path PC_Card Space 5595136 byte PC_Card NetWork lt old lt RECYCLED CYCLE9611 CYCLE9610 CYCLE9669 CYCLE9608 CYCLE0007 CYCLE0006 CYCLE9605 CYCLE9G64 Function Renane Flash_Men 2002 06 24 11 29 1999 16 03 10 21 2002 06 24 19 41 2002 06 24 19 40 2602 06 24 19 27 2002 06 24 19 26 2002 06 24 19 25 2602 06 24 19 25 2002 06 24 19 21 2602 06 24 19 19 R W R U R U R W R U R U R U Enter the directory file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 40 IM 701610 01E 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory Creating a Directory Explanation IM 701610 01E Follow steps 1 3 to display the file function selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Make Dir Delete Copy Renane Make Dir _ Utility FILE Selecting the Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Creating the Directory 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a medium or a directory 7 Pressing the Dir Name soft key displays a keyboard File List Path PC_card Spac
102. keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 0 3 div Setting the Pattern for Each Channel 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT key to select H L or X Setting the Level for Each Channel 11 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the Level and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to O V Setting the Hysteresis for Each Channel 12 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 0 3 div Setting the Start Point 13 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the start point then press SELECT Use the jog shuttle to select the start point then press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 5 div 14 Press ESC to close the dialog box 8 23 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Display Position for the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 15 Press the Results Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Type a Parallel P
103. labels of the displayed waveforms select the TraceLabel check box Clear the check box not to display the labels e Turning the Display of the Upper and Lower Limits of the Displayed Waveforms ScaleValue ON or OFF To display the upper and lower limits of the displayed waveforms select the ScaleValue check box Clear the check box not to display the upper and lower limits ASUUN COROT Acquisition Stark Stop Channel Chanz W Display Position i 000 Diy IM 701610 01E 13 39 uodo 9g 413 U JOUER E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Selecting the Waveforms to Be Saved File Selecting the Target Waveforms Trace From the Trace list select the waveforms to be saved from the following All all waveforms 1 to 4 or 1 to 2 channels 1 to 2 for the DL1620 channels 1 to 4 or Math 1 to Math 2 or Math 1 only for the DL1620 computed waveforms Selecting the Range to be Saved Range Select the range in which the displayed target waveforms are to be saved from the following Main Z1 Z2 and Z1_Z2 displayed as Z1 amp Z2 on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L s menu For the meaning of the selections see the explanations in section 11 5 Setting the History Data Display Selecting by History Data Number History No You can specify the history number of the data to be displayed Selecting the Newest or Oldest Data You can specify the newest or the oldest data in the history data to be displayed Selecting One or Al
104. minimum 2 LOW Low Level Period Indicates the post trigger and internal processing time 1 us minimum 12 4 IM 701610 01E 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT A N CAUTION e When making a connection turn OFF the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the monitor e Never short circuit the RGB VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage This may damage the instrument RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal 0202020202 O VIDEO OUT VGA Through RGB output the contents displayed on the instrument can be displayed on an external monitor Monitors that can be connected are VGA monitors or multi synchronous monitors that can display VGA Specifications D Sub 15 Pin Receptacle Pin No Signal Specification 1 Red 0 65 Vp p 2 Green 0 65 Vp p 3 Blue 0 65 Vp p 4 5 Se 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 10 GND 11 12 13 Horizontal synchronous signal Approx 31 3 kHz TTL negative logic 14 Vertical synchronous signal Approx 60 Hz TTL negative logic 15 IM 701610 01E 12 5 yndyno jeubls oapiA OuY Andinoc 1368n Andy 406611 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT Connecting the Monitor 1 Turn OFF the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the monitor 2 Connect the monitor to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using an analog RGB cable 3 Turn ON the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the monitor The instrument s screen is displayed on the monitor Note e The RGB VIDEO OUT terminal outputs RGB video sig
105. move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX 15 Repeat steps 6 14 to set Param1 through Param4 search Upper XXX Lower XXX Setting the Logic 16 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Setting the Parameter Measuring Range 17 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight T Range1 Select Condition Ja Item Logic Paran iv Search Parami DFF IN DUT OR Exec 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the left edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value 19 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight T Range2 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the right edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value Upper XXX Lower XXX 7 16 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Executing the Search 21 Press the Search Exec soft key to execute the search Displaying the Searched Waveform 22 Press ESC to return to the HISTORY menu 23 Press the Show Map soft key to display a list of the numbers of the searched waveform data and time at acquisition end History Memory Map aN H 60012 17 12 06 30 00013 17 12 05 25 00038 17 11 33 20 H 00014 17 12 04 19 00039 17 11 30 52
106. oe eee Ae 16 7 Keyboard Printer and Mouse Interface ccccccccceseeceeseeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeseeseeseeseeseeseeeeees 16 7 Auxiliary Input Output SOCtiON isecazc2sesvas2et2sacaresczesecoassenarelsouaesesiosaicaseninens aa 16 8 Computer SACS camisa Secs ear tal cane la os entree ater Pecee lates eee wagons eww et ed abecla yas sasseusens 16 9 OC Cal eats iitesere ened eat ceria teurtal na eiar esau yee aces 16 10 Extel fal DIMENSIONS cire sane reaatasandancedsndte andere E 16 12 Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record kenol cnt ais 2cais cece swanre send eunpediwmiguvorcimearsas tu tenennigen ideal NG App 1 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaaneeeeees App 13 Appendix3 ASCIl Header File Format sobcrneinrennianei a a A E App 15 Appendicd LISTO DEAU neresi a a R App 19 Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeess App 20 xiii Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 Block Diagram System Configuration Built in printer option Screen hard copy External clock input External trigger input lt lt gt GO NO GO judgement output lt _ _________ RGB video signal output Trigger output CH1 output Object to be measured Signal input Screen data Oo Floppy disk Zip disk or PC card Block Diagram ATT Preamplifier CH1 O CH2 Le is Ol oe
107. of binary data for each waveform Resolution coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Units used for X axis for each waveform no effect on data Date when waveform acquisition was completed Time when waveform acquisition was completed For 1 to 7 see the next page Privatelnfo Information Indigenous to Model ModelVersion MathBlockNo FormMath1 FormMath2 DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo PhaseShitt Calculation of the actual display offset of the phase shifted waveform DisplayPointNo PhaseShitt Version No of the model Block No of block to be computed Waveform for Math1 and its contents Waveform for Math2 and its contents Length of the data displayed on the screen display record length Value which indicates which point of the memory is the left end of the display record length display offset is 1 when record length display record length Phase information lead delay 2 xipueddy App 17 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Creation of an ASCII Header File When waveform data Waveform is stored on a floppy disk or a Zip disk the following files will be created automatically in the DL_WAVE directory Waveform data file WVF ASCII header file HDR The waveform data file can be recalled to the instrument using the file menu but the ASCII header file cannot therefore it can
108. of the vertical axis and the horizontal axis 1 17 suonoun 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Waveform Labels Section 8 5 You can assign an arbitrary label up to 8 characters to each waveform Trigger Mark fick Normal 260kKS S Sms div CH1 10 1 5 60 U diy DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Vzdiv DC Full Waveform Label Scale Values Edge CH1 f Auto DISPLAY Format pTpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next Selects use of Dual A EA Co ajor px for pN OFF 172 2 waveform windows Display Interpolation lt Section 8 2 gt This feature selects the type of interpolation applied in areas where there are less than 500 sample points Less than 250 points in the zoom window when zooming on the waveform using Main amp Z1 amp Z2 per 10 time axis divisions These areas are referred to as interpolation areas Three settings are available Line Interpolation interpolates between two dots using a straight line Sine Interpolation Generates interpolation data using the function SEx then interpolates between two dots using resulting sine curve Sine interpolation is suitable for observation of sine waves Pulse Interpolation Interpolates between two dots using a step No Interpolation Displays measurements as discrete dots without interpolation IM 701610 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions X Y Waveform Displa
109. on the front panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L which allows you to operate the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L in a similar fashion See Appendix 5 DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L o I TMV USB connection Connecting a USB Mouse Option lt Section 4 1 gt You can connect a USB mouse to use the menu screen of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Initialization lt Section 4 2 gt This function resets the key settings to the factory settings default settings and is useful when complex settings have been made and you want to cancel all of them at once However settings related to communications and setting parameters on storing and recalling function are not reset Auto Setup lt Section 4 3 gt This function makes settings automatically such as vertical sensitivity time axis and trigger settings to suit the signal to be measured This is useful when the signal to be measured is unknown However there might be particular signals for which the auto setup function may not work properly Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters lt Section 4 4 gt You can store setting parameters to the internal memory The stored parameters can also be recalled to modify the settings on the instrument 4 32 IM 701610 01E 1 7 Other Useful Functions Snapshot lt Section 4 6 gt If single start is not selected a waveform is updated at the specified intervals or is displayed in roll mode Thus to retain the currently displayed waveform acquisiti
110. orizontal CH1 Setup Menu Operation Similar to the Soft Key Operation Selecting an Item on the Setup Menu Click the item that you wish to select on the setup menu If another menu appears when you select an item move the pointer to the new frame displaying the item that you wish to select and click the item If an item such as ON or OFF appears when you select an item move the pointer to the new frame containing the item and click the item This operation switches the item For menus on which items are selected using the jog shuttle and SELECT click the desired item Click again to confirm the new setting and close the selection dialog box For items through which you can scroll turn the mouse wheel to scroll Click within this frame to show the selection menu Point to the item that you wish to select and click the item to confirm the selection scale Trace Click within this frame to switch the selected item DISPLAY Selection items Clearing the Menu Screen Click anywhere outside the menu screen Setting Values For menu items with a amp or icon numeric values can be entered as follows e To select a menu item with a ei or icon click the center of the menu item If there are two setup items in a single menu item you can click either item Turn the mouse wheel away from you to increase the value e Turn the mouse wheel toward you to decrease the value To move to a different digit cl
111. overall record length changes If the timebase is provided by an external clock the trigger delay is fixed at Os no delay IM 701610 01E 6 3 Setting the Trigger Position lt For a description of this function see page 1 13 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP Se a SEARCH V DIV TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press POSITION 2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger position You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you wish to select 10 50 or 90 you can press the corresponding soft key POSITION Position Set to Set to Set to 50 07 107 507 907 In addition pressing RESET resets the position to 50 Explanation Trigger Positon The trigger position is the waveform position that results when the trigger delay is added to the trigger point If the trigger delay is O s therefore the trigger position is equivalent to the trigger point You can select the location of the trigger position on the screen k Trigger Position Delay Time Trigger Point Setting Range for Trigger Position O to 100 of record length in 1 steps Position Marker A position marker marker appears above the bar at the top of the screen The marker indicates the trigger position with respect to the total record length 6 4 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 6 3 Setting the Trigger Position When Setting the Trigger Position If you change the trigger position while waveform acquisit
112. power ON or OFF Items to be Checked before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed correctly as instructed in section 3 2 Installation Check that the power cord is connected correctly as sown in section 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Turning the Power ON OFF POWER switch The power is turned ON and OFF alternately as the switch is pressed OFF ON Note __ e With the DC Power Model if the main power is ON but the power does not turn on even if you turn on the power switch the circuit breaker on the rear panel may be tripped Reset the circuit breaker by following the procedure in section 15 5 Resetting the Circuit Breaker e With the DC Power Model with the DC power supply specification a shutdown may occur if the power supply voltage exceeds 19 VDC or falls below 9 5 VDC In case of a shutdown power cycle the unit using the power switch on the front panel turn the power OFF wait at least 10 seconds then turn the power back ON again If the instrument still fails to start turn OFF the power switch on the front panel turn OFF the main power switch on the rear panel then wait 10 seconds or more and turn the power back ON again Response at Power ON IM 701610 01E Self test and calibration start automatically when the power switch is turned ON If the check results are satisfactory the normal waveform display screen will appear Note e Wait at least 10 seconds after turni
113. range selected You can zoom the calculation results so that up to 500 data are displayed Notes when Displaying Power Spectrums e Cannot be executed if the displayed record length is less than number of computation points Point 9 39 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARA e 9 7 Smoothing Relevant Keys MENU X Y MEN setup pispLay Copy MAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED o ACTION DELAY POSITION 2 V DIV TIME DIV P t Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 M1 Displayani Setup M1 Label Math2 is not available on the DL1620 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box Mi Setup CHi CHZ Operation Scale Center O 0000E 00 Sensitivity 1 00000E 02 Unit Smoothing LDFF __ON__ i E of Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup MZ Label ON C1 C2 Math1 ON C3 C4 Mathz To smooth the measured data set Operation to Pass Thru Operation Select Source CH1 CH2 Scale CH1 CH2 Center CH1 CH2 Sensitivity PS Unit Smoothing Mm Mi DisplayaMi Setup Mi Label Z Display aZ Setup MZ Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz 9 40 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 7 Smoothing Note If an operator othe
114. section 15 2 Turning ON OFF the Click Sound Set whether or not to make click sounds when the jog shuitle is turned The default setting is ON 14 4 IM 701610 01E 14 3 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Relevant Keys O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key MISC a a a a a alibrationRenote Cnt1 USB Network ystem Cnf pad a 142 3 Press the LCD soft key to display the backlight ON OFF menu ia a LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test Next Info 2 2 Setting Auto OFF 4 Press the Auto OFF soft key to select either ON or OFF Auto OFF Bright LCD OFF Exec ON 5 If Auto OFF is turned ON press the Time soft key Using the jog shuttle set the time at which the backlight will automatically turn OFF LCD OFF Exec Setting the Brightness of the Backlight 6 Press the Brightness soft key Using the jog shuttle adjust the brightness of the backlight Turning ON OFF the Backlight 7 Press the LCD OFF Exec soft key to turn OFF the backlight MISC Auto OFF Bright LCD OFF ness Exec ON 4 Press any key to return to the measurement screen IM 701610 01E 14 5 SUO E19dO 19410 z 14 3 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Explanation Turning ON OFF the backlight LCD OFF Turns ON OFF the LCD backl
115. section 9 4 Statistical Processing of Historical Data Performs automated measurement of waveform parameters on waveforms that were acquired using the history memory function and performs statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest waveform The range on which the Statistics are measured is the waveform that is displayed on Show Map It can be used with Delay and 1 cycle mode 9 24 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing Target Waveforms CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 Automated Measurement Parameters for Statistical Processing Items of statistical processing per period are given in section 9 2 Items of other statistical processing are indicated in section 9 2 and 9 4 The result of statistical processing that can be displayed is only two parameters of automated measurement Measurement Range during Statistical Processing The measurement range is the same as that specified for normal automated measurement see section 9 2 and 9 4 Show Results If you perform statistical processing for each period or statistical processing of historical data a list of measured results can be displayed for the selected automated measurement parameters The waveforms are numbered from the oldest historical data and the corresponding results of automated measurement are displayed The maximum and minimum values of each waveform parameter are displayed with the t maxim
116. server window File Edit View Favorites Tools Help daBack 9 fat Search Favorites lt 3 Bye bttp fidlt6o0 1 YOKOGAWA Test and Measurement amp Measurement nstruments Web Service Address Contents File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Flash_Mern ZIP User DLUSER Internet a Internal flash memory Built in storage media Depending on the product specifications one of the following is displayed e Fd Floppy disk e Zip Zip disk e PC Card PC card e You can open folders on each storage medium and view the file list You can select files displayed in the window and transfer files to the computer My Documents 0001 BMP agod BMP A ETO a SET My Computer ogiz BMP o002 6To 000a BMP 0003 BTO Up to two computers can be logged on to the file transfer function simultaneously e You cannot operate the files simultaneously from two computers e When the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is printing or operating on files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function the Web server function cannot be used IM 701610 01E 13 35 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function 13 36 Capturing Data Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network See page 13 30 Click the Data Capture icon in the Web server window The Data Capture wi
117. shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing SELECT displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press SELECT Operation Source W Select Scale Center CHz Sensitivity Unit EU FFT Points ik FFT Window Hanning FFT Range Main m Mi DisplayaMi Setup MI Label Z Display Janz Setup MZ Label ele elo Scaling 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual If you select Auto go to step 18 12 If you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Center 13 Press SELECT to display a menu used to set the position of the center in the waveform display 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the position of the center and press SELECT 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sensitivity 16 Press SELECT to display the menu used to set values in 1 div increments 17 Turn the jog shuttle to set values in 1 div increments and press SELECT Setting the Unit 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 19 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less 9 37 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum Setting the Number of FFT Points Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Points Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to select the number of points on whic
118. signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Correlation with the Window Trigger If the window is turned ON the trigger is activated when either the OR trigger or the window trigger becomes true For details related to window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger 6 31 Bbunebbiyp 2 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys SEA TIME sDIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a 6 Count f Hold Off et Pattern Levely Cus A gt BCN Coup 1 ing 1 0 08 3 Press the OR or Width soft key NHANCED A gt B N J A Delay B Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Window Trigger 4 Press the Window soft key to select ON Set the status and trigger conditions of each channel according to the procedures given in section 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out or 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED ENHANCED Type a a Window Hold OFf
119. situated in the rear sides To prevent a rise in the internal temperature the vent holes should not be blocked and sufficient clearance should be maintained around them If a printer comes with your DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L allow extra space for operation and do not place objects on top of the printer N 3 3 s u w nse N Huryen 3104 g e 3 2 3 4 Installation Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient Temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient Humidity 20 to 80 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer No condensation should be allowed Note e To ensure high measurement accuracy the instrument should only be used under the following conditions Ambient temperature 23 5 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In such cases allow the instrument to acclimatize to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Never Install the Instrument in the Following Places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Near magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high In an unstable place Installation Position Rubber Feet Place the instrument in a horizontal positio
120. soft key Utility FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format Attr Delete Exec J D k Selecting the Source Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data IM 701610 01E 11 35 WINIPs y BHe10 S By Wo pue O e eq Buipeoq pue Bunes Ey 11 11 Copying Files 11 36 Selecting the Source File One at a Time 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Note By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp ps jog or png extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list 2002 06 24 19 25 69 J Stopped 26 Path PC_card Space 5865472 byte File Nane Size Dat Flash_Men PC_Card 1 NetWork J lt old gt 2602 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED gt 1999 10 03 16 21 CYCLE9605 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 21 R U CYCLE0004 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 19 R U CYCLE0003 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 16 R U CYCLE0002 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 09 R U CYCLE9661 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 07 R U CYCLE0000 2602 06 24 19 05 Utility FILE Function 7 A Dest Dir Copy If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the j
121. the previous page The statistics are determined on all the measured data since the trend display was started not only on the displayed measurement values Updating the Settings Click Update to update the Marker Position and Range that are set on the control panel of the Measurement Trend window to match the latest settings of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Starting Stopping the Trend Display of Waveform Parameter Measurement Values Start Click Start Stop The indicator becomes yellow and the retrieval of the measurement values of waveform parameters starts at the specified retrieve interval At the same time Microsoft Excel starts and the measurement values and trend graphs are displayed drawn If the statistical display is ON the statistics are also displayed The retrieval of the measurement values of waveform parameters continues until the operation is stopped Stop Click Start Stop while the trend display is in progress The indicator goes OFF and the display and drawing of the measurement values and trend graph stop If you attempt to save the data to a file or close Excel while the trend display is in progress a runtime error occurs In this case select No on the runtime error dialog box and close the dialog box Then click Start Stop in the Measurement Trend window to stop the trend display After stopping the trend display save the file or close Excel Range 10 00 Diy Start Stop Indicator Statist
122. the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the thumbnail function becomes disabled IM 701610 01E 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory AN CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys PHASE O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Rename soft key Utility Utility_ FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format Lo Po Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium Selecting the Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Changing the File Attributes 6 The procedures are the same as steps 6 and 7 in section 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Fil
123. the OR or Pulse Width trigger IN OUT Trigger is activated I i Center Center Trigger is activated ale Trigger is activated TV Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 14 The TV trigger is used when you are observing a video signal and is compatible with broadcasting systems such as NTSC PAL etc IM 701610 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Mode lt Section 6 1 gt Conditions for updating displayed waveforms are set The following five types of trigger mode are available Auto Mode Displayed waveforms are updated each time a trigger is activated within a specified time Tl O O approximately 100 ms referred to as the time out period and are updated automatically after each time out period Auto Level Mode Waveforms are displayed in the same way as in Auto mode if a trigger is activated within the time out period If no trigger is activated the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source section 1 3 is detected and the trigger level is changed automatically to this center value then a edge trigger is activated to update the displayed waveforms Half the Amplitude lt Trigger Level Amplitude Half the Amplitude Normal Mode Displayed waveforms are updated only when a trigger is activated Displayed waveforms will not be updated if no trigger is activated Single Mode When a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once then acquisi
124. the Start Rec and the End Rec Search Order The search is carried out from the newest waveform to the oldest waveform Show Map A List of Time Stamps Only the waveforms that are found are displayed in Show Map If the Search Mode is turned OFF all waveforms are displayed 7 14 IM 701610 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 26 gt Relevant Keys Z D zoo Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E Select the Search Mode 1 Press HISTORY 2 Press the Search Mode soft key to display the search mode selection menu HISTORY e select Display f Start Rega earch Mod Record o Show Map o All End Rec OFF 94 3 Press the Parameter soft key 6 Select Display f Start Rega OFF zone Parameter Record o Shou Map o All End Rec 94 Select the Search Criteria Select Param 4 Press the Search Setup soft key to display the Search Criteria Setting menu HISTORY fe select Display fStart Rega earch Modga Record 0 Show Map Search Search 0 All 6 End Rec Parameter Setup Exec 94 5 Press the Select Param soft key to display the search criteria selection menu Select Condition fa Item Param Parami FF IN OUT Setting the Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key to select OFF IN or OUT Select Condition Ja Item Paran Parami D
125. the Target Waveform See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical History IM 701610 01E CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu CURSOR Type Trace ff Cursori ja ursor Jun 4 0006di Show Cursor ump Exec Vertical CH1 f Cursor Result Exec C1 to Z1 History 4 000Adi Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 A11 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 4 000di 2 00 d i Moving the Cursor 6 7 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor 1 2000 16 31 11 16 12 Be Normal 8 T Stopped 10 500kS s ZMs iv CH1 16 1 1 00 V div pe Full Edge CH1 F I I CURSOR Type Trace i Cursori fa ursor Jump 4 0000diy Shou Cursor ump Exec Vertical CH1 fe Cursor2 Result Exec C1 to 21 Histor 4 000Adi Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved Performing Statistical Computations Between Cursors 9 Press the Cursor Exec soft key to perform statistical computations between cursors The results are displayed at the top of the screen Displaying the Cursor Position Measurement Values 10 Press the Show Result soft key to display the historical data for cursor position measurement values in a list
126. the same file format as the file being saved Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Unload If the loaded waveform is being displayed newly acquired waveform is not displayed even if the data acquisition is started In order to display the newly acquired waveforms loaded data must be unloaded from the appropriate channels Note If a key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file A maximum of 43 characters can be displayed in Path If the character string exceeds 43 characters is appended at the end File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 The waveform data loaded from a file overwrites the data in the acquisition memory Once the memory is overwritten the old data cannot be recovered It is recommended that the current waveform data be saved before loading data from a file Loaded waveforms are cleared only if Unload Initialize or Auto Setup is executed or the data acquisi
127. the user account used to access the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L from the computer For the procedure see section 13 8 Time difference from the Greenwich Mean Time When using the Web server function set the time difference from the GMT Normally the time difference is also set on the computer Setting the time difference correctly allows the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the computer to detect the local time correctly Consequently the computer is able to detect whether a file is new when transferring or saving the file For the procedure see section 13 11 Note e Use Internet Explorer version 5 0 or later as the Web browser The Web server function contains software programs that have not been authenticated Therefore the following dialog box may appear In such case click Yes and install the software Security Warning a x Warning The authenticity of this content cannot be verified therefore it cannot be trusted Problem listed below The test root has not been enabled as a trusted root Do you want to install and run Yokogawa TM Web Soft signed on an unknown date time and distributed by YOKOGAWA Corporation Yes More Info e You cannot open multiple Internet Explorer windows on the same computer and use the same function of the Web server function simultaneously When using the storage function of the FTP server function on the Web browser data capture function or the log display on the same computer ot
128. ursor Jum 4 600di k Vertical CH1 6 Cursorz Ci to Z1 4 000di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform to select it CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 4 960d i Moving the Cursor 6 7 8 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 Move Cursor1 using the jog shuttle 2000 10 31 16 16 16 Jo Normal Stopped 265 7 506kS S 2Zms div CH1 10 1 0 500 Udi DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 7 a d s x1 6 000ms Y1 gt 425 000m ee ee ee ee a ee ee ee ae ee ee 0 010 U EEEE AE Begone i A B0 OOO Eo 875 000mV f Cursori 3 600di 6 Cursorz 4 000di In the same manner move Cursor2 If you highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move them at the same time IM 701610 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For Marker Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Marker See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker 4 CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Vertical History Press the Select soft key to select a marker from M1 to M4 CURSOR Type Select Trace i Pos x ursor Jum ump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 Selecting the Waveform to be Measured 5 6 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2
129. which the ENHANCED status is to be set Press SELECT to select H L X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit Go to step 14 When Activating the Trigger in Sync with the Clock Channel a pe pN 9 10 11 12 13 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Pressing SELECT displays the clock channel setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the clock channel Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel that was set as the clock channel Press SELECT to select f or 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status to be set Press SELECT to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select True or False Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection of the Clock CH 14 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed The setting also applies to the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Level Coup ing Level CH1 0 0 vI He I DC I OFF CH2 0 0 vI r I DC I OFF CH3 Hys Coupling HF Rej The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Type Pattern Coupling Setting the Hold Off 15 Set th
130. window trigger for the CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 input signal Trigger Condition e Width trigger IN The time during the trigger source enters the window is trigger duration OUT The time during the trigger source exits the window is trigger duration e OR trigger IN Trigger is activated when the trigger source enters the window the area between two preset levels OUT Trigger is activated when the trigger source exits the window IN Trigger is Activated OR Trigger OUT Trigger is Activated OR Trigger Width Window Width Window Center Center Trigger is Activated alL OR Trigger 7 Trigger Duration Width Trigger Trigger Duration Width Trigger IM 701610 01E 6 33 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED 6 34 Window Setting You define the window by its center level and width Center Setting Range Anywhere within the 8 screen divisions in resolution of 0 01 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 01 V Width Setting Range Up to 4 div from center in resolution of 0 02 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 02 V Note If you set the window so that the top or bottom is off the screen the trigger will occur at the level for the corresponding screen edge the level at 4 divisions from screen center rather than at the missing top or bottom Therefore it is recommended not to exceed 4 div when setting the window Setting the Trigger C
131. 0 13 1 16 9 Expanded Waveform cccccssssssecceseseeeeeeesensseeeeeeesseneeees 1 19 External Clock Input csseceeeeeesseseeeeeeseeeeeeess 12 1 12 2 External DIMENSIONS ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeees 16 12 External THQ GG nerra nionean AAE 6 11 External Trigger Input eeeeeeeeeeees 12 1 12 2 16 8 F FET PODC reaa E E A IV FFT Fast Fourier Transform Computation 0 006 1 25 FP TE FUNCION onrar a EE 1 25 RIIA N Ocras a O 6 36 FILE KEV reeni career ticidenaad ens ea tude datserats 2 4 Fixed ITCRA aO 13 16 IQA eE E E A aes 11 13 Floating FoM FOrMalss csicicee vesecedceteseeeectelenencined 11 13 Floppy DISK Drive nein t needa 1 34 16 7 Floppy Disk Drive Test 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 10 PIOD DY DISKS irae Ta EO ENSA 11 1 Formatting a Floppy Disk ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 11 7 Fornmatting a Zip DISK n cenlsier censure ee a 11 8 Formatting the Storage Medium cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 5 Frame SKD soroen sata E A E E ialubs 6 38 Frequency Characteristic cccccceececeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 Index 2 FRO ONC aoa e E E arestanteidatae 2 1 FTP Client Function 1 30 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 FTP Passive MOde ionerne 13 25 FIP SeNet a a 13 10 13 13 FTP Server Function cc cccccccccecceseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaues 1 30 13 21 G Generating Triggers on the P
132. 0 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1i lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED sasien a ted elt ene ae clench Meena tie E 6 24 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED sivssscteseovesatiioiiveie Cece aan 6 29 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeees 6 32 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED ee eeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeessssaaaeeeeeseaaaaeeees 6 35 6 15 Seting the ACHON ON NGOS eese a e were adawte a ieiet oan neem aaiae 6 39 Chapter 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 9 7 6 1 1 7 8 Setting the Record Length asa cid nsaar daecercit vnsaicnainn saat anned ance laniontecnmuen eatnaealebnudoncbuasderaedeusniot 7 1 Acq isiton Mode ch Ste tcc ahr a a ee aerate apc alice a a 7 2 Using the Sequential Store FUNCTION ie eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaneseeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeeeaaaaeees 7 5 Using the High resolution Mode sicrie a a 7 6 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF cccsseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaseeeeees 7 7 SING tme Miton Memo atessar RA 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function cccsseeeee 7 11 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function 7 15 Chapter 8 Display 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 Changing the Display Format ores acti peadice A I 8 1 Setting the Interpolation
133. 0 kHz 80 kHz 160 kHz 320 kHz 640 kHz 1 28 MHz 20 MHZ The following figure shows how the bandwidth affects the frequency characteristics When Full is selected the bandwidth is max 200 MHZ 20kHz 40kHz 80kHz 160kHz 320kHz 640kHz 1 28 MHz 20MHz FULL IM 701610 01E 5 8 Setting V div Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 5 gt SNAP HELP MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC exis nan MENU MENU aca stanrisroP ase a orr mace Sa 0 HFT HORIZONTAL fv Ay eke SEARCH O TRIG D m m SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME sDIV The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E Setting the V div Using the V div Knob 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Turn the V DIV knob to set the V div value Note SE e Changing the V DIV setting while the waveform acquisition is stopped will not change the displayed waveform The new V div value takes effect the next time waveform acquisition is started e When the waveform acquisition is stopped the cursor measurement value and automated measurement of waveform parameters will show values using the old V div setting even if the V DIV knob is turned Setting the V div Using the Variable Parameter 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft
134. 0 with the 1 V range selected 10V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 0 3 Vp p for the DL1640 DL1640L 0 1 Vp p for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 10 ns for both High and Low IM 701610 01E 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT AN CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal This may damage the instrument TRIG OUT Terminal TRIG OUT TTL LF This trigger outputs a TTL level signal when a trigger occurs The signal level is normally high but goes low when a trigger occurs Specifications Connector Type BNC Output Level TTL Output Logic LIi negative Output Delay Time 50 ns or less Output Hold Time 1 us min at low level 100 ns min at high level Output Circuit Diagram LS06 470 Q 47 Q Timing Chart Output Delay Time Trigger Point Trigger Signal R ns Max e a H Trigger ULPU IM 701610 01E 12 3 nd no euis oapiA gY Andino 136 Andy 4066111 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Low Level High Level Hold Time Trigger Occurrence Trigger Occurrence H Trigger Sput 2 p Post Trigger Time Internal Process Time Ems gt 4 billy al e Internal Process Tim Trigger Trigger Pre Trigger y Post Trigger Pre Trigger Post Trigger Acquisition 1 HIGH High Level Period Indicates the pre trigger and internal processing time 100 ns
135. 0000 2002 06 24 19 05 Function Delete If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message e The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle 6 Pressing the Attr soft key changes the attribution of the selected file Path PC_Card Space 5916528 byte File Name Size Date Attr a Flash_Men CPC_Card NetWork lt old 2002 66 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED 1999 16 63 10 21 CYCLE0004 2002 66 24 19 19 RW CYCLE6663 i 2002 66 24 19 16 R W CYCLEG662 P 2602 66 24 19 09 R W CYCLE0001 2602 06 24 19 07 R U CYCLE0000 i 2002 66 24 19 05 R U Function Delete Selecting the Files to be Deleted One at a Time 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 8 Pressing the Set Reset soft key places an asterisk to the left of the selected file The file will be deleted Pressing the Set Reset soft key again removes the asterisk to the left of the selected file The file will not be deleted Path PC_Card Space 5910528 byte File Name Flash_Men PC_Card NetWork lt old 2602 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED 1999 16 63 10 21 CYCLE0004 2002 06 24 19 19 R W CYCLE0003 R 2002706724 19 16 R W CYCLE0002 2002706724 19 69 R U CYCLE0001 2002 06 24 19 07 R U CYCLE9G00 2602 06 24 19 05 RU Function Delete Go to step 12 ma Explanation IM 70
136. 000d i Vertical CH1 6 Cursor2 4 000di Type Select Trace e Pos a to 22 Marker Mz M3 M CH1 3 100di Type Trace fq Cursori 1 to Z1 C1 to 22 C2 to Zi C2 to 22 4 660d i Degree CH1 E Cursor2 4 000di 2 606di Type Trace 6 Cursori 1 to 21 J Ci to 22 C2 to Z1 C2 to 22 4 00Adi Vertical CH1 6 Cursor2 History 4 000di 6 Pressing the Jump Exec soft key moves the cursor to the jump destination IM 701610 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For H Horizontal Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the waveform to be measured See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal IM 701610 01E CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Poff E _ Press the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform CURSOR Tupe Trace i Cursori 3 00div orizontal xY2 fs Cursor2 3 00div Moving the Cursor 9 6 7 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor 1 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion 2000 12 13 12 09 39 a Normal Stopped 45 7 1MS 5s_1ms div CH1 10 1 50 0 U diy DC Full Cursor1 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 0 Y 156 000V 2 150 000V AY 300 000V Type Trace i Cursori 3 00div orizontal xY2 B Cursor2 3 60di v Cursor2 If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved 9 7 SISAJEUY LUIOJOA
137. 00k k 0G 200ns 50G 400 50G 100k 100M 200 100ns 50G 200 50G 50k 100M 100 50G 50k 50ns 50G 100 50G 25k 50G 25k 50G 25k 50G 50G 50G 10k 50G 10k 50G 50G 50G 5k 50G 5k 50G 50G 50G 2 5k 50G 2 5k 50G 50G 50G 1k 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active IM 701610 01E App 11 gt x D D 5 2 x Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 32 Mwords When the high resolution mode is ON 16 Mword When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution 200k_ 16M 200k 16M Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words 2k 16M 2k 16M 5k 32M 5k 32M 5k 25M 5k 25M 2k 10M 2k 10M 10k 32M 10k 32M 5k 16M 5k 16M 10k 20M 10k 20M 5k 10M 5k 10M 20k 32M 20k 16M 10k 16M 20k 20M 20k 10M 10k 10M 16M 20k 16M 50k 32M 50k 50k 50
138. 01610 701620 700960 700937 701930 Influence in the immunity environment e Noise increase lt 80 mV when using 700960 lt 400 mA when using 700937 lt 4A when using 701930 e Test condition When using 700960 200 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL 20 mV div probe attenuation setting 10 1 terminate the probe at 50 MQ When using 700937 200 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL 0 1 A div probe setting 700937 Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to each end of the signal cable When using 701930 200 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL 1 A div probe setting 701930 Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to each end of the signal cable e Cable requirement Same requirement as above for emission 1 Overvoltage category Installation category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 The cable length is less than 3 m Applies to products manufactured after August 2002 having the CE Mark For all other products please contact your nearest YO
139. 038 17 11 33 20 00014 17 12 04 19 00039 17 11 30 52 H 00015 17 12 01 49 00040 17 11 29 48 00016 17 12 00 44 00041 17 11 28 43 00017 17 11 59 39 00042 17 11 27 38 00018 17 11 58 34 00043 17 11 26 33 00019 17 11 57 29 00044 17 11 25 28 H 00020 17 11 56 24 00045 17 11 24 24 H 00021 17 11 55 19 00046 17 11 23 19 H 00022 17 11 51 62 00047 17 11 21 44 00023 17 11 50 58 00048 17 11 20 39 00049 17 11 19 34 H1 10 1 1 00 Urdiv DC Full 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT The waveform of the selected number is displayed The acquisition memory retains waveform records generated by the most recent triggers If a trigger is activated beyond the number of triggers that can be held the oldest waveform data are cleared Once the history becomes full each new trigger causes loss of the oldest waveform record in the memory Selected Record Number You can display any waveform from the history by entering its record number The newest current waveform is Record 0 the immediately previous waveform is Record 1 and so on The range for Selected Record No is therefore 0 to retained waveforms 1 The number of retained waveforms triggers depends on the record length as follows Record Length DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 1 kword 1 to 4000 2000 1 to 16000 8000 10 kwords 1 to 500 250 1 to 2000 1000 100 kwords 1 to 50 25 1 to 200 100 1 Mword 1 to 4
140. 06WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V maximum rated current 7 A F VDE standard power cord A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10 A Q BS standard power cord A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10 A R AS standard power cord A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 240 V maximum rated current 10 A H GB standard power cord A1064WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10 A Y No power cord Built in Media Drive J1 Floppy disk drive J2 Zip disk drive J3 PC card interface Options B5 Built in printer C1 GP IB interface USB C10 Ethernet interface USB P2 Two power output connectors for the probes for 701605 P4 Four power output connectors for the probes for 701610 and 701620 F5 IC bus analyzer for 701610 and 701620 1 Select Y for the power Cord 2 You can select a floppy disk drive a Zip drive or PC card interface for the built in media drive 3 1 printer roll B9850NX included 4 It is possible to choose between a GP IB interface USB and an Ethernet interface USB 5 The IC bus analysis functions include the SPI analysis function Example UL CSA standard power cord floppy disk drive and full options gt 701610 D J1 B5 C1 P4 or 701610 D J1 B5 C10 P4 Checking the Contents of the Package NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased your instrument please quote the instrument number Standard Acc
141. 1 25 gt Relevant Keys CLEA NAP SNAP HELP o TTL N Crue msc conod DA AS ACQ START STOP MENU __MENU X Y setup pispLay Copy MAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV a v2 z 3 ACTION DELAY AR Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 M1 Displayani Setup M1 Label Math2 is not available on the DL1620 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation Mi Setup CHi CHZ Operation Scale Center Sensitivity Unit Smoothing DFF __ON__ jam E lag M1 Displaya Mi Setup M1 Label Z Display a MZ Setup J M2 Label Saal eee 5 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select PS and press SELECT Mi Setup Operation Select CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 Scale CH1 CH2 Pass Thru Center Sensitivity Unit Smoothing Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup MZ Label ON C1 C2 Math1 ON C3 C4 Mathz 9 36 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 9 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum Selecting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 7 Turn the jog
142. 10 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path __ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Loading Operation 11 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 and 31 when saving files Unloading Waveforms 11 12 Selecting the File to be Unloaded 6 Continuing from step 5 in Saving the waveform data press the Unload soft key to display the Unload menu FILE File Item Data Type ry Pa Pq Save Load Unload Utility Waveform Binary 7 Pressing the Trace soft key displays a menu used to select the channels to be unloaded rie Trace nica tee Exe ee 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel If All is selected all channels are unloaded CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Unload All CH1 CH2Z CH3 CH4 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Unloading the File 9 Press the Unload Exec soft key Selecting the Data Type File Extension Binary The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in binary format The data that are saved can be loaded to display the waveform and compute numerical data A header file is automatically c
143. 11 18 Display the menu used to save load setup data according to steps 1 to 3 4 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Selecting the Source Medium Directory 5 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 on section 11 5 Selecting the File to be Loaded 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading the File 7 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Loading Operation 8 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 22 to 25 Setup Data that are Saved The setup data of each key existing at the time of the saving operation are saved However date and time and communication parameters are not saved Number of Bytes Necessary in Saving the Setup Data Approximately 28 Kbytes Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data Display Example of Storage Medium Flash_Mem Internal flash memory PC_Card PC card FD Floppy disk ZIP Zip disk NetWork
144. 1610 01E 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Setting the Storing Destination 9 Pressing the File List soft key displays the output destination setting menu 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination The floppy disk Zip disk or PC card inserted in the built in drive is displayed in brackets Directories are displayed in angle brackets lt gt Path PC_Card Space 6668288 byte File Name Flash_Men PC_Card NetWork lt old 2002 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED 1999 16 03 10 21 CYCLE6014 f 2002706724 17 28 CYCLE0013 2002 06 24 17 26 CYCLE0012 A 2002 06 24 17 26 CYCLE 611 F 2602 06 24 17 20 CYCLE0010 2002 06 24 17 18 CYCLE0009 2002 06 24 17 14 TU CH1 CYCLE0008 2002 66 24 16 17 Auto CYCLE0007 2002 66 24 15 55 Format Color a aFile Lis Comment om ee ean 11 Pressing SELECT displays the contents of the selected storage medium or the directory For details related to setting the storing destination see section 11 5 aFile Name Pn Thumbna i 1 CYCLE001 5 Display of Compressed Images 12 When Image is selected under File Item selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp ps png or jpg extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT causes the screen image file s compressed image to appear in the upper right portion of the file list 2002 06 24 17 42 07 lik Stopped 1 T
145. 1610 01E 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Selecting All Files to be Deleted 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium 10 Pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will be deleted The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset 11 Pressing the All Set soft key removes the asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will not be deleted The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set Deleting the Files 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with the asterisks are deleted Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set Property Delete Delete SET ka Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Medium Flash_Mem Internal flash memory PC_Card PC card FD Floppy disk ZIP Zip disk NetWork Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Selecting the File Attributes Excepting Net Drive Select the attributes for each file from the following choices R W Read an
146. 1620 DL1640 DL1640L Load Input Password Enter the password see page 13 31 that you used to log on to the Web server DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L If the user name of the user account is set to anonymous default setting the password is not required Setup Load Click Setup Load to display the Open dialog box Select the setup data file that you want to load and click OK to load the file dala Cantos Capture waveform Binary Abort Capture Exec Load Setup Load Input Password r Load You must enter a password to abort For details see Input Password in gt the next section Open Folge HEERE 13 38 IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Note e Depending on the operating condition of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L such as when measurements are in progress it may not be possible to save data or load setup data When data is being saved or the setup data is being loaded other Web server functions cannot be used When loading setup data or aborting a save operation a temporary file zzzftpzzztmpzzz bat is created in the Internet Explorer startup folder When the operation is complete the temporary file is deleted If you try to save data when there is no waveform data or waveform parameter an error appears on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L screen and a O byte file is saved Controlling the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Instrument Control You ca
147. 2 2 RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal Section 12 3 External Trigger Clock Mutual Input Terminal Sections 5 11 6 6 and 12 1 On the DL1 620 it is labeled as EXT and is located on the front panel Top View 2 2 Handle Use the handle to lift and carry the unit Built In Printer Option IM 701610 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs VERTICAL Group C vwa Y Freser reser van V CH1 to CH4 Keys Sections 5 1 to 5 5 5 7 to 5 10 On the DL1620 the CH3 and CH4 keys are disabled Displays a menu used to turn ON OFF the display on each channel set the vertical position coupling probe attenuation offset voltage bandwidth limit inversion expansion reduction of the vertical axis linear scaling and waveform labels In addition by pressing this key before operating the V DIV knob the channel that is to be controlled by the V DIV knob can be selected PRESET Key Section 5 6 Displays the preset menu that sets the V div input coupling probe attenuation and trigger level to the optimum 5 V CMOS 3 3 V CMOS or the current probe 700937 701930 or preset level automatically This preset menu allows you to set all channels or the selected channels at once V DIV Knob Section 5 8 Turning this knob during acquisition i e while the START indicator is lit sets the voltage axis sensitivity Bef
148. 3 and CH4 are not displayed CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Condition ENHANCED 5 Set condition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status of condition A will be set Press SELECT to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit In a similar fashion set condition B oO oY IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level 10 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection Level Coup ing Level Hys Coupling HF Rej chi 0 0 Ua _ corr CH2 0 0 vI t I DC I OFF CH3 0 0 vI p I DC I OFF Type a a Count ieh Set Pattern Levels A gt BCN Coupling 1 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the level is to be The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a set 12 Press SELECT to display the level setting menu 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the trigger level to O V Setting the Hysteresis 14 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which hysteresis is to be set 15 Press SELECT to select AF or 77 Setting the Trigger Coupling 16 Turn the jog s
149. 40L 1 kwords 50 ms div to 5 s div 10 kwords 50 ms div to 50 s div 100 kwords to 1 Mwords 50 ms div to 500 s div 4 Mwords 100 ms div to 800 s div 10 Mwords 500 ms div to 500 s div 32 Mwords 1 s div to 640 s div 500 ms div to 800 s div Ranges in parentheses take effect in high resolution mode Specifications Search for then expand and display a portion of the displayed waveform Choose from the following five search methods Edge Count the rising or falling edges and automatically search either edge Serial Pattern Automatically search a serial pattern up to 64 bits with a synchronized or unsynchronized clock Parallel Pattern Automatically search a parallel pattern from CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 CH1 CH2 Math1 for the DL1620 Pulse Width Automatically search for parts where a pulse width meets specified conditions Auto Scroll Automatically scroll the zoom position You can search for and display waveforms from the history memory that satisfy specified conditions Choose from the following two search methods Zone Set an area on the screen then extract and display only those waveforms that pass through the area Pass mode or do not pass through the area By Pass mode Parameter Extract and display only the automatic measurement results of the waveform parameters which meet the specified conditions Allows selection of cursor type from Marker Horiz Vertical H amp V Degree and Vertical History Capable o
150. 5 Press the Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF 2000 11 01 10 01 47 Eek Normal Stopped 5393 7 500kS S 2ZMS div i CH1 16 1 6 560 V diy DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V scale Trace Pccunulate Value Label ON ON OFF 2000 11 01 10 01 59 Ee ro Normal Stopped 5393 7 500kS S ZMs iv Label l CHI 10 1 0 500 Vdiy DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Single Sine ER ON forF pN OFF Label Display ON OFF Trace Label Use this parameter to select whether or not to include waveform labels channel identification labels on the display Entering Customized Labels You can use the Define Label feature to enter customized labels for each channel Each label is a character string of up to eight alphanumerics You can set the label display ON OFF using the Trace Label function the label appears in the scale value display and with measurement results IM 701610 01E 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display lt For a description of this function see page 1 16 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR TRACE SNAP HELP e Ct tL Aveo LJ MEASURE CURSOR FILE ISC LLA eama C z ae e C VEICA A SMe ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY move Posmon Operating Procedure Selecting Averaging Mode 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Accumulate soft key to display the accu
151. 50G 100k 100ns 200M 200 50G 50k 100M 100 50G 50k 50ns 200M 100 50G 25k 50G 25k 20ns 50G 10k 50G 10k 10ns 50G 5k 50G 5k 5ns 50G 2 5k 50G 2 5k 2ns 50G 1k 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active gt x D D 5 2 x IM 701610 01E App 9 Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 4 Mwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON 1 Sample i rate S s words oe words Rep OFF Standard resolution Rep ON Displayed Sample Displayed record length rate record length High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length S s words 4M 2 5M 4M 4M 100s 2M 80s 4M 50s 2 5M k M 10s 20k 20k 2M 20k 2M 8s 50k 50k 4M 50k 4M Ca 2M 200k 2M 200k A 500k 500ms 500k 25M 500k 2 5M 4M 500k 4M 500k 2 5M 4M 1M 4M 400ms 1M 200ms 80ms 5M 4M 50ms 2 5M 2 5M 40ms 10M 4M 20ms 4M 200M 100M 1M 100M 1M 100M 100M 500k 400k 200M 400k 100M 200k 50k 1 When the envelop
152. 640L closes the connection to the printer if there is no response from the printer for a certain period of time timeout time when it accesses the printer Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s Setting the SMTP Timeout Time When a mail server is accessed from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and connection cannot be established after a certain period of time timeout time the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L decides that theconnection to the mail server is not possible and closes the connection Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s 13 25 uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 11 Setting the Time Difference from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time Relevant Keys CLEAR SNAP HELP OCT IT I It Woo SS E measuRe CURSOR _FILE misc MATH weasure curson CELE msc Jponocd marn PHASE X Y MEN ENO setup pispLay Copy MAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o a o a Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu 3 Press the Others soft key to display the Others settings menu MISC ia al USB a sjes Next 1 2 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Time Hour for Time Difference From GMT 5 Press SELECT to display a dialog box where you can make time settings 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of hours in the range of 12 to 13 7 Likewise set th
153. 701610 01E 1 Make sure that main power switch and power switch are OFF 2 Plug the power cord into the power connector socket on the rear panel of the instrument 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet that meets the following conditions The AC outlet must be of 3 prong type with a protective grounding terminal Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when the built in printer is used 100 VA The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L can be used in 100 V and 200 V systems Before using the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L make sure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply and that it is below the rated voltage of the power cord see page ii Power Cord Supplied 3 5 s u w nse Huiyen a10jog e 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Connecting the Power Cord with the DC Power Model DC Suffix Code When using the Battery Box Model 701680 sold separately e To avoid electric shock ensure proper protective grounding of the DL1600 When using the Yokogawa Battery Box Model 701680 please refer to that instrument s user s manual When using a DC power supply other than the Battery Box Model 701680 e To avoid electric shock ensure proper protective grounding of the DL1600 e To av
154. 8 Entering Values and Character Strings cccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeasaaeeeees 4 1 Initializing 5S CUEING States castteies arch ecnstrteseutciaaeeincotaninattad saduumiten oaeetatacsdsieha nkneteasoadinsteateureeanseeae 4 11 SMOLIN AUO SOUP eaea 4 13 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeneneeeesess 4 15 Starting Stopping Waveform ACQUISITION ccccseeeecesseeeeeeaeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeeeesseeeesesseneeeens 4 17 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions ccccccccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeseenseesesaaes 4 18 Calibration asa A send te otaneadaanaaasenase detects anand adauandoasadeacncceden secs 4 19 using US Hep FUNCION cos ais ncion sai Secceuenep readad waais E E E 4 21 Chapter 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 Turning Chanhiels ONOFF aren en E AN eee 5 1 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform ssssessssseosrrrnrseesrrnrrresrrnrrrrernnnnreerenrnneenne 5 2 SEISCUAG MDOT COURIC sansi ea a a atin tui ayoramar bere tid tect 5 4 Selecting Froe ANNUAR issanivetrercte bend a awe dur tow taveea 5 6 Setting the Offset Voltage cccccssssesesceeceeeeeeeeeaeseeseeeeeeeseeeeseanseseeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaseeeeeeeeess 5 7 THe Prese FUNGUO esner aa a aa 5 8 Setting the Bandwidth seeds etree eat ceicatceteincma estat a a acheiatd arse seatsnalbd 5 10 RO EIN VON estes ed a
155. 8 T f oats CHILA Sorekae on E aut Uta E E O tetas tan vont ace te ye OO Ue Le DC Full DA 7 Moe hee rer Slee ll a agre TEON EER TE EEE eee ea acne te atak Gus 6 500 Urdiy e f a i 5 IC Full Edge CH1 F IM 701610 01E 4 2 Initializing Settings Relevant Keys Ga ke AAA A E lahat gh OO MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC GONNO GO MATH eee A rma A C HORIZONTAL fv m O TRIG D D o SmmPLe ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV m a ACTION DELAY l o a Operating Procedure Performing Initialization 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Initialize soft key to start initialization SETUP m Initialize Auto Store Undo Setup Recall Canceling Initialization 3 Press the Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings that were in effect before initialization Note The Undo operation remains available only while power stays on The setting parameters that existed immediately before initialization are cleared if you execute auto setup after initialization IM 701610 01E 4 11 suoieiadQ uowWwoy gt 4 2 Initializing Settings Explanation 4 12 The initialization function allows you to reset parameter values which have been set using panel keys to the default factory settings This is very convenient when you have to cancel the previous settings or when you have to restart measurement from the beginning In
156. B e PC Card Interface Item Specifications No of Slots 1 Compatible Cards Flash ATA card PC card TYPE II Internal Flash Memory Item Specifications No of Drives 1 Capacity 2 MB No of Rewrites Less than approximately 100000 16 8 Keyboard Printer and Mouse Interfaces Item Specification Connector Type Type A connector receptacle Electrical and Mechanical Conforms to USB Rev 1 0 Specifications Supported Keyboards 104 keyboard US and 109 keyboard Japanese that conform to USB HID Class Ver 1 1 Supported Printers ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 and BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35V native commands that support USB USB Printer Class Ver 1 0 Supported Mouses Mouse that conforms to USB HID Class Ver 1 1 Power Supply 5 V 100 mA per port Number of Ports 2 IM 701610 01E 16 7 a suoesyoadsS 16 9 Auxiliary Input Output Section External Trigger Input Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Input Bandwidth External Trigger Input DC to 100 MHz Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ 28 pF Maximum Input Voltage 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms 10 kHz or less Trigger Level 2 V 5 mV measurement resolution for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V 5 mV measurement resolution for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10 V 50 mV measurement resolution for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 1 The EXT TRIG IN terminal also operates as an EXT CLOCK IN terminal Specifications for external cloc
157. CYCLEG6600 UVF 229441 2662 07 01 14 49 R W CYCLE0GGO1 C3U 117 2062 06 24 22 30 R W FILE ave Exec Setup Filter SET feo Property 12 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 14 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 15 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 17 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 18 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in section 4 1 19 Press ESC to close the file name setting dialog box 11 17 WINIPs BHe10 S By Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data Saving the File 20 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Saving Operation 21 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties 22 In the File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select SET or 23 In the File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 24 Pressing the Property soft key displays information regarding the selected file 25 Pressing ESC closes the window displaying the information Loading the Setup Data Explanation
158. Compensating the Probe ssssssssesssnsrsrrrerenesrrrrrrrrrrrereeeen 3 12 Compressed Images ccccsseseeeeeeeees 11 34 11 38 11 42 Computer Interface ccccccccsesseeeeeceeessseeeeeeseenseeeeeeenes 16 9 CONMECTING SPIO ON dca cst arte ae a a eet ial nedaiexels 3 9 Contents of the Package ccccccecseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeees iii CONTMORSCHDU a seicehncustincnanlecceiausesossiseaiuenr o Ea 13 27 13 45 COR VRC y scenes eterna hte canada tute nee 2 4 Copying FES corse cca EE E ibe E 11 35 Coupling esaa EE 5 5 Creatingca DECIO siehacecestsvcwcchsdoveteneshseetead dereipeniesient 11 39 C rrent PROD sos 2 sta iaa a ead eaaa aii ai iv 3 10 5 9 Cursor 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 CUNSON Jump scree sae ve hae nema EE 9 6 CURSOR KEY iral A RE 2 4 Cursor Measurement ccccceececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaes 1 21 D Data cape sivas r a 13 27 13 36 Data CONTON easier a E a 13 38 Data oed Cia enoe a ET 1 26 Daleme eane e a a e a 3 14 3 15 Default Gateway erie a 13 5 Degree Cursor Measurement ccccccseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 21 Degree GursOh searre aa caskine sana amaneiueasenst 9 4 DEII danae a a A 9 13 9 17 Delay CIMIG OS sese e EREE locale 1 13 Delay TIME terestre Ees 1 13 6 19 Deleting FIGS csar ep EE 11 31 DESKOW ae a E E a Ea Eaa 4 20 DAOP ese a a O N tates 13 6 Index 1 _ Index Differential Probe wens eis ieainneae ek iv 3
159. DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Digital Oscilloscope USER S MANUAL YO MA Yokogawa Elec IM 701610 01E 4th Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our Web site http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Foreword Notes Trademarks 4th Edition August 2003 YK Thank you for purchasing the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Digital Oscilloscope This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use mainly DL1640 To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises Three manuals are provided with the instrument including this user s manual Manual Name Manual No Description DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L IM 701610 01E Describes all the functions except for the User s Manual communications function and their operation procedures for the instrument DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L IM 701610 17E Describes the communications functions of Communication Interface the GP IB RS 232 USB and network User s Manual CD interface DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L IM 701610 02E Explains basic operations only Operation Gui
160. DL1640L 5 mV for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 50 mV for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Setting the Trigger Slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising 4 Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling 4 Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the Probe Attenuation When applying a trigger input signal to the EXT TRIG IN terminal or EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1620 via a probe select an attenuation that matches the probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701610 01E 6 7 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP IO LLLLDIOW 60 caon CATAE Hime Geo pame ED Reser eect SETUP ror SPLA COPY MAGE Save me ae O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D et poms o D ame TIME DIV 4 a ACTION DELAY Q C Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Pressing the Source soft key displays the trigger source menu Bbunebbiyp 2 SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 000 VIF ft ac DFA on jy x 0 08 3 Press the Line soft key
161. Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Vertical History 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu CURSOR Trace ina OOd iy orizontal a ae 3 00di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Type CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 or izontal 3 00div_J o o o T oO IM 701610 01E 9 1 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors 9 2 Moving the Cursor 6 7 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor 1 2000 10 31 10 58 572 E 10k Normal 40 7 Stopped 5O6kS S 2ZMms div CH1 10 1 0 500 Vzdi DC Full Edge CH1 F nuto 2 25000U Type Trace f Cursori 1 56diy orizontal CH1 f6 Cursor2 3 06d iy Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved For V Vertical Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Vertical History Press the Trace soft key to display the waveform selection menu CURSOR Type Trace y Cursor1
162. Don t Care symbols H When the value is greater than the level L When the value is less than the level X Do not determine Level Set the levels to determine H and L Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div to 4 div IM 701610 01E 8 29 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When the Type is Pulse Width Type Select the relationship between the specified time and the measured waveform Pulse lt T Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is shorter than the specified time T Pulse gt T Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is longer than the specified time T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is within the specified times T1 to T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is outside the specified times T1 to T2 Timeout Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse exceeds the specified time T The displayed position in the zoom display differs from the Pulse gt T case Source Select the source channel for the search You can also select Math1 and Math2 or Math1 for the DL1620 Level Set the level for determining High and Low The setting range is an on screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Choose from the following High When the waveform is higher than the specified level Low When the waveform is l
163. E CURSOR FILE misc GONo GO MATH RESET e1ec MENU MENU PH nase Aca aca stanrisroP SETUP EN DIsPLAY COPY maGE SAVE O SHIFT SHIFT ma A SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY MODE TIME DIV The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E 1 Press one of CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Display soft key to select ON or OFF CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 can be pressed twice to turn the channels ON or OFF Stopped 674 560k5 S 2nsfliv CH1 10 1 5 00 U diyv DC Full Edge CH1 F Display iPosition Coupling Probe Je Offset o gt Banduidt OFF PN 0 00div DC 10 1 0 000 v Full The channels CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 can be displayed simultaneously When turned ON the indicators to the left of the channel keys light Note The screen can be split into 1 2 or 4 display areas or 1 to 2 display areas See section 8 1 A scaling value and waveform label name for each display area See sections 8 4 8 5 can also be displayed If a waveform or waveforms are loaded from history memory floppy disk Zip disk or PC card the input waveform cannot be displayed To compare waveforms use the snapshot function 5 1 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 2 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform Relevant Keys lt
164. ED ACTION DELAY E Ce TIME DIV X The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key Display Position Coupling Probe 6 Offset J Banduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 172 3 Press the Invert soft key to select ON or OFF CH1 Invert Variable Linear Sci Label Next ON 0 100 v ON CH1 272 Note Z The inverted waveform display must be set for each channel Make appropriate settings for all the necessary channels The waveform is inverted vertically across the center This setting is made for each channel Trigger Even when the waveform is inverted the trigger is activated by the non inverted waveform Cursor Measurement Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters and Computations Cursor measurements automated measurements of waveform parameters and computations are performed for the non inverted waveform 5 13 S XY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 5 10 Using the Linear Scaling Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure 5 14 lt For a description of this function see page 1 21 gt CLEAR NAP TRACE Shar HELP MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC Eze CZ MENU MENU aca stant sror M SETUP a a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT VERTICAL HORIZONTAL SEARCH O TRIG D smPue ENHA
165. Example Flash_Mem Internal flash memory PC_Card PCcard FD Floppy disk ZIP Zip disk NetWork Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Floppy Disk Zip Disk and PC Card The floppy disk Zip disk and PC card are described in chapter 11 For the procedures related to formatting see chapter 11 Auto Naming Function If you use Auto Naming files are automatically created with four digit numbers from 0000 to 2399 in their file name You can place a common name in front of the numbers up to 12 characters specified in File Name Note You can enter up to sixteen characters for the common name but the last four characters are discarded 10 13 e eqd UB919S JO nd no 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Notes when Saving the File The maximum number of files that can be saved using the auto naming function is 2400 The maximum number of files and directories that can be displayed in the File List is 2400 Also a thumbnail window for screen image data can be displayed Thumbnail Thumbnail Window The instrument can display a thumbnail window containing screen image files with the tif bmp ps png and jpg extensions located in the directory selected from the File List under the IMAGE SAVE menu The data used to generate the thumbnail is separate from the screen image data itself but they are created at the same time The extension of the thumbnail data depends on the exte
166. FF IN OUT 7 15 Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Setting the Parameter Item Setup 8 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the parameter selection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel that you wish to set as the source channel for the parameter search CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 ie P P 0 Freq 0 Max Period Min Rise 9 Avg Fall Rms Width o IntiTY AvgFreg AvgPer iod Int2TY Intixy Sdey Width Int2xY 0 High Duty Low Burst1i 0Shot Burst2 co 0Shot 0 Pulse Delay source 10 Use the jog shuttle to highlight the parameter to be used in the search then press SELECT to assign the parameter to the channel Set the Condition Range 11 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Upper jog shuttle icon Select Condition Ja Item Logic feT Rangei Paran 5 000di Search Parami DFF IN DUT OR 6T Rangez Exec 5 600di 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX 13 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Lower jog shuttle icon 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the lower edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to
167. FF IN or OUT Selecting IN or OUT displays a search window in the area displaying the Source channel Select Zong Condition Source Zonei OFF IN DUT CH1 Search Upper 0 50div f Lower 0 50div E IM 701610 01E 7 11 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 7 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function 7 12 Setting the Source Channel Source 8 Pressing the Source soft key displays the source channel selection menu CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the source channel search HISTORY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 Search Exec 0 50d iY 2 500d Setting the Search Window 10 Press the Upper Lower soft key Select Zong Condition Source 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the top of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the default value 12 Press the Upper Lower soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the default value 14 By controlling both Upper and Lower using the jog shuttle you can move the search window up and down without changing the vertical width Select Zone Condition Source 15 In a similar fashion set the horizontal range of the search window 16 Repeat steps 6 to 15 to set Zone to Zone4 se
168. H L H L B 1 B 2 B 3 Pattern A is True When pattern A CH1 L CH2 L Enter When patternB CH1 H CH2 H Enter N 3 L Low level H High level IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger A Delay B Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 9 This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses CH1 4 T CH2 Trigger CH1 HI L H L H Pattern A is True Pattern B is True When pattern A CH1 L CH2 L Enter When pattern B CH1 H CH2 H Enter Delay 1 us Pattern Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 10 Multiple trigger sources are selected and a trigger is activated when all of the trigger conditions set for each trigger source become true or false Trigger conditions are established by setting combinations of the state High or Low of each trigger source Furthermore one of the trigger sources can be used as the clock signal and triggering is synchronized with this clock signal Example a trigger is activated when CH1 L CH2 L CH3 H and CH4 L The DL1620 is not equipped i with channels 3 and 4 CH1 j j j l Trigger is activated Pulse Width Trigger Section 6 11 The time period during which the specified condition is met or not met is compared with the specified time period The trigger condition is set with the AND of the signal state of each chan
169. ISC to display the MISC menu 2 Press the Remote Cntl soft key to display the Remote Cnt menu a alibrationRemote Cntl Network Bystem Cnfg a 3 Press the Device soft key to display the Device menu Device Baud Rate Format Rx TX erminator RS232 38400 8 NO 1 NO NO CR LF 4 _ Press the Network soft key The Ethernet interface is selected as the communication interface Remote Cntl MISC C eE TTT T Setting up the TCP IP 5 Set the TCP IP on the computer and the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L For the procedure on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L see section 13 2 Setting the User Account Used to Access the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 6 Set the user account used to access the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L from the computer For the procedure see section 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time re Set the time difference between the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L location and the GMT For the procedure see section 13 11 Rebooting 8 To activate the TCP IP user account and time difference settings turn OFF the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L After a few seconds turn ON the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L again 13 30 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Preparations on the Computer 1 Start your computer and log on to the system If the computer is running Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP log on as an administrator If you do not log on as an administrator you may not be able to install
170. KOGAWA representative IM 701610 01E 16 11 a suoesoadsS l 16 12 External Dimensions Dimensions mm 220 Edo Unless othewise spceified tolerance is 3 Tolerance is always 0 3 mm when the dimension is under 10 mm e o Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length DL1620 DL1640 Record length 1 kword When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s words S s words S s words S s words 500s 200s 100s 50 s C s k k E EFt FEE ws E k E E FE FEE 2s 50 1k 1k 50 1 k 1s 100 1k 1k 100 Jik 500ms 200 1k 1k 200 lik 200 ms 500 1k 500 1k 500 1k 500 1k 100 ms 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 50 ms 2k 1k 2k 1k 2k 1
171. M 1M 10M 1M 20M 1M 50M 1M 100M 1M 100M 500k 100M 200k 100M 100k 20G 100k 50G 100k 50G 50k 50G 25k 50G 10k 50G 2 5k 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active App 4 IM 701610 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 8 Mwords When the high resolution mode is ON 4 Mwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Displayed Displayed rate record length record length record length rate T div S s words words words S s Displayed record length words 800 s 1k 8M 4M 500s 1k 5M 400 s 2k 8M 200s 4M 160 s 8M 100s 5M 80 s 10k 8M 50s 10k 20k 20k 50k 1s 500k 5M 800 ms 1M 8M moms 2M lem m fem m m m 200 ms 160 ms 100 ms 50G 100 ns 200M 50G 50k 100M__ 100 50G 50 ns 200M 50G 25k 50G 25k 50G 20 ns 50G 10k 50G 10k 50G 10ns soe sk fsoa fsk _ _ fsoa sk _ fsoa _5ns 5 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pai
172. MS DOS format on a PC can also be used This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server FTP client LPR client or Web server functions IM 701610 01E 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D o 12 SIMPLE ENHANCED a cs V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY OILO JCD Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file time setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Waveform FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Cursor Image Utility Saving the Waveform Data Selecting the Data Type 4 Pressing the Data Type soft key displays the data type menu FILE File Item Data Type x z a 2 Save Load Unload Utility Waveforn Binary 5 Press the one of the soft keys corresponding to Binary ASCII or Float to select the data type FILE File Item Binary ASCII Float a a Load Unload Utility Waveform Data saved in Binary are only the data that can be loaded as described later in this chapter IM 701610 01E 11 9 wnip HLe1o0 S 34 Wo pue o e eq Buipeo7 pue Buines Ey 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Waveform to be Saved 6 Pressing the Save soft key di
173. Method ccnn adil ool 8 3 Changing TS etl OU ccd cir he ten en ucts cata E als Suaveualueteveet 8 5 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeas 8 6 Setting the Waveform Labels cc ceecccccceesseeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeesasaaaeeeeesaaaaaeeees 8 7 Accumulated Waveform Display cccccseescccceseeeeenneeeeceaeueeceseeeeeesaaueeeessaseeeeaaneeessaaaaees 8 9 Turning the Translucent Mode ON OFF ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeas 8 11 X Y Waveform DiS pla Y asmia a a deta 8 12 ZOOMING the WAV CLOMID e aeennes saat aad oes 8 14 Search Data Using Search and ZOOM Function cccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeees 8 17 Chapter 9 Waveform Analysis IM 701610 01E 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 Measuring Waveforms USING Cursors ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeasaaeeeeees 9 1 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 9 12 Statistical Processing nasrais rana E EEEE 9 19 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 9 26 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms 0cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeneeeeeeas 9 33 Displaying the Power Spectrum wisnesesteewlonicsdmalidavioiiisiotw ene wi 9 36 xi Contents 97 SIMOOUAING an hist ees ae ee cea eich a ee a eae die et 9 40
174. N set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode Setting 500 us 200 us 100 us 50 us 20 us 10 us Ol T J 2 us 1 When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Standard resolution Rep OFF Sample Displayed rate record length S s words 200 1M 500 1M 1M 10k 1M O PO O O N x OI IN aA X X 100k 200k 500k 1 1 M M M 1 1M lt a 10M 1M O PO O JO SALIE z g z zjz z z 100M 200M 200M 400k 200M 200k 200M 100k 200M 40 0 0 1M 1M k k 200M 2 200M 10k 2 200M 4 200M 200M 200M 4 200M 20 200M 100 10k 5k 2 5k k k N 0 0 oOo A O O Ql Q oO G AN High resolution Rep ON rate record length rate S s words S s wo jm fji m m m _ eM m _ m 5M 1M SM tom m tom 100M 1 1 2 5 10M 2 5 00 00 k k k Ok Ok M M M OM OM G G G G G G G G G G G 206 50G 100k __ 100m _ 50G 20 50 50 50k 100M 5k 5 k C 50G 50G 50G 50G 50G Rep OFF Displayed D O oO a D 5 co words 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 500k 200k 100k 50k 20k 10k 5k 2k 1k 500 200 100 20k 5k 2 5k Po O N Rep ON Sample Displayed rate record length S s words 200 1M 500 1M 1k 1M 2k 1M 5k 1M 10k 1M 20k 1M 50k 1M 100k 1M 200k 1M 500k 1M 1M 1M 2M 1M 5
175. NCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key CH1 Display Position J Coupling Probe fs Offset Je Banduidt OFF DN O OGdiv DC 16 1 0 000 V Full ji T 3 Press the Linear Scl AX B soft key to select ON CH1 Invert f Variable Linear Sc1 Label X B Next ON 0 100 V ON CH1 2 2 4 Press the A B soft key CH1 Invert fevariable Linear Scl p gt A Unit Label ON 0 100 E PN o CH1 ae O 0000E 0 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the value of A You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits 6 In a similar fashion set the value B 7 f necessary press the Unit soft key to display the keyboard and enter the unit Note Linear scaling is not available for the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms except for newest waveform You can set linear scaling separately for each channel The A and B values remain in memory after you switch the linear scaling function OFF and are restored if you switch the function back on Mathematical computations operate with respect to the scaling results IM 701610 01E Explanation 5 10 Using the Linear Scaling Function This function lets you apply linear scaling to the measurement values If you set this feature ON the screen displays the scaled results rather than the original measurements The scaling relationship is Y AX B where X is the measur
176. NIC for connecting your PC and the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are explained If the IP address and other parameters are to be obtained dynamically using the DHCP server the following settings are not necessary In this case select Obtain an IP address automatically under the IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties dialog box For example if you are connecting a PC and the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to an independent Ethernet network you can specify parameters as indicated in the next table For details on the parameters consult your system or network administrator IM 701610 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Parameter Value Note IP Address Example 192 168 21 128 IP address for the PC Subnet Mask Example 255 255 255 0 Set the same value as the subnet mask that was specified for the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Gateway None DNS Disable WINS Disable The following procedure describes the steps for Windows 95 98 Me If you are using Windows NT 2000 Professional XP carry out equivalent steps according to your operating system 1 Select Settings gt Control Panel from the Start menu to open the Control Panel folder 2 Double click the Network icon to display the following Network dialog box 3 Click the Configuration to select the TCP IP connection corresponding to the Ethernet NIC that is connected to the PC and click Properties to display the TCP IP properties dialog box Network 2x Configuration Identification Ac
177. O sabras a iaasagienenaaovenenienaaie 2 3 Variable Parameter ccccccssccccessseeeeesseeeeseeseeeseseeeenees 5 12 Venica roia a 1 3 Vertical Cursor Measurement ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 1 21 Vertical C FSOT se ccsosaicsiacststeienioteuiiielantiieaianenonaiies 9 2 9 8 vVernical FAISTOIY aoro N O NENON 1 21 Vertical Position s6i224 adcseecdctecthi ts adeeateatass eaneriewtetacss 1 5 5 2 Vertical Sensitivity cccccccccssssseeeecceeesseeeeeeseesseeeeesenanaaes 1 5 Vdor gN Aerien 1 10 6 36 IM 701610 01E Index W Waveform Acquisition ccccseeeeeeeeecseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseesaees 4 17 Waveform Label cactcccetecbitcnsc cdsrccntestaicdseicomedntetsocees 1 18 8 8 Waveform Math ixcncissscicscsaustacans ur nvatenawted sitadietaeen tens 1 24 Web Server Function cccccesececeseeeceeeesesseeceseeeeeseeseees 1 31 Web server function lt a saicoiis acca iecd Seictisieacdoadenes eecdaaddebeneas 13 27 Width ING GCM scziccctsnous tecdrcedcatescentes a 6 24 WHIAGOW THO Cl ennir N 1 10 6 32 X X Y Waveform cccccccccc cece ecceeseeeseeeeueseeeseeeeaeseeeeeaeeas 1 19 8 12 Z ZA DISKS sa a Ea 11 2 ZIO DIVO ests Sev E yh woth me those 1 34 16 7 ZIO DIVE WES larassa a stegadare saaiterenteetiy 15 10 ZOOM a e a O R 1 19 DONO ande S ooeanen 2 3 Zooming the Waveform ccccessseeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeseeeeees 8 14 Index 5 _
178. OPY Copy to Format informationja Comment Built in Normal Lone ON COPY uilt in USB Net Print Comment For the remaining procedures please see 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to a USB Printer However when NetPrint is selected PS is added to the Format item COPY Copy to Format Color a Comment Net Print ESC P ON Note Copy to PS LIPS3 PCLS ESC P ESC P2 BJ Net Print Before using this function see section 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings You can output to any TCP IP compatible printer This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server or Web server functions or the File operation You can send screen images simultaneously to a network printer via Ethernet and the built in printer optional Entering Settings for a Network Printer LPR Server Specify the IP address of the network printer server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Printer Name LPR Name Specify the name of the printer to which screen images will be output Printer Format The following six printer formats are supported ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 e PCL5 gt BJ e PS PostScript 13 15 uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 31 gt Crne msc Jfonocd mart FA
179. OTME nenea em ermite eenetee roman ee ete tence mere ete 6 6 Horizontal Cursor Measurement c cssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 21 Horizontal Gursol oe e ai 9 1 9 7 HonzomMmal Axo Sonin O 1 3 HORIZONTAL Group crte E 2 3 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform 006 App 13 Hysteresis ccccccceeeeeeeees 6 10 6 16 6 19 6 22 6 28 6 31 image COMMON regissearre E aa 13 37 Image Save Action cccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 40 9 46 9 51 IMAGE SAVE KY caicaccscact cnacicusnaladconcaiaaitibeiatid sdenadeouasen ibe 2 4 Information sedis sas screc cs scceassactenetanosenicceatpctactecaeteee 13 27 13 49 ITI ANZ ALON ss coseriutaceccictescc ets a Se detaleacaasasaes adobe lads 1 32 MNAZO aen a tents atred etcetera E ty 4 11 IM 701610 01E IDE GOU DIAG soiorns e A 1 6 5 4 INDUS ECHON omiaa a 16 1 IID UE Tenia ei tutra ia shadane eee icaieaieadeeiincaumuennuaiiense 3 9 Installation Conditions ccccccceeeececeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeees 3 3 Installation Position diccanadeicds ones cena oad 3 4 Instrument Control exse c22ccc sctecsseicts detsesbooteesnesmeidmemanntenes 13 39 Instrument Number ccccceeeecceeeeceeeeeceeeecseseeceeeesseeeessaes iv internal flash memory ccccccsesseeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 1 34 Mepla E e cate dhand ciate adiiceaare teas 8 3 Interpolation Method ccccccssseceecseseeesseseeeesseseeeeseseeeens 8 3 Menaka E tous ane mec oadatmeneaek
180. Off us 0 08 Setting the Trigger Level 4 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key SIMPLE SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Probe feHold Off kg 0 000 UIF ft EI 10 1 On the DL1620 the Range soft key is displayed in this box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the trigger level to O V Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Slope soft key to select f or ft Setting the probe attenuation 7 Press the Probe soft key to select 1 1 or 10 1 Setting the Range DL1620 only 8 Press the Range soft key to select the range 1 V or 10 V when Probe is set to 1 1 or 10 V or 100 V when Probe is set to 10 1 6 11 Bbunebbiy 2 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Explanation Setting the Hold Off 9 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time The external signal that is input through the EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel of this instrument can be used to generate triggers Note For details related to the specifications of the EXT TRIG IN terminal see section 12 1 Selecting the Trigger Source Select Ext Setting the Trigger Level Range 2 V for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10 V for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Resolution 5 mV for the DL1640
181. PR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission DHCP DNS RJ 45 connector 16 9 a suoesoadsS 16 11 General Item Specifications Standard Operating Conditions Ambient Temperature 23 5 C Ambient Humidity 55 10 RH Power Voltage and Frequency Less than 1 of the rated voltage frequency fluctuation Warm up Time 30 min or more Storage Conditions Temperature 20 to 60 C 20 to 50 C J2 built in Zip drive model Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation allowed Operating Conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH without a printer 35 to 80 RH with a printer Storage Altitude 3000 m or below Operating Altitude 2000 m or below Rated Supply Voltage AC model 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC DC model 12 VDC Permissible Supply Voltage AC model 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Range DC model 10 to 18 VDC Rated Supply Voltage 50Hz 60 Hz Frequency Permissible Supply Voltage 48 to 63 Hz Frequency Fuse Internal Replacement not possible Maximum Power Consumption AC model 100 VA when the built in printer is used DC model 60 VA when the built in printer is used Withstand Voltage 1 5 KVAC for 1 minute between power supply and case Insulation Resistance 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC between power supply and case External Dimensions 220 W x 266 H x 224 D mm details on page 16 11 with printer cover closed projections exclu
182. Pa 66d iv Store Quit amp Whole Part ff Lower ff Right zone Exec TopNenu 6 60di 6 60di Editing a Partial Zone 14 Press the Edit soft key to select Part GO NO GO Edit Upper i as div Ea Ea amp hole Part Part Lower prne zone1 ES Exec Ea 15 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to select the right or left cursor 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the right and left edges of the partial zone 17 Press the Upper Lower soft key to select the direction for setting the zone then use the jog shuttle to create the zone 18 Repeat steps 15 17 to edit the zone 19 Press the Store as soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 20 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location Zone Zone6 or Zone Zone3 for the DL1620 to select it O NO GO zone1 zonez zone3 zone4 ZoneS zone6 Quit amp TopMenu 5 66di 21 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone Edit Upper le Rangel 5 00div hole Partjj Lower 6 T Rangez 5 00div Quit Zone Editing 22 Press the Quit amp TopMenu soft key to return to the menu in step 3 If you press the Quit amp TopMenu soft key before pressing the Store Exec soft key the settings made up to that point will be inactive and you will return to the menu in step 3 Edit wz Upper feT Rangei 5 00div hole Part Parti Lover f6T Range2 5 60div IM 701610 01E 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Editing Existing Zones E
183. Path PC Card Space 978944 byte File Nane Flash Men CPC_Card NetWork lt Restore lt old lt RECYCLED 6666 g602 6601 6608 6001 6662 2002 07 02 10 19 2002 06 24 11 29 1999 16 03 10 21 2602707715 20 44 2002707715 20 44 2002 07 15 20 44 2002 07 15 20 44 26002707715 20 44 2002707715 20 44 File Hang ra Filter Property 5151515 E SET Pea T Press SELECT to confirm the selection e ead el el el rrj rrj rrj FILE ave Exec Setup File Lis PC_Card Selecting the Destination Directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed in angle brackets lt gt 9 Press SELECT to confirm the selection The Path ____ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting lt gt moves to a higher level directory Setting the File Name Comment 10 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu File Name a Filter Property ave Exec 0000 SET fad Setup 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming Save File List Path PC_Card RECYCLED Space 970944 byte File Name amp Comment File Name Flash Nem Auto Naming PC_ Card J NetWork File Name Kinje 9600 Comment 6061 6601 pz 6666 6602 TIF 38574 0 2002707715 20 36 RA CYCLEGG60 HDR 1189 26002707761 14 493 Re
184. RM e 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For V Vertical Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical Ea nee 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform CURSOR Type Trace f Cursor1 ursor Jump 3 06di Vertical CH1 B Cursor2 Ci to Z1 3 60d iv Moving the Cursor 5 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor 1 7 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion 2000 12 13 18 05 08 a Normal Stopped 30422 7 1IMS s 1ms iv i CH1 10 1 50 0 U diy DC Full Cursor1 Cursor2 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 0 U 150 000V x2 150 000V Ax 300 000V Type Trace i Cursori 3 00di Vertical xY2 fe Cursor2 3 00div If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved 9 8 IM 701610 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For Marker Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Explanation IM 701610 01E Selecting the Marker See steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Po of pT d d 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform Type Select Trace i Pos x ursor Jump ump Exec Marker Mi M2 M3 Mg CH1 3 606di to 21 Moving the Cursor 5 Press the Position soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Position 6 Turn the
185. Setting a Trigger Trigger Type lt Chapter 6 gt There are two principal trigger types which you can use with the instrument Simple trigger Enhanced trigger Simple Trigger Sections 6 5 to 6 7 This is an edge trigger and the one which is used normally Enhanced Trigger Sections 6 8 to 6 14 This is a complex trigger The following seven types of enhanced trigger are available A B N trigger A Delay B trigger Pattern trigger Width trigger OR Trigger Window trigger TV trigger Edge Trigger Section 6 5 The edge trigger is the simplest type of trigger and uses a single trigger source to activate a trigger A trigger is activated when the trigger Source exceeds rises above or drops falls below the preset trigger level In addition to input signals CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 the external trigger input signal the commercial power supply signal that is used by the instrument can be used as a trigger source A trigger is activated refers to the condition in which trigger conditions are satisfied and a waveform is displayed Trigger Level l l l Trigger Source l l l l A trigger is activated at this point if Rise is selected A B N Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 8 This function activates a trigger the Nth time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true CH1 j m FVU Trigger CH1 HL H L H CH2 L H L H L H L H L
186. Turn the jog shuttle to select FTP Passive FTP Passive LPR Time Out sec Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i SMTP Time Out sec Time Difference From GMT Tine Hour C 9 Minute MISC a a a a A A TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 5 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the LPR Timeout Time 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select LPR Time Out 5 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time 7 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Setting the SMPT Timeout Time 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select SMTP Time Out 5 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time 7 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 13 24 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Enters special settings related to the FTP client LPR and SMTP Normally these parameters do not need to be specified Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode Turn this function ON when using the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF A firewall is furnished on a system that has security features It prevents intrusion from the outside into the network system Setting the LPR Timeout Time The DL1620 DL1640 DL1
187. URSOR Type Trace f Cursori ff Refi feRef Valuecursor Jum 4 000diy 2 000di i E Degree CH1 5 cote Ref2 360 Ci to 21 4 660di 2 00 di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Moving the Cursor 6 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 2000710731 11 16 12 J jos Normal Stopped 1908 T 500kS Ss 2NSfdiv i i i CH1 16 1 1 00 V diy DC Full Edge CH1 Auto 0 00 U x1 180 0000deg Y1 833 333mU X2 450 6600deg Y2 291 667m I I 1 AX 630 0000deq AY 1 125000 CURSOR Type Trace is Cursoriff Refi efef ValueCursor Jum 4 000di4 2 000di ump Exec Degree CHi Cursor2 6 Refz 360 C1 to 21 3 000diu 2 000di 8 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved Moving the Reference Cursor 9 Press the Ref1 Ref2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Ref1 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move Refi 11 Move Ref2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Ref1 and Ref2 both cursors are moved Setting the Reference Angle 12 Press the Ref Value soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the reference angle 9 4 IM 701610 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors Measuring Historical Data with the V Cursors Vertical History Selecting
188. Width Intixy 2 Sdey Width Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1i co 0Shot Burstz2 OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area CH1 Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item that you wish to set to ON If you select All Clear all items are turned OFF If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all the traces When the target channel is Math1 or Math2 Int1XY and Int2XY are not displayed Press SELECT to turn ON an item Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press ESC to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu Press the Cycle Trace soft key to display the period waveform selection menu Mode a ycle Tracga Item Shou Measure Cycle Setup CH1 Result Exec tatistics MEASURE f l Range1 5 000diu Next 5T Rangez 1 2 5 000di IM 701610 01E FS Statistical Processing 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the source channel for the period CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 If Own is selected each waveform s own period is used for its statistical processing Dun CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 tatistics 5 966d i The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement please see section 9 2 11 Press the Measure Exec soft key to perform the statistical processing Press the key again to stop statistical processing MEASURE
189. Work 1 lt Netuork 2002 07 15 11 46 lt Sof tuare 2002707709 09 23 lt KaAl 2002 06 28 10 09 Utilities 2062 06 25 18 20 lt Documents 2602 66 28 15 37 lt Desktop 2661716717 66 66 lt resource frk 2661 60 16 66 66 66720006 i 38574 2002 07 12 69 15 66726063 30574 2002 07 12 09 13 667206004 38574 92602 07712 09 13 13 For the remaining procedures please see section 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data through section 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a IM 701610 01E 13 9 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform and Setting Data to and from a Network Drive FTP Client Function Explanation 13 10 Note e You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also please note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by the dir command Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than seventeen or more characters Depending on the server the lt gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed e Inthe following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When Windows
190. aaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeenaas 11 21 11 8 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 11 25 11 9 Saving the Cursor Measurement Values cece cece cece acca a eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaanneeeeeeeees 11 28 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeas 11 31 Teli COPYING FIGS orermeee eee eter tener ern err err ect E nrtee kere r ere ere rte creer ree 11 35 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Crealing 4 Directory cesera a aaa a 11 39 Chapter 12 Trigger Input Trigger Output RGB Video Signal Output 12 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input cece eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaees 12 1 122 Trhoger output TRIG OUT sivecasitestte ceca e E E E E 12 3 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT sssssssssssssssnssesrrrresrrrrssrrrrssrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrrennne 12 5 124 Usno ihe CAIsOU DP SIINA aee E a N A ere EN 12 7 Chapter 13 Ethernet Interface Option xii 13 1 Connecting the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to a Personal Computer Workstation through an Ethernet Interface Option ccccccccccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaneeeseeeesseaseeeeeeesaaeess 13 1 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP cc cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaeaes 13 3 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform and Setting Data to and from a Network Drive CE TP Client FUNCION corea ieee a a a ce
191. abel See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary 2000 10 31 13 41 19 Jo Normal Stopped 169 T 500k57 S ZMs div aint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 U diy DC Full Mathi C1 C2 Edge CH1 F MATH Z Display ja MZ Setup MZ Label ON C3 C4 Mathz IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between the following channels Math1 CH1 CH2 only Math2 CH3 CH4 only DL1640 DL1640L only Math1 and Math2 can be computed simultaneously Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The Center and Sensitivity are set according to the computed result Manual The Center and Sensitivity can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 7 Smoothing About Linear Scaling When performing computation on a channel that has linear scaling set the computation is performed on the scaled value 9 35 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum lt For a description of this function see page
192. after acquisition is restarted In roll mode only the record most recently acquired when acquisition was stopped will be loaded into record No O Time at acquisition end is displayed under Show map Turning OFF the power will delete the entire contents of the history memory IM 701610 01E 7 7 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 26 gt Relevant Keys SEA O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure Selecting the Search Mode 1 Press HISTORY 2 Pressing the Search Mode soft key displays the search mode selection menu HISTORY 6 select Display gStart Rega earch Mod Record o Show Map o All End Rec OFF 0 3 Press the Zone soft key 6 select Display Start Rega OFF zone Parameter Record o Shou Map o All End Rec 0 Selecting the Search Zone Select Zone 4 Pressing the Search Setup soft key displays the search condition setting menu HISTORY fe Select Display figStart Rega earch Modga Record Cs Show Map Search Search 0 All 6 End Rec Zone Setup Exec 5 Press the Select Zone soft key to display the search condition selection menu Belect Zone Condition f Source zonei OFF IN OUT CH1 Search Upper 0 50div f Lower 0 50div E Setting the Search Conditions Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key several times to select O
193. aging process also stops Averaging restarts from the beginning when acquisition resumes If you are using simple averaging the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L terminates acquisition automatically when it completes the specified number of acquisitions as set by the acquisition count During repetitive sampling mode only the exponential averaging is performed IM 701610 01E 7 3 Using the Sequential Store Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 16 gt Relevant Keys 0 TRACE 765 OO HELP SETUP PENT a me ae O SHIFT EARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Mode 1 Press MODE 2 Press the Single N soft key to set the trigger mode to Single N MODE SACU Count Auto uto Level f Normal Single Single N Inf inite 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the Single N Count MODE per Auto uto Level f Normal Single a soe By setting the trigger mode to Single N the sequential store function can be used Acquisition Count Available numerical settings are as follows The setting range varies according to the Aejdsig pue uolnisinboy Explanation record length Record Length DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 1 kword 1 to 4000 2000 1 to 16000 8000 10 kwords 1 to 500 250 1 to 2000 1000 100 kwords 1 to 50 25 1 to 200 100 1 Mword 1 to 4 2 1 to 20 10 4 Mwords 1 to 4 2 Values in parentheses above represent the maxim
194. ailure Cannot load this file format File is now being accessed Wait a moment Cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress Cannot find HDR file Cannot load the specified file on this ROM version or this model Save data not found Unknown file format P P compression cannot be used to save FFT waveforms Data that have been P P compressed and saved cannot be loaded Cannot load waveform data that has been saved in history All mode when With Setup mode is OFF Please turn With Setup mode ON Cannot load waveform data that has been saved in trace All mode when With Setup mode is OFF Please turn With Setup mode ON Cannot load waveform data of more than 8 M record length when With Setup mode is OFF Please turn With Setup mode ON Cannot load compressed waveform data of more than 8 M record length Cannot load waveform data that has been compressed and saved in history All mode 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Corrective Action Check the file name Check the presence of the medium Check the medium Check the filename and the medium Set the disk s write protect switch to OFF Check the medium Check the file name Delete unnecessary files or use another disk The number of bytes necessary is given in the pages indicated on the right Delete all files in the directory before deleting the directory Clear the write disable mark Reformat the medium If the
195. al Vertical control circuit 1 MQ DC The input signal is sent directly to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you want to observe both the 1 MQ DC and AC components of the vertical input signal Vertical control circuit Input terminal O GND The ground signal not the input signal is connected to the Input terminal hee attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method enables circuit observation of the ground level on the screen 1 6 IM 701610 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Probe Attenuation lt Section 5 4 gt A probe is usually used to connect the circuit to be measured to an input terminal Use of a probe provides the following advantages The voltage and current of the circuit to be measured are not disturbed A signal can be input without distortion The measurement voltage range of the oscilloscope can be widened A 200 MHz passive probe is supplied with the instrument The probe attenuates the input signal by 1 10 When a probe is used the probe attenuation must match the instrument s attenuation setting so that the input voltage can be measured directly DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L s attenuations of 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10 A 1 V and 100 A 1 V are provided When you use a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument Cet the instrument s attenuation so that it matches the probe s attenuation Bandwidth Limit lt Section 5 7 gt
196. ally displayed in the Control Script window The error code and message are displayed by entering the status error command in the transmission command input area and sending the command You can also confirm the error on the screen image displayed using the data capture function and also on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L screen Binary data cannot be received or displayed The transmission timeout is 30 s Transmission and reception exceeding 30 s results ina timeout error If all the commands specified in the transmission command entry area is sent and the responses to the commands are not received within 30 s a timeout error occurs 13 46 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Displaying the Log Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network see page 13 30 Click the Log icon in the Web server window The Log window displaying the log of errors GO NO GO determination and action on trigger events that occurred on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L appears Up to the 30 newest events are logged Events older than those do not appear in the log Web server window Realtime Digital Filter CH1 4 Bandwidth Selects a cut off frequency of 20 WIHz to 10 kHz Smart Search SHIFT ZOOM Log window 5 Log Page Select Kind of Log Error Update Displaying the Log Selecting the Log Type Select Kind of Log From the list select t
197. ame using up to sixteen characters according to the procedures given on section 4 1 If you turned ON the auto naming function the first thirteen characters are valid Executing the Storing 18 Pressing IMAGE SAVE store the screen image Pressing IMAGE SAVE aborts the storing Displaying the Thumbnail Preview Window 19 Pressing the Thumbnail soft key causes a thumbnail of the screen image data located in the output directory specified in step 10 to be displayed four thumbnails are displayed together Pressing ESC closes the preview window 2001 06 22 13 31 33 Jo Normal St CH1 10 1 0 500 Vzdi DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Vzdi DC Full Math1 C1 C2 Edge CH1 F THEE File Name Color Information a Format Color fa File Listja File Nane Thunbna i 1 Comment TIFF OFF PC_CardNR CYCLE000 ECYCLED 0 When no files supporting the thumbnail feature are present on the storage medium an error message is displayed Pressing ESC clears the error message Scrolling the Thumbnail Window 20 When five or more files supporting the thumbnail feature are present you can scroll the window using the jog shuttle To scroll the window upwards turn the jog shuttle in the minus direction counterclockwise To scroll the window downwards turn the jog shuttle in the plus direction clockwise Note 10 12 Files supporting the thumbnail feature are scrolled two at a time IM 701610 01E Explanation
198. an select a waveform from input signals CH1 CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 and from math waveforms Math1 Math2 or Math1 only for the DL1620 You can use multiple waveforms for GO NO GO determination Select from the following determination standards for each waveform IN When the specified waveform enters the zone OUT When the specified waveform is outside the zone OFF Do not determine Selecting the Reference Waveform Edit Menu Select a reference waveform for creating a zone The basic waveform will be displayed as a trace and you can select from the following types Input signal waveform Math waveform Creating a Determination Zone Redraw New You can set up to six or three for the DL1620 determination zones The following are the setting ranges Up down setting range 8 div from the reference waveform Left right setting range 5 div from the center of the screen You can select input signal waveforms CH1 through CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 and computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 or Math1 only for the DL1620 for the waveforms that are to be determined in the determination zones that are registered in Zone1 through Zone 6 The screen displays the active zones depending on the settings in Setup IM 701610 01E 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Setting Logic AND When all parameter conditions 1 6 1 4 for the DL1620 are met GO NO GO Action is performed OR When at least one parameter con
199. and Storage media settings to floppy disk PC card etc Also explains related disk operations including disk formatting file copy and file deletion Trigger Input Trigger Output Explains external trigger input external clock input RGB Video Signal Output Ethernet Interface Option Other Operations Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection Specifications Appendix Index trigger output and RGB video output Explains how to save and load to from a network drive getting files from a floppy disk Zip disk or PC card how to output to a network printer and receive e mail transmissions Explains how to set the display colors display language click sound and back light Gives troubleshooting advice explains screen messages and self test operation Lists the unit s main specifications Appendix 1 shows the relationships between the time axis sampling rate and record length Appendix 2 explains waveform area calculation Appendix 3 gives the format for ASCII file headers Appendix 4 presents a list of default settings Index of contents IM 701610 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Structure of the Manual Units Krea Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s o ETETE E Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB storage capacity of a floppy disk Bolded Items Characters written in bold mainly refer to characters or setting values that are displayed on the screen or panel Symbols The following symbols
200. and end positions are not displayed on the X Y waveform The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Selecting the Split View Split DL1640 DL1640L only If this setting is ON the XY1 and XY2 waveforms are displayed in separate windows Further even if Mode is X Y T Y waveforms are displayed Precautions to be Taken when Displaying X Y Waveforms The divided windows of the T Y waveform display when using the T Y amp X Y format are displayed in accordance with the Format setting specified with DISPLAY The zoom function applies only to T Y waveforms In addition Main Z1 or Z2 can be selected for the T Y waveform display When expanding the X Y waveform change the Variable parameter of each channel The waveform can be expanded or reduced artificially In the modes below the waveform may flicker when using the T Y amp X Y display If the waveform flickers change to just the X Y or T Y display High Resolution mode Averaging mode Repetitive Sampling mode IM 701610 01E 8 13 8 9 Zooming the Waveform Relevant Keys Operating Procedure lt For a description of this function see page 1 19 gt NAP LLALL OO a a fe e j Ola SIMPLE ENHANCED VIE DI ACTION DELAY Selecting the Display Mode 1 2 3 Press ZOOM Pressing the Mode soft key displays the display format menu 200M Mode Main Press the soft key corresponding to the desired display form
201. anges the selected item SEARCH Type fa 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Serial x 2 000di4 No Match Pattern Setup J Clock CH ee EE Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard Source CH1 Thr Upper 0 000 U Thr Lower 0 000 U Pattern B _ C_J 9 8 16 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Start Point 5 000div SEARCH Type Pos Searched g Pattern Exec Pattern 8 19 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Clock CH 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the clock channel and press SELECT If you selected CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1620 go to step 7 If you selected None go to step 10 Clock CH Interval Source Thr Upper Thr Lower Pattern JAJ _B_ C D 8 8 16 24 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Pos fE Searched Pattern 0 000diy No Match Start Point Setting the Level When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to O V Type Serial Pattern Setup Level 0 00 Settings for these items can be input Polarity FJ vd directly using a USB keyboard a HysteresisL___6 3
202. ant to detect glitches fast spikes on a waveform which occur intermittently Rolling display also operates during single start acquisition although trigger occurrence causes the waveform to stop Li IM 701610 01E Vertical Sensitivity lt Section 5 8 gt Vertical Position lt Section 5 2 gt IM 701610 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes The V div vertical sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid The vertical sensitivity setting operates by switching to a different attenuator attenuation rate The setting changes in steps 1 V div 2 V div gt 5 V div In addition by performing computations on the digital data acquired using the voltage sensitivity above the waveform can be displayed at a sensitivity of 0 4 or 0 5 to 10 times the voltage sensitivity that was used to acquire the data Variable When V div is Switched from 1 V div to 0 50 V div f1div 1V Note 1 div 0 50 V Vertical Sensitivity and Measurement Resolution To get precise readings it is recommended that you set the vertical sensitivity so that the waveform s maximum and minimum amplitudes are close to the top and bottom of the screen Note that the instru
203. aracters on the keyboard including space Time Out If the instrument is not being accessed at the time specified here the connection to the network will be automatically closed The default setting is 5 s If you are using an FTP client software set a longer value here 13 22 IM 701610 01E 13 9 Viewing the Ethernet Interface Option and MAC Address Relevant Keys NAP NAP HELP Tare Reser eect aiase 400 aca stant sror SETUP rer os me ae O SHIFT EARCH O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TO TIME DIV Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Overview soft key MISC a a alibrationRemote Cnt1 USB Network Bystem Cnf Next 1 2 3 When Ether Yse C7 appears for the Option item in the overview screen this indicates that the Ethernet interface is installed The number on the right side is the MAC address in the example MAC 000064_830_051 2002 07 12 21 03 45 p Env System Overview CH1 16 1 6 106 Ysdi Model 701620 IC Full Record Length Max32MW CH CH Z 10 1 6 106 U div Option IC Full Printer Yes CHS 10 1 FDD ZIP PC CARD PC CARD J3 6 106 Ysdi PIB No IC Full Ether Yes MAC 660064_836_051 CH4 10 1 USECH Yes 6 106 U sdiv USB F Yes IC Full Others No Default Language JEN Soft Version 0 05 ROM Sum 40C6H Linkage Date 62706714 Fri 10 20 Ty CH1 Auto
204. arameter selection menu under Item Setup P P Max Min Init1XY and Init2XY are displayed starting from the smallest numbered channel For example if you selected P P of CH1 Min of CH2 and Max of CH3 P P of CH1 and Min of CH2 are displayed The results of statistical processing that are not displayed can be loaded into a PC using the communication function For details see the communications interface user s manual 9 23 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 3 Statistical Processing gt The following three methods of statistical processing are available Normal Statistical Processing Statistics Statistical processing is performed on all acquired waveforms while acquiring waveforms If you stop waveform acquisition and start it again statistical processing continues from where it left off Statistical processing is performed on the selected parameters for automated measurement that are not displayed Therefore if you exclude statistical processing on the automated measurement parameter that is being displayed while waveform acquisition is in progress the result of the statistical processing of the next selected parameter for automated measurement is displayed The number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt is the number of waveforms that have been acquired up to that point If you add statistical processing on a new automated measurement parameter while waveform acquisition is in progress or when it is sto
205. arameters only see section 9 9 Sample Transmission Report Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 1 Trigger Date and Time 2000 07 17 17 28 59 38 GO NOGO Status Success 9 Fail 1 NOGO Factor Param4 Ch4 tWd Max C1 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mV Freg C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us gt IM 701610 01E 13 8 Accessing DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Drives from a Network Drive FTP Server Function Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 30 gt Cre msc onoad wari f PHASE X Y MEN IENO SETUP PISPA Gory mace SAVE o SH SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED a cs ae Operating Procedure User Account Settings 1 2 Note IM 701610 01E Press MISC Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC ia a a alibrationRemote Cnt1 USB Netuork Bystem Cnf an Next 1 2 Press the User Account soft key to display the account settings menu Netuork_ MISC a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Move the cursor to User Name using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard User Account User Nane ANONYMOUS Password Please input a password twice The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Time Outtsec HISC ai
206. aran E 13 17 13 20 Mail Trans MiS SiON encrena 1 31 Maill Base Time sa terrora aiidcie wareneedis 13 17 Main Power Switch sccgo cccss2eccs ieaeccccsncestecnaaicssaneedaacincaseeze 3 6 MapD NO neire ea a E E joes seeageetaudaned wea oneubene 8 2 Marker Cursor aesasnesesenneonenerrererrrrerrrrrrrnrrrrrenne 1 21 9 3 9 9 IM 701610 01E Markers Cursor Measurement cccccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 1 21 MATRIK OYn A 2 4 MEASURE REY ai N 2 4 Measurement Resolution cccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeaes 1 5 Measurement trend cccsccccsssseeeceseeeceesseeeseseeeseaeess 13 41 Memo TES Tenana NON 15 10 Mesa e E E OAN 9 15 9 30 Message Language ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 14 4 MISC KEV sien tiubacerndrtavvaarurie a aides 2 4 MODE Ke y sciccasossperitetactas cents yannisanesancandorsenssncenanenaeatianess 2 3 MODE oss sesciei ces Satine oe cie ce oeaec ea ec AN iii MUNI DITGATIO NS ecese a 1 24 NCTE OI WIA sarn aude atau date tees 9 33 N NO AMCrDOIANON cuts cissasonterecat ca wace ses a R 1 18 NO GO OUT wes ccorcat seuss neich r a 16 8 NOAGO OUT SIONAL ssscesccaeeie naine TA ENR 9 52 Normal Acquisition Mode ceseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeees 7 3 Normal Mode saz cusnocat deer naintetenateataiovatataseusmanediaseeniatsineeatedds 6 1 Normal Mode Acquisition Mode c ssssseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 1 15 Normal Mode Trigger Mode ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
207. arch Upper 6 56div Lower 6 56d iv E Right 2 500d i Upper 6 50div fe Lower 6 50div a Right 2 500d i Setting the Logic 17 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Executing the Search 18 Press the Search Exec soft key to execute the search IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 7 7 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Displaying the Waveforms that are Found 19 Press ESC to return to the HISTORY menu 20 Press the Show Map soft key to display a list of the numbers of the acquired waveform data and time at acquisition end History Memory Map aN 00012 17 12 06 30 00037 17 11 34 25 00013 17 12 05 25 00038 17 11 33 20 H 00014 17 12 04 19 00039 17 11 30 52 00015 17 12 01 49 00040 17 11 29 48 H 00016 17 12 00 44 00041 17 11 28 43 00017 17 11 59 39 00042 17 11 27 38 00018 17 11 58 34 00043 17 11 26 33 00019 17 11 57 29 00044 17 11 25 28 H 00020 17 11 56 24 00045 17 11 24 24 00021 17 11 55 19 00046 17 11 23 19 00022 17 11 51 62 00047 17 11 21 44 H 00023 17 11 50 58 00048 17 11 20 39 H 00024 17 11 49 53 00049 17 11 19 34 H 00050 17 11 18 29 H1 10 1 1 00 Vrdiy DC Full 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT Resetting the Search Results 22 Select HISTORY gt Search Mode gt OFF or turn OFF Zo
208. arch irse aaaea ee a haaa e ain Seal 8 27 PUNO OCD esae 1 32 4 13 Automated Measurement Mode 0ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 9 30 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 12 Automated Measurement ccccccecceeseeeeeseeseeeees 1 22 9 26 Auxiliary Input Output Section cceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 16 8 PAVIA S seer ci ae atest sl arr natalia A cali Sato aa 7 3 Aver ding MOC Ges iat tueetncte Soca cinta eee eae hdceadevea nada norxebile 1 15 B EAC KG FA aaisen anaedai sse wed SR veal 14 5 Ballwin cassee sn E 5 10 Bandwidth LCImit ceirios aae aaaeaii 1 7 BINAY nearr ai E E AEO 11 13 IM 701610 01E BMA EIG spea cen tee nnanneenasaaaatce App 18 Bman Format sannana aa a aiea a a 11 13 BIOCK DIGGIN ites spec seinn e 1 1 BANNE S S sei ot cot tae ce sete a aai aa 14 1 Built in Printer eeen 10 1 10 3 16 7 Buit Hn Storage soinnin aaa a a arada 16 7 Buzzer ACION sassis nat nei 6 40 9 46 9 51 C Calibration ese e A 4 19 Canceling the Offset Voltage c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 7 Changing the Directory File Name ccceeeeeeeeeeees 11 39 Changing the File Attributes ccc ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeees 11 31 Checking the System Condition ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 11 Clear Trace sae cece tea en ie ad a a 1 33 4 18 CLEAR TRACE KEY caaea e tag tssunnncecbatsmeteabades 2 5 CICK SOUN inr E senate ama maeass 14 4 COMMON ia aeaea e e AEE EEEE 13 17
209. are used in this manual A CAUTION Note Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or instrument and the operator must refer to the user s manual The symbol is used in the user s manual to indicate the reference Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent serious of injury or death to the user Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Terms Used for Descriptions of Operations The following terms are used in chapters 3 to 15 to distinguish certain features in descriptions Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E Indicates the relevant panel keys which are necessary to carry out the operation Carry out steps in the order shown The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation A detailed description of the function is not provided For a detailed description of the function see Chapter 1 Contents BAO 2A 8 0 Pee mere eee ee arte ee a ee ee eee eer ere i Checking the Contents of the Package aenaran a aeaee a lil Sale Preca S asi5c 22 dares cies Aa er a iahedatensusendsasnacactuabecteasasaann vi SIPMCtUesOr T
210. asian mantaniaaseah nde iheacedegiaioateanoasiaasanaieesda tartan 14 7 Changing the USB Keyboard Language Confirming the Type of Keyboard that is Connected OPIN esineen a 14 8 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 UMOUDIESNOOUNG reri a awienee ee ane eee 15 1 Messages and Corrective Actions witisienctniainniinierinlninn ida ataliiilas 15 2 Self Diagnostic Test Self TeSt i xcnieec st tietreiei ale dite se a date eee eee 15 8 Checking the System Condition ccccccsssescccccceseeeeecccaeeeeeeeeeceeaseeeeeesseaueeeeessaaanseeess 15 11 Resetting the Circuit Breaker cc ceeeececeeceeeeneeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeessaaaaeeeeseeeaaaneeesseeaaaaeeeeenas 15 12 Recommended Replacement Parts cccccccsseccssseeeessseeeeseeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeeseeesseeeseees 15 13 Chapter 16 Specifications Appendix Index IM 701610 01E 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 MPULSSCION aiga aa ences feet a a ie ced omens cas tna hunts eres ni rans 16 1 THAGG SF SO CUCM asics seer tates swiss nee ee bendahara end elas Sed aah aa eeeelote 16 2 MEAN oP ene ner en ern nn eee ee 16 4 DISP cats caeeesesractensoeet A Baca agsmeodende samenteeannaa aie outed wade a 16 4 FUNC HIOINS maia ada assist cave cas peta ana E 16 4 Built in Printer OPON deresan a sea eeeeseiesaden deers 16 7 n 8 2 6 sine nen eee enn ec ee ee ene eee ale Aree eet hn ere re ee
211. at Main 21 Only 22 Only Main amp 21 Main amp Z2 21 amp 2Z2 ja iN amp Z1 amp 2Z2 Setting the Zoom Rate 4 Press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom rate of Z1 zoom box If you set Mode to Z1 Z1 Mag is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Mag is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Mag Z2 Mag is displayed 1 0004i a in amp Z1 amp 22 e zz fag 5 22 Pos 1 0004i bs ts Meas bs ts to 22 3a Meas Node a ai Fag 5 21 Pos 3a to Z1 Z00M it X Y it X Y ng to Z1 j Rng to 22 In a similar fashion press the Z2 Mag soft key to set the zoom rate of Z2 zoom box Selecting the Zoom Position 6 Press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key If you set Mode to Z1 Z1 Pos is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Pos is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Pos Z2 Pos is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom position of the Z1 zoom box 200M it X Y it X Y ng to 2Z1i Rng to 22 In a similar fashion press the Z2 Pos soft key to set the zoom position of Z2 zoom box By setting the jog shuttle control to both Z1 Pos and Z2 Pos the zoom positions of both Z1 and Z2 can be moved simultaneously 1 0004i a in amp Z1 amp 22 e zz fag 5 Z2 Pos 1 0004i T Meas T to 22 a Meas Node ai Fag 21 Pos a to 21 IM 701610 01E 8 9 Zooming the Waveform Changing the Range of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 8 Press the Fit Meas Rng to Z1 or Fit Meas
212. ative Sides Si S3 S2 S3 Sf IntegiXY 1 Multiplc Loops 2 Non Closed Curve Gg Area S So Area Enclosed by a Curve Connecting the Start and Stop Area S nxSo n Number of Loops otis A Start Point Polmts art Poin f Ey Stop Point Stop Point Waveform i 3 Loop Tracing a Figure Eight 4 Spiral Loop Area S So S1 I Area S Sox2 S1 Number of Overlaps Varies According to the Number of Loops Start Point AaS Stop Point Stop Point 3 x pu ddy App 13 IM 701610 01E Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ2XY 1 When Only One Y Data Corresponds to X Data 3 X Axis Y 0 Start Point Stop Point Area S S0 Yj So Area S So U gt Start Point Stop Point X Axis Y 0 2 4 G X Axis Y 0 St f Start Point Area S So op Point_ So A Area S So So Stop Point Start Point X axis Y 0 2 When the Waveform Extends into the Negative Side Start Point X Axis Y 0 A Area S So S1 Stop Point 2 When Two or more Y Data Correspond to X Data top Point A Area S So Start Point Area S S0 2xSi S2 X Axis Y 0 X Axis Y 0 App 14 IM 701610 01E Appendix 3 IM 701610 01E IIYOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publiclnfo FormatVersion 1 11 Model DL1600 Endian Big DataFormat TRACE GroupNumber 3 TraceTotalNumber 10 DataOffset 0 Group1 TraceNumber 4
213. attern Result Executing the Search 16 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The results are displayed in the zoom waveform display position selected in step 15 You can perform a search using the same search criteria 1000 times Displaying Previous Search Results 17 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search results to be displayed The most recent search has the highest number Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 19 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the zooming factor of Z1 and Z2 20 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the position of the zoom box for Z1 and Z2 When Performing a Pulse Width Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH Type fa 21 Mag 6 Z1 Pos searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 2 900di4 No Match E 4 Press the Width soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel uto Scrol 1Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Criteria 5 When you press the Setup soft key the search criteria se
214. aveform You are free to switch the display from the current newest waveform to any of other N 1 waveforms in the history The illustration below shows how data can be displayed assuming N 1024 Saved Waveform Data of Previous 1024 Triggers Current Waveform Display Select Record 0 Selected Record No 0 Any Former Waveform Display Select Record is Selectable in the Range 0 to 1023 Selected Record No 25 In addition a particular waveform can be found from the past waveforms that are held Display Settings lt Chapter 8 gt IM 701610 01E Display Format Section 8 1 You can display waveforms from different channels in different windows You can choose to use 1 window Single 2 windows Dual or 4 windows Quad 4 windows Quad is not available on the DL1620 You can select either of the following two methods for assigning channels to windows Auto Channels that are set to ON are displayed in order of channel number with the lowest channel displayed in the top window Fixed Channels are displayed in order of channel number regardless of whether ON or OFF User Arbitrarily assign the channels to the split screens regardless of wether or nor the channel display is turn ON Graticule Section 8 3 Use this feature to select use of grid frame or cross graticule Scale Values Section 8 4 If the Scale Value setting is ON the screen displays numerical values at the top and bottom
215. aveforms CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 The detected section is displayed expanded in the zoom window e Search Example in which the Clock Channel is Set to None and H1 L CH2 L CH3 H and CH4 L L Low Level H High Level L Detects this Position and Displays the Waveform Expanded in the Zoom Window The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 1 27 suopuny 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform e Example in which the clock channel is set to CH1 and CH1 rising CH2 L CH3 H and CH4 L CH1 L Low Level H High Level t Detects this Position andDisplays the WaveformExpanded in the Zom Window The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Pulse Width Search From the search start position search for a portion of the waveform containing a pulse which is longer or shorter than a previously defined length of time Expand the retrieved portion of the waveform per the zooming factor and display it in the waveform zoom display window Li Li Vaan PUR Ti Oo fo Ba 1 as Bilee 2 pe eee Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out V Zoom Screen Center Position Y Starting Point for Next Search Pulse The Length of Time a Specified Condition is Fulfilled T A Specified Length of Time 1 28 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Auto Scroll The zoom box scrolls automatically in a designated direction You
216. ay the main window and the target waveform Create the zone waveform Select Quit to exit zone editing Reference Section 6 1 7 2 6 1 7 2 5 12 7 1 5 12 7 1 7 1 7 1 11 5 7 7 7 8 8 9 7 7 7 8 7 7 7 8 7 2 7 6 7 6 10 3 9 9 9 9 9 9 Display the main window and the target window 9 9 and create the zone waveform Abort statistical processing 9 3 6 1 IM 701610 01E 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions System Operation Errors 960 to 968 972 to 981 Code 952 961 966 967 972 982 983 984 IM 701610 01E Message Cannot set this parameter when the acquisition mode is Average Failed to backup setup data Will initialize Fan stopped Turn off the power immediately Backup battery is flat Fatal error in the communication driver The USB devices power consumption exceeded the capacity of the USB hub The voltage of power supply battery is too low Turn off the power immediately Please do charge of the battery or replace The voltage of power supply battery is too high Turn off the power immediately Confirm the voltage of the battery Note When servicing is required double check by initializing the instrument Corrective Action Check the condition of the built in lithium battery using the overview screen Servicing is required Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required Servicing is required to replace the battery
217. be entered for units of voltage V and time s Also the prefixes that can be used are determined by the allowable input range Input Example If you type 1 then Enter for the Offset this means 1 V so 1000 mV is displayed on the screen If you type 1 0 then m this means 10 mV so 10 mV is displayed on the screen If you enter a prefix for the units it is not necessary to press the Enter key The available unit prefixes are as follows Key Prefix Kork 108 m 10 Uoru 10 Norn 10 Porp 10 12 IM 701610 01E 4 5 suoieiadQ uowWwoy gt 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings 4 6 Operations Using a USB Mouse You can use a USB mouse to operate the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L as you would using the front panel keys In addition you can point to the desired item on a menu and click it This is similar to pressing the soft key corresponding to a menu and pressing the SELECT key USB PERIPHERAL Connector The USB mouse is connected to the USB PERIPHERAL connector on the left side panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L For details on the USB PERIPHERAL connector see page 4 3 USB Mouse Models That Can Be Used A USB mouse with a wheel conforming to USB HID Class Ver 1 1 can be used Note For USB mouse models that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Some items cannot be specified when using a mouse without a wheel Connection Procedure
218. be used as a protective grounding terminal In position of a bistable push control NU Alternating current oN Both direct and alternating current ON power C OFF power L I Out position of a bistable push control IM 701610 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury or death or damage to the instrument Power Supply Before connecting the power cord make sure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating of the instrument and that it does not exceed the maximum rated voltage of the power cord Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding The protective grounding terminal must be connected to ground to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or fuse might be defective Do Not Operate Near Flammable Materials Do not operate the instrum
219. below Current Probe 700937 Positive Current Negative Current DC AC f 50 Hz Current Generated A Current Probe 701930 Positive Current Negative Current DC AC f 50 Hz 1 eee N X Current Consumption mA Current Generated A Calculate the positive and negative current consumption of the differential probe model 701920 at a maximum of 125 mA 3 11 s u w nse N Buryen 3104 g e 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction A N CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the COMP terminal as damage to the instrument may result Operating Procedure 1 Turn ON the power switch 2 Connect the probe to the input terminal to which the signal is to be applied 3 Touch the probe s tip against the probe compensation signal output terminal and connect the grounding wire to the functional earth terminal Perform auto setup using the procedure described in section 4 3 Insert a screwdriver into the phase adjusting hole in the probe and turn the trimmer so that the displayed waveform becomes square E a Phase Adjusting Hole Probe Compensation COMP Signal Output Terminal Functional Earth Terminal 3 12 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction Reason for Probe Compensation If the probe s input capacitance is outside the specified range the gain will not be constant across diff
220. ber of Characters Available Characters Date time Specified number 0to9 File name 1 to 16 Oto9 AtoZ _ Display image comment Oto 20 All characters including space File comment 0 to 25 All characters including space Mail address O to 40 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space User name Login name 0 to 15 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Password Oto 15 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Note e Comments and file names can both contain both uppercase and lowercase letters However file names are not case sensitive The following file names are not allowed due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 You cannot enter two or more atmarks in succession Connecting a USB Keyboard IM 701610 01E You can connect a USB keyboard for entering file names comments and other information In addition the keys on the keyboard are assigned to the keys on the front panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L which allows you to operate the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L in a similar fashion See Appendix 5 USB PERIPHERAL Connector When connecting a USB keyboard to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L connect a USB cable to the USB PERIPHERAL connector There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors 12 3 4 Pin No Signal name Port 1 1 Vbus 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data Port 2 4 GND Ground 4 3 4 1 Entering Values and Character Stri
221. c OFF 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the record number that you wish to recall Specify a record number in the range Start Rec to End Rec 4 Press the Display Mode soft key to select One or All Go to step 5 if you selected All Otherwise go to step 8 Setting the Accumulation Range When Display Mode is All 5 Press the Start Rec End Rec soft key HISTORY fe select Display fgstart Reda earch Mod Record 0 Show Map 0 One All e End Rec OFF 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the first record number to be accumulated 7 In a similar fashion set the end record number End Rec 7 8 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 7 6 Using the History Memory Display a List of Time Stamps 8 Pressing the Show Map soft key displays a list of acquired data numbers and the time at acquisition end History Memory Map aN Ht 00000 17 12 22 34 00025 17 11 48 48 00050 17 11 18 29 H 00001 17 12 21 29 00026 17 11 47 43 H 00002 17 12 20 24 00027 17 11 46 38 00003 17 12 19 19 00028 17 11 45 33 H 00004 17 12 17 44 00029 17 11 44 28 H 00005 17 12 16 39 00030 17 11 43 23 H 96006 17 12 15 34 00031 17 11 42 19 H 00007 17 12 14 29 00032 17 11 39 49 H 00008 17 12 13 24 00033 17 11 38 44 00009 17 12 12 20 00034 17 11 37 39 H 00010 17 12 08 40 00035 17 11 36 34 00011 17 12 67 35 00036 17 11 35 29 00012 17 12 06 30 00037 17 11 34 25 00013 17 12 05 25 00
222. can also be used to retain the waveforms that are currently displayed on the screen The display can be updated without having to stop the waveform acquisition see next section IM 701610 01E 4 17 4 6 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see pages 1 31 and 1 32 gt MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC MATH Eare janso CELE use eono of marn ER ajm RESET MENU SETUP PES DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE e ET IMAGE SAVE O Gap SEARCH O TRIG D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY O OlGE S amp S Operating Procedure Explanation 4 18 Snapshot Press SNAP SHOT The snapshot process will start Clear Trace Press CLEAR TRACE The clear trace process will start Snapshot This function retains the waveforms currently displayed on the screen To activate this function just press SNAP SHOT without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained Hence it is very useful when you want to compare waveforms The following operations are not available for snapshot waveforms e Cursor measurements and automatic measurements Zoom and math operations The snapshot waveforms can be saved or loaded For details see section 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms Clear Trace This function clears every waveform currently displayed on the screen If the trace is cleared while waveform acquisition is i
223. can stop the zoom box while checking zoomed waveforms 1 29 suonoun 1 6 Communications Ethernet Interface Option 1 30 lt Chapter 13 and Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E gt Saving and Loading to and from a Network Drive FTP Client Function Sections 13 3 13 4 You can save delete and copy waveform data screen image data and setting information onto the hard drives of devices on the network such as a PC or workstation running the FTP server function just as you would onto internal floppy disks Zip disks or PC cards DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L File Retrieval from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Floppy Disk Zip Disk or PC Card FTP Server Function Section 13 8 You can download files from the internal floppy disk Zip disk or PC card of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using a networked PC or workstation acting as the client DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Outputting to a Network Printer LPR Client Function Section 13 5 You can print screen images to a network printer just as you would to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L s built in printer or to a printer with a USB interface DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Oo Zoo IM 701610 01E 1 6 Communications Mail Transmission SMTP Client Function Sections 13 6 13 7 You can send transmissions to a given e mail address at specified intervals Using this function you can periodically transmit such information as GO NO GO r
224. ce between the Y axis values of M1 and M2 DY3 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M3 DY4 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M4 X1 to Z4 The X axis values of M1 to M4 DX2 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M2 DX3 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M3 DX4 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M4 Angle Cursor Degree Set the measurement zero point position of reference cursor Ref1 and the end point position of the reference cursor Ref2 on the X axis within the screen and assign an angle corresponding to the width of Ref1 and Ref2 Using this angle as a reference this function measures the angle of the two angle cursors Cursor1 and Cursor2 DX1 The angle of Cursor1 from Ref1 DX2 The angle of Cursor2 from Ref1 DDX The angle difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 DY1 The Y axis value of Cursor1 DY2 The Y axis value of Cursor2 DDY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Range of reference width 1 to 720 Vertical History Cursor Vertical History Makes statistical computations of cursor position historical data X1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 DX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between t
225. cess Control The following network components are installed Client for Microsoft Networks af 3Com Fast EtherLink XL 10 100Mb TX Ethernet NIC 3C905 34 Dial Up Adapter Y TCP IP gt 3Com Fast EtherLink XL 10 100Mb TX Ethernet N TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter 2 Remove Properties 4 Set the parameters such as the IP address according to the table on the previous page and click OK TCPAIP Properties ax Bindings Advanced Ne bos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration F Address An IF address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 192 176 25 2 TCP IP Properties E E Bindings Advanced NeBos ONS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address The first gateway in the Installed Gateway list will be the default The address order in the list will be the order in which these machines are used New gateway 192 176 25 2 Add Installed gateways Remove IM 701610 01E 13 7 m F gt D 5 T 5 h D O D O x O z 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform and Setting Data to and from a Network Drive FTP Client Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 30 gt Re
226. cle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics 3 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 3 000di Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measurement item dialog box and the measuring source channel selection menu MEASURE Mode le T Range1 Item Delay Show Measure 3 906di Next History Setup Setup Result Exec fST Range2 1 2 tatistics 3 000di Press the soft key corresponding to the measuring source channel to select it CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 0 Freq 0 AygFreg co Period 0 AvgPer iod Rise IntiTy 6 Fall Int2Ty co Width Intixy 6 Width 6 Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1 co 0Shot Burstz2 OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ _Source__ MEASURE Dual Area CH1 Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item you wish to turn ON If you select All Clear you can turn OFF all the items at once If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all of the traces When the target channel is Math1 or Math2 Int1XY and Int2XY are not displayed Press SELECT to turn ON the item Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press ESC to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement 9 22 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing 9 Press the Measure Exec soft key to ex
227. croll 10 Press the Exec soft key to perform the Scroll Press the key again to stop the Scroll IM 701610 01E 8 27 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Explanation 8 28 When the data acquisition is stopped a section of the waveform can be searched and displayed expanded Search Method Type The following two search methods are available Edge Searches the number of times the signal went above rising or below falling the specified level from the search start position Serial Pattern Searches for a section of the waveform that has the same pattern as the specified waveform pattern High or Low status or Don t Care Parallel Pattern Searches by using a status High Low or Don t Care of each channel CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 Pulse Width Searches for a particular section of the current displayed waveform Searches for a section of the waveform of which the pulse width is shorter or longer than the specified time width from the search start position Auto Scroll The zoom position automatically moves auto scroll in the specified direction You can scroll through the zoomed waveform and stop the scrolling at the desired position Search Condition Setup When the Type is Edge Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Math1 and Math2 or Math1 for the DL1620 Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The rang
228. cture Print Picture 60 to My Pictures Set as Background Set as Desktop Item ut Copy Gopy Shortcut Paste Add to Favorites Properties 13 37 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Saving Data on the Computer and Loading Setup Data from the Computer to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Data Control Saving Data on the Computer Capture Data type Select the type of data to be saved from Waveform Binary Waveform ASCII Waveform Float Setup and Measure For details on the settings see sections 11 5 11 6 and 11 8 ala Lorne Waveform Binary Waveform ASCII Waveform Float Input Password Capture Exec In the dialog box that appears when you click Capture Exec set the save destination and file name and save the data diala Cantos Capture Waveform Binary Abort Capture Exec ra Abort To abort the save operation while data is being saved click Cancel in the dialog box Then click Abort on the control panel 65 of webdc_asc cs Completed E oO x Jala faire Saving webdc_asc cey from dl 600 1 Capture TTT TTT YY Waveform Binary Estimated time left 1 zec 208 KE of 265 KB copied gt 7 abort Download to C Documents and S webde_asc cey Abort anture Exec o Transfer rate 69 0 KBrSec T Close this dialog bos when download completes pen Loading the Setup Data from the Computer to the DL
229. d Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words 500s 20 100k 20 100k 20 100k 20 100k 200s 50 100k 50 100k 50 100k 50 100k 100k _ 100__ 100k 100k 200 100k 100k 500 100k 100k tk 100k 100k 2k 100k 2S 5k 100k 5k 100k 5k 100k 5k 100k 1s 10k 100k 10k 100k 10k 100k 10k 100k 500 ms 20k 100k 20k 100k 20k 100k 20k 100k 200 ms 50k 100k 50k 100k 50k 100k 50k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 200k__ 100k 100k 500k 100k 100k 4M_ 100k 100k 2M___ 100k 2ms 5M 100k 5M 100k 5M 100k 5M 100k 1 ms 10M 100k 10M 100k 10M 100k 10M 100k 500 us 20M 100k 20M 100k 20M 100k 20M 100k 200 us 50M 100k 50M 100k 50M 100k 50M 100k 100k 100M _ 100k 2us 200M 4k 5G 100k 100M 2k 5G 100k 1 us 200M 2k 10G 100k 100M 1k 10G 100k 500 ns 200M 1k 20G 100k 100M 500 20G 100k 200 ns 200M 400 50G 100k 100M 200 50G 100k 50G 50k 100M 100 _ 50G_ 50k 50 ns 200M_ 100 50G 25k 20 ns 50G 10k 10 ns 50G 5k 50G 5k 50G 5k 5 ns 50G 2 5k 50G 2 5k 50G 2 5k 50G 2 5k 2 ns Q 1k 50G 1k 50G 1k 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active IM 701610 01E gt x D D 5 2 x Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 Mword When envelope mode is O
230. d of by IP address when using the FTP client function see sections 13 3 and 13 4 or the LPR client function see section 13 5 Set the domain name the DNS server address default is 0 0 0 0 and the domain suffix In networks that support DHCP these settings can be configured automatically Consult your network administrator for details on the settings DNS Server Up to two DNS servers can be specified primary and secondary If the primary server is down the secondary server is used to search the host name domain name and IP address e Domain Suffix If the IP address corresponding to the domain name described in the previous paragraph is not found on the DNS server then it may be that the system is configured to use another domain name Set this other domain name as a domain suffix Up to two domain suffixes can be specified DomainSuffix1 primary and DomainSuffix2 Secondary Note e To change this menu setting you must restart the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L When the Ethernet cable is not connected if you turn ON the power to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L while DCHP is ON there is a possiblity of malfunction in the communications or file functions Turn DHCP OFF and restart the instrument Configuring the TCP IP Settings of the PC Communications parameters such as the IP address must be specified also on the PC side Communications parameters are specified for each Ethernet NIC that is installed in the PC Here the settings of the
231. d write possible R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Selecting the Files to be Deleted You can delete all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be deleted Selecting the Files One at a Time Place an asterisk to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting All Files at Once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk on every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory 11 33 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo pue Bulnes g 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files 11 34 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e x Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file na
232. de DL1640 DL1640L IM 701610 61E Describes the I2C bus analysis function and I C Bus Analysis Function SPI bus analysis function option e The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Display contents illustrated in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your screen e Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual e Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited A guarantee card is attached to the instrument The card will not be reissued so please read it carefully and keep it in a safe place The TCP IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California e Internet Explorer Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT Windows Me and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Adobe Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated Zip is a regist
233. de is one division or more IM 701610 01E 1 11 1 3 Setting a Trigger HF Rejection lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Set HF rejection to ON when you want to remove high frequencies exceeding 15 kHz from the trigger source This prevents a trigger from being activated unexpectedly due to high frequency noise Trigger Hysteresis lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt If the trigger level width is not sufficient the trigger point fluctuates each time a trigger is activated if noise is present in the trigger source thereby resulting in unstable displayed waveforms To solve this problem a specified margin hysteresis can be added to the selected trigger level The hysteresis level can be chosen from AZ and A If AZ is selected a wide hysteresis level is provided to eliminate fluctuation in the trigger point thereby resulting in a stable displayed waveform However in this case the trigger points become uncertain Thus select 4 if you want to activate a trigger to detect small fluctuations in a waveform Hysteresis Width 7 Trigger is activated Trigger Source and Trigger Level lt Sections 6 5 to 6 13 gt Trigger Source Selects the signal for the selected trigger type The external trigger signal or the commercial power supply signal can also be used a trigger source Trigger Level Sets the voltage level used to judge trigger conditions such as trigger slope rise fall of a signal Trigger Hold Of
234. ded Weight Approx 3 9 kg options excluded Cooling Method Forced air cooling air discharged from rear Installation Position Horizontally the stand can be used vertically cannot use the Zip drive and no stacking Battery Backup Setup data and internal clock are backed up by a built in lithium battery Battery life approx 5 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Accessories e 1 power cord Only on models with AC suffix e 1 DC power connector Only on models with DC suffix e 200 MHz passive probes 4 e 1 roll of printer paper Only on models with B5 suffix e 4 rubber pads for bottom legs B9989EX e Front cover stickers 4 B9989FA e User s Manual this manual e Operation Guide e Communication Interface Manual CD ROM e C Bus Analysis Function User s Manual Only on models with F5 suffix eo ore 16 11 General Item Specifications Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 e Overvoltage category Installation category II Input terminal Overvoltage category Installation category Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying standard EN61326 Class A C Tick AS NZS 2064 apply for 701605 701610 701620 700960 700937 701930 e EN61000 3 2 e EN61000 3 3 This product is a Class A for industrial environment product Operation of this product in a domestic environment may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Cable requiremen
235. directly using a USB keyboard fa Type idth Type Ja ry feTimequS Window fold off Set Pattern Level us Width Pulse lt T Coup 1 ing 6 0075 ON 6 08 The setting also applies to A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 When the Window is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701610 01E 6 25 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Pulse Width 12 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Time press the Time soft key ENHANCED If the Width Type is T1 lt PLS lt T2 or T1 lt PLS lt T2 press the Time1 Time2 soft key ENHANCED Type idth Type fa Pa f eTinmei us Window eHold off et Pattern Level 0 00 us Width T1 lt PLS lt T2 Coupling Timez us ON 0 08 0 00 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the pulse width to 0 005 us or 0 0075 us Time2 is reset to 0 01 us Setting the Window 14 Press the Window soft key to select either ON or OFF When the Window is turned OFF a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the channel
236. displays both the DC and the AC content of the input signal 1 MQ GND Checks the ground level Input Coupling and Frequency Characteristic The frequency characteristic when AC or DC is selected is shown below Note that low frequency signals and low frequency contents are not acquired if AC is selected When AC is selected When DC is selected Attenuation Attenuation 0 dB 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 200 MHz 200 MHz Input Frequency Input Frequency Less than 10 Hz when using 1 1 probe Less than 1 Hz when using 10 1 probe CAUTION The maximum input voltage when the frequency is less than or equal to 1 kHz is 300 VDC or 300 V RMS Applying a voltage that exceeds these values can damage the input section When the frequency exceeds 1 kHz voltages below these values can also sometimes damage the input section SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 5 6 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 7 gt SNAP HELP amp LLLE OO ca PH ree heo SETUP Ca ea n T O SHIFT PNE A SEARCH O TRIG D oO Oo SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV lt a The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure Explanation 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Probe soft key to display the menu used to select the attenuati
237. dit zones that have been previously created 23 24 In step 5 press the Redraw soft key Repeat steps 6 22 to edit the zones Selecting a Determination Waveform 29 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Press the Setup soft key to display the Setup menu Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace of Zone1 Condition zone1 CH1 PFN pN IN zone C p puT __1N_ Zone3 Zone4 zones zones C ma DFAT __on_ uy NJ Logic LAND __OR__ Sequence Single _ Continue ACQ Count o Buzzer Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard ia Action 0 Save to File o Hard Copy 0 Image Save 0 Send Mail Mail Count GO NO GO a faT Rangei dit Menu Setup 5 666di Exec ST Rangez 5 000di Press SELECT to select CH1 through CH4 Math1 or Math2 or CH1 CH2 or Math1 for the DL1620 Condition zonei1 zonez zone3 zone4 zoneS zone6 Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Buzzer 9 Image Save Send Mail Mail Count Save to File 6 Hard Copy Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode under Zonet Press SELECT to select On or Off Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition under Zonet Press SELECT to select In or Out Set Zone2 Zone6 or Zone2 Zone3 for the DL1620 as necessary Setting the L
238. dition from 1 6 1 4 for the DL1620 are met GO NO GO Action is performed Action to Take when the Condition is Met not Met Action Buzzer Sounds the buzzer Save to File Saves the waveform data to the storage medium FD Zip disk or PC card specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB Net Print Ethernet interface option specified by Copy to in the Copy setting menu Image Save Saves the screen image data to the output destination FD Zip disk or PC card that you specified in the Image Save menu Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Action Count Sequence Single Conclude after one instance of the Action Continue Repeat the Action the number of times specified as the sampling count in ACQ Count if set to Infinite Action repeats until determination stops Waveform Sampling Count ACQ Count Set the waveform sampling count Infinite Sampling continues until determination stops or until START STOP or Abort soft key is pressed 9 1 65536 Sampling stops after the specified count has been reached Start Stop GO NO GO Determination Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination Determination will stop automatically when finished or you can press START STOP or Abort soft key to force a stop SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM Save to File Hard Copy Image Sav
239. div__ 4 Source Thr Upper 0 0 y Clock CH Thr Lower 9 0 VU Pattern JAJ _B_ C D 8 8 16 24 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Start Point 5 600div SEARCH Type Pos f Searched S Pattern Exec pattern do A e i a e Pattern Setting the Polarity When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 8 Press SELECT to select f or 4 Setting the Hysteresis When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div Setting the Interval When Clock CH is Set to None 10 Turn the jog shuitle to set the interval at which to check the pattern and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the interval to the default value 8 20 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Source 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Clock CH Interval 9 02us Pattern 8 8 HXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXX XXX Clear Patt Start Point Type Serial Pattern Set the Thr Upper 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine Low and press SELECT You can use the arrow k
240. dle protocol exchanges when communicating on multiple networks and that smoothly carry out sending and receiving of data Consult your network administrator for the default gateway setting values In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP 13 5 uodo ddej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 13 6 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DCHP is a protocol that allocates necessary setting information to all PCs connected to the network When DHCP is ON the following settings are automatically assigned IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway e DNS To use DHCP you must have a DHCP server installed on the network Inquire with your network administrator to find out if you can use DCHP When DHCP is set to ON different settings may be assigned each time the power is turned ON Therefore when using the FTP server function See section 13 8 be sure to check the IP address and other settings of the instrument on the PC or workstation each time you turn ON the instrument DNS Domain Name System The DNS is a system that correlates the host name domain name to the IP address Given AAA BBBBB co jp AAA is the hostname and BBBBB co jp is the domain name The host domain name can be used instead of a numeric IP address when accessing the network On the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L you can specify the host by name instea
241. e normal mode The maximum and minimum values are paired and acquired in the acquisition memory Envelope mode is useful when you want to avoid aliasing Section 1 2 since the sample rate is kept high irrespective of the time axis setting T div Furthermore envelope mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches pulsing signals which rise very fast or display an envelope of a modulating signal Pata I PA l l l 1 I I l TAREE Envelope I l l IM 701610 01E 1 15 suopuny 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Sequential Store lt Section 7 3 gt In the real time sampling mode waveform data will be stored in the acquisition memory only a set number of times and all waveforms can be displayed This stops automatically after acquisition The maximum acquisition count available with the feature varies depending on the record length The range for the DL1620 DL1640 is 2 to 4000 times for the DL1640L it is 2 to 16000 times Once the specified number of waveforms have been stored you can display any of the waveforms individually or all of them together so that it is possible to derive a time series of the waveform variation The drawings below illustrate how stored data can be displayed assuming sequential storage of 100 waveforms Display Example in Case Count 100 Times Displaying All Waveforms Displaying Newest Waveform Displaying Oldest Waveform ALL Selected Record No 0 Selected Record
242. e 5550080 byte File Nane Flash_Men PC_Card NetWork 1 lt old gt 2602 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED gt 1999 16 03 10 21 CYCLE0012 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 41 R W CYCLE0011 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 41 R U CYCLE0010 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 40 R W CYCLE9669 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 27 R U CYCLE9668 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 26 R U CYCLE0007 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 25 R W CYCLE9606 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 25 R U CYCLE0005 2602 06 24 19 21 8 Enter the directory file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Medium Flash_Mem Internal flash memory PC_Card PC card FD Floppy disk ZIP Zip disk NetWork Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Selecting the File Attributes Select the attributes for each file from the following choices gt R W Read and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file 11 41 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Buipeo7 pue Bulnes z 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory Changing the Direct
243. e Count CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Measure Press SELECT to select whether to measure the rising edge 4 or the falling edge Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge Count under Measure Press SELECT and turn the jog shuttle to select on which rising or falling edge to make measurements Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Reference Press SELECT to select whether the trace or the trigger is to be the reference Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace Pressing SELECT displays the reference waveform menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the reference waveform then press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Polarity source Mode OFF Measure Select Polarity Edge Count CH2 Reference CH3 Trace CH4 Polarity Edge Count Source MEASURE ES CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 9 13 SISAJEUY LWUIOJOARM e 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 14 22 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Reference 23 Press SELECT to select whether to make the rising 4 or the falling edge the reference 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge Count under Reference 25 Press SELECT to select which rising or falling edge to make the reference Setting the 1 Cycle Mode 26 Press the 1 Cycle Mode soft key to select ON or OFF MEASURE
244. e Internet If the message language of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to English the English Web page is displayed if the message language is set to Japanese the Japanese Web page is displayed For the setup procedure of the message language see section 14 2 13 50 Chapter 14 Other Operations 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness Relevant Keys Geref msc Jfonoad mar X Y MEN EN PHASE ACQ START STOP CSETUP pisPLa Copr mace save o SHIT SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV m 12 SIMPLE ENHANCED a cs ACTION _ DELAY OIO ICD Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key a a a a alibrationRemote Cnt Netuork PBystem Cnfg Ba 3 Pressing the Graphic Color soft key displays a menu used to set the display color and brightness A A A LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test Next Info 2 2 4 Pressing the Mode soft key displays a menu used to select the settings MISC Mode 2 Menu Waveform fe Snap f Grid fe Cursor Intensity 19 19 10 10 10 Setting the Color 5 Pressing the RGB soft key displays the display color setting menu raph Color MISC aa Snap Grid J Cursor 16 16 16 16 ne 6 Pressing the Menu soft key displays a dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items raph Color MISC Mode a a a Menu Waveforn Others RGB IM 701610 01E 14 1 SUOI E19dO 19410 z 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightnes
245. e Minute of Time Difference From GMT in the range of 0 to 59 NOTE n a Minute can be specified only if Time Hour is set in the range of 11 to 12 Minute cannot be specified if Time Hour is set to 12 or 13 Explanation Set the time difference from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time Make sure that you set this value if you are using the Web server function Setting the Time Difference from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time Set the time difference in the range of 12 hours 00 minute to 13 hours 00 minute For example the Japanese standard time is ahead of the GMT by 9 hours In this case set Time Hour to 9 and Minute to OO Checking the Standard Time Check the standard time for the region where the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is used with one of the following methods Check the date and time settings of your computer Check the Web site at http www worldtimeserver com Note The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L does not support daylight saving time To set the daylight saving time adjust the time difference from the GMT 13 26 IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function You can use the Web server function with the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to display the screen image of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L on the Web browser on your computer and perform file operations on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using the keys displayed in your Web browser This section contains the following information Overview of the Web Server Function gt See this
246. e OV OV Arbitrary 2 Trigger Level 2 5 V 1 65 V Arbitrary 2 1 2 V div when probe setting is 1000 1 2 For details about the setting ranges see Sections 5 5 5 8 and 6 5 5 9 SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 5 7 Setting the Bandwidth Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 7 gt TRACE SNAP HELP amp edo et i OO ca PH ree heo SETUP Cee ea rere eae O SHIFT PNE A SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV lt a The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure Explanation 3 dB 10 kHz Approximate values 5 10 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Bandwidth soft key to set the jog shuttle target as the bandwidth Display sPosition Coupling Probe 6 Offset wBanduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 172 3 Turn the jog shuttle and set the bandwidth value Display ePosition Coupling Probe 6 Offset Banduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U 80kHz 172 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as necessary to set other channels Note The bandwidth is set for each channel Set the bandwidth on all necessary channels Use this function to remove specific frequency components from the input signal The bandwidth is set for each channel Bandwidth The following frequency bandwidths are available 10 kHz 20 kHz 4
247. e Operation Operates according to the settings in the File menu the Copy menu or the Image Save menu File Name when Action is Set to Save to File or Image Save The file is saved with AutoName under the File menu or the Image Save menu For details see section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium or section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Notes about GO NO GO Determination Determination results number of successes failures are displayed on screen Functions other than START STOP and Abort soft key are inactive during determination When performing GO NO GO determination the trigger mode is automatically set to Single Determination is not possible when acquisition mode is set to Average Note The zone waveform that you created is stored as setting information onto the floppy disk Zip disk PC card or the internal flash memory IM 701610 01E 9 51 9 11 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Output Signal Output Connector Output Timing 9 52 NO GO OUT Signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high H to low L temporarily when a NO GO determination is made GO OUT Signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high H to low L temporarily when a GO determination is made Signal Output Circuit Diagram 5V GO OUT 4 7 KQ NOGO OUT 120 Q The format and pin arrangement of the output connector on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are as fo
248. e channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don t care e Condition Enter Trigger is activated when all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified Status Delay Time 5 ns to 5 s resolution 5 ns Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Bbunebbiyp 2 Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level Z Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note If you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If th
249. e directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Saving Operation 29 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties 30 In the File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select extension or 31 Inthe File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 32 Pressing the Property soft key displays the properties of the selected file 33 Pressing ESC closes the window displaying the properties 11 11 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes g 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading the Waveform Data Set the data type to Binary For the procedures see steps 4 and 5 in the section Saving the Waveform Data 6 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item Data Type ry z rq ra Save Load Unload Utility Waveforn Binary Selecting the Source Medium Directory 7 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 Selecting the File to be Loaded 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading Setup Data with the File 9 Press the With Step soft key to select ON load setup data or OFF do not load setup data FILE a Filter ith Setup Property oad Exec WUF f f OFF DN Binary Loading the File
250. e hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note IM 701610 01E The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 21 Bbunebbiy 2 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Explanation 6 22 This function activates the trigger when all conditions set to multiple trigger sources become true or when all conditions become false Setting the Trigger Source and Trigger Status Set the trigger status of the trigger source from the following three choices H The trigger source level is greater than or equal to the trigger level L The trigger source level is less than or equal to the trigger level X Do not set as a trigger source Selecting the Clock Channel Clock CH Select None if the trigger is not to be activated in sync with the signal e Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 if the trigger is to be activated in sync with the signal e Select the trigger slope from the following f Rising 4 Falling Selecting the Trigger Condition When Activating the Trigger Only on the Status Pattern Select the trigger condition from the following list of choices Enter Trigger is activated when the specified combination pattern is met Exit Trigger is activated when the specified pattern is no longer met CH1 Input_ CH1 H CH2 L l CH3 X CH4 X CH2 input f
251. e is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list f Search by the number of times the waveform passes from below the specified level to above the specified level Search by the number of times the waveform passes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div Count Set the number of times f or is to be met The range is 1 to 1000000 Start Point Set the starting position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div When the Type is Serial Pattern Clock CH Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 that is used as a timing reference in searching the status When None is selected the status is searched at a predetermined interval Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Math1 and Math2 or Math1 for the DL1620 Thr Upper Set the level used to determine Low L Thr Lower Set the level used to determine High H Pattern Four different types of patterns can be registered Set the pattern with 64 bits of H L X Don t Care symbols H When the value is greater than or equal to Thr Lower L When the value is less than or equal to Thr Upper X Do not determine Start Point Set the start position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2
252. e mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active App 10 IM 701610 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 Mwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample _ Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words tom 2k 1m tom sk 10M 100s 10k 10M 10k 10M 10k 10M 10k 10M tom 20k__ 10M tom 50k__ 10M tom 100k _ 10M tom 200k _ 10M tom 500k _ 10M tom 1M__ tom tom 2M__ tom tom sM_ 10M 100ms 10M 10M 10M 10M 10M 10M 10M 10M tom 20M_ 10M tom soM_ 10M tom 100M_ 10M 4M 100m_ 4M 2M 100M _ aM iM 100M_ aM 1M 500us 200M 1M 200M 100M 500k 100M 500k 200us 200M 400k 200M 400k 100M 200k 100M 200k 100us 200M 200k 200M 200k 100M 100k 100M 100k 50us 200M 100k 200M 100k 100M 50k 200M 100k 20us 200M 40k 500M 100k 100M 20k 500M 100k 10us 200M 20k G 100k 100M 10k 100k 5us 200M 10k G 100k 100M 5k G 2 d o D 2 100k 2k 100k tk 100k 500ns 200M 1 500 20G 100k 50G 1
253. e status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated IM 701610 01E 6 19 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 9 gt Relevant Keys a mse leonoso SEA TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a fe Count gHold Off et Pattern Levely us A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the Pattern soft key NHANCED_ A gt BCN J A Delay Bf Pattern Width OR Ty Hold Off uS 0 08 Setting the Status and Condition 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 Clock CH ci OFJ cH2 COX c3 OJ c4 COX Condition ENHANCED Type Pattern Coupling 6 20 IM 701610 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED When Activating the Trigger Only on the Status Pattern 2 6 7 10 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Pressing SELECT displays the clock channel setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select None CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Condition Type a Set Pattern Levely Pattern Coupling Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on
254. e than one keyboard printer or mouse at one time Even if you continuously depress a key the character will not be input repeatedly Entering File Names Comments etc When the soft keyboard is displayed on the screen you can enter the file name comment and so on using a USB keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type For details see Appendix 5 Executing Functions Corresponding to the Keys on the Front Panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L The functions corresponding to the keys on the front panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are assigned to the keys on the USB keyboard By pressing the keys on the keyboard you can operate the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L in a similar fashion The assignment of functions varies depending on the keyboard type For details see Appendix 5 IM 701610 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering Numerical Values Using a USB Keyboard Numerical values for menu items preceded by the 8 or f symbol can be input directly using a USB keyboard Display Press the corresponding soft key enter the values with the USB keyboard then press the Enter key The entered values are displayed in the upper part of the screen Inputting a Units Prefix If unit prefixes are displayed such as m for Offset in the example above you can input the character for the prefix as well as the numerical value using the USB keyboard Prefixes can
255. e the upper and lower limits OUT When the value is outside the upper or lower limits IM 701610 01E 9 45 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 9 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Logic AND Executes the Action when all parameter conditions 1 to 4 types are met OR Executes the Action when any one of the parameter conditions 1 to 4 types is met Action to Take when the Condition is Met not Met Action Buzzer Sounds the buzzer Save to File Saves the waveform data to the storage medium FD Zip disk or PC card specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB Net Print Ethernet interface option specified by Copy to in the Copy setting menu Image Save Saves the screen image data to the output destination FD Zip disk or PC card that you specified in the Image Save menu Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Number of Actions Sequence Single Executes the Action once and terminates Continue Repeats the execution of the Action up to the number of acquisition count specified in ACQ Count until the acquisition is stopped if infinite is specified Number of Waveform Acquisitions ACQ Count Set the number of waveform acquisitions Infinite Continues until the waveform acquisition is stopped with START STOP 1 to 65536 Sto
256. e to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO You can save a screen image to a network drive via Ethernet just as you would to a floppy disk drive or Zip drive Entering Settings for a Network Drive IM 701610 01E FTP Server Input the IP address of the FTP server the PC or workstation running the FTP server on the network to which screen image data will be saved On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Login Name Enter a login name of 15 characters or less The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Password Enter a password corresponding to the login name using 15 characters or less The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Time Out When accessing the FTP server from this instrument if can t receive even after a fixed time the timeout time elapses this means that the instrument is unable to send to or receive from the FTP server and the connection will close The available setting range is 0 to 3600 s The default setting is 15 s 13 13 uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer LPR Client Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 30 gt Relevant Keys oe SNAP HELP OCT TI Lt LL NY oo CFE msc Jonoad marn XY ENC SE ACQ START STOP Corr ijuae sao
257. eTime Specify the time to start transmitting the e mail messages Set the time in units of hour minute second in the following range 0 0 0to 23 59 59 Interval The allowable mail transmission intervals are as follows Off 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H When OFF is selected transmission at specified intervals is not possible Sending a Test Mail Sends a test mail to the address specified by Mail Address Data Sent from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L The following four items are sent Acquisition status Start Stop trigger status acquisition counter Error log information Error number and up to 16 lines of the English error message text GO NO GO success fail information Time of GO NO GO determination only see sections 9 9 and 9 10 Results of waveform parameter measurement Automatic measurement of waveform parameters see sections 9 2 and 9 4 and the time of GO NO GO determination by waveform parameters only see section 9 9 13 17 uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Sample Transmission Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 162 GO NOGO Status Success 140 Fail 21 Max C1 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us gt ErrNo 004 Completed GO NO GO ErrNo 886 GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key ErrNo 004 Completed GO NO GO ErrNo 886 GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key Stop lt r 13 7 Usi
258. eat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters 4 ENT onthe keyboard and press SELECT The character string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears The ENT soft key can be used to confirm the string and hide the keyboard At this point the confirmed string is temporarily stored If RESET is pressed before confirming the character string the entire string is cleared 2000 10 24 17 02 17 ix Norma ain Stopped Ansftiv CH1 10 1 5 06 U diy DC Full 50 0 U diyv DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 8 0 V Symbol indicating the memory storing the string When string AA is confirmed first When string BB is confirmed next When string CC is confirmed next 0 Stores AA Stores BB Stores CC Confirms the displayed characters CAPS an uppercase letter INSERT CAPS a lowercase letter Recall the temporary stored character string See Recall below Switches between insert and overwrite modes Deletes the character before the cursor Toggles uppercase and lowercase character Moves down the cursor Moves up the cursor Operation to Temporarily Store Character Strings The strings that are previously confirmed are sequentially sent to the subsequent memories When the number of confirmed strings exceeds eight the strings are deleted in order starting from the oldest string The 9 0 9 7 symbols are not displayed on the screen 1 Move
259. ecute the statistical processing Press the key again to stop the statistical processing Mode a a a Item Delay Shou Measure History Setup Setup Result Exec tatistics MEASURE f l Range1 3 000di4 Next ST Rangez 1 2 3 000di 10 Press the Show Result soft key to list the automatic measurement results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll it vertically Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values of each parameter From the left side of the displayed parameter is Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 Press SELECT to list the history waveform indicated by the cursor You can change the order to ascending FWD or descending REV with the Sort soft key 2060 10 31 12 04 06 1ok Normal S Measure Parameter List P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 HOG001 8 2 18750U 4 1 68333U 1 10417U 4 41940my HOQGO2 8 2 18750U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 39857mV 60603 2 18756U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 41246nY 60004 8 2 18750U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 54091m HO0005 2 18750U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 36733m HO0006 2 18750V 1 08333 1 10417U 4 55132m 00007 2 18750V 1 08333V 1 10417V 4 45065my 00008 2 18750U 1 08333 1 10417U 4 65200mV 00009 2 18750V 1 08333V 1 10417U 4 28401mUV 00010 2 18750U 1 08333V 1 10417U 4 65547my i 2 18750V 1 08333V 1 10417U 4 34650my Minimum Value of P P CH1 2
260. ed 1 Vp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Can be set in 1 increments of record length Oto4s 80 ns to 10s Rise Fall Rise Fall with edge trigger IM 701610 01E Item Trigger Type 16 2 Trigger Section Specifications Edge A B N A Delay B Activate the trigger on the edge of a single trigger source Trigger occurs nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Count 1 to 108 Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Trigger occurs first time condition B becomes true after specified delay following condition A true Delay 5nsto5s Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Both OR Trigger occurs on the OR of trigger conditions that are specified on multiple Pattern Pulse Width TV trigger sources The trigger condition can either be edge or window Rise IN Fall OUT or Don t Care can be specified on each channel from CH1 to CH4 Trigger occurs on the edge of the clock channel based on the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigger sources If the clock channel is set to Don t Care then the trigger occurs only on the True or False condition Enter or Exit of the parallel pattern The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel Trigger occurs on the width of the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigg
261. ed Relevant Keys PHASE SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME sDIV a crs o Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog ACTION DELAY box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Selecting the Medium to be Formatted 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Utility FILE Function a et Resetj All Set Property Attr Delete Delete Exec 4 Pressing the Format soft key displays a list of media in the file list dialog box Net Drive cannot be formatted Delete Copy Renane Format FILE Delete Exec IM 701610 01E 11 5 WINIPs y BHe10 S By Wo pue o eeg Hulpeo pue Bulnes Ey 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the medium to be formatted If a floppy disk Zip disk or PC card is inserted in the drive FD ZIP or PC_Card is displayed along with Flash_Mem File List File Name Size Flash_Men 2697152 593920 PC_Card 10467936 6578176 TU CH1 Auto Utility FILE Selecting the FD Format 6 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu Go to step 9 Selecting the Format Type for the Zip Disk 6 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu Function Ja a ormat Type edia Info Format Format orm e Setting the PC Card Partitions 6 Press the Format soft key to dis
262. eeeeeeseeeeees 16 8 Index 3 Index Power Cordos onnon eiaa eave E E iii iv 3 5 POWer SPECT rodaira N 9 36 Power Spectrum Display cccccssseeeeceeeceeeeseeeeeseesseeeees 1 25 POWER SWIIGCM sser 3 7 Precautions During Use cece eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 PROS Oli tress canerccsteca irenncansanectancaeies O 1 33 Preset RUINGHIOM gies vaseueondeacsOebiened utd ohne E E 5 8 PRESET KEY cu warare Maetanenedtuhaateainniencadere 2 3 PREVIEW corcra aia Moadateaee eae 10 5 Printer FOmalncprtar n a 13 15 Printer Name oa a NEA 13 15 Printer BOINGHA M eiis aS 10 1 PINCH TESTE ktesancee aa a aldactone 15 10 PRN KBD Terminal cc cccccsececceseeceeseeseseecseeeessesesaeeees 10 8 PrODO passcca ie E E ues uaubieustuvducal S 3 10 Probe Attenuation ccccccccceccesseeseseeeeeeeueneees 1 7 5 6 6 12 Protective Grounding cccceeseeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaees Vil Proximal omon anaa a teas 9 15 9 30 Pulse Interpolation scccnvatncisee weedeat 1 18 Pulse Wiot sensin dueninerainasdesian 8 28 Pulse Width Search c ccc ccccecce ese eeseeeeueeeeeeueeenes 1 28 8 24 Pulse Width TIOO SP scecosccssecceecccs dense iniaa aiai 1 9 R Real Time Sampling Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 1 4 Rear Fanaleria ara A N 2 1 RECADO eee ee 1 32 4 15 Recommended Replacement Parts ccccceeeeeeeeeees 15 13 Record Length 22 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
263. eeeees 1 11 Normal Statistical Processing cccseseeeeeeeeeeees 1 22 9 24 INIT G oeei iesaians sab dentunicans tenet anni debonesabasianads 1 10 6 37 S Dene eee gee Ren EE ETATE TETO 5 15 OFNSEL VON Gx sei seine e T N 1 6 5 7 One to One Connection ccccceeeceeeceeeesseeeeeeseenseeeesessees 13 2 Operation KEYS recaia N 2 3 Optional Accessories ccccccseesseeececeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeesasanseens iv Optional Spare Parts ccccccssssseeeececesseeeeecesseeeeeesesseeseees vV ODIONS iett E lil OR TAJGO vaneso inan N O 1 10 6 29 Outputting to a Network Printer ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 30 OVEIVIOW oa eN A A 15 11 P P P COMPIeSSION cesaretine e e RE 11 14 a a S EA A A AE E EEE AE AEA E 6 37 6 38 Parallel Pattern 5 fos aicasssnzcecnsss copeendeadnodededes capecdaunatesadeseedesuans 8 28 Parallel Pattern Search cccccecccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 27 8 22 Password eyes 5 osha ssn nidieevondesthscetasidadeaeteeians 13 10 13 13 13 22 Patern Togar ici cracdeteecsuasvel EE EE 1 9 6 20 ALOT ER A A T T 1 34 16 7 PC Card Drive TeSt aaae e e a Ea A E 15 10 Phase Correction ccccccccceccecssecseesseeseecseeeseeueaneues 3 12 3 13 Phase SiMe arera a cers 1 24 Phase Shifted Display ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeseaneeees 9 42 PP OIAUIEY cavircesidiutc duit a E 6 38 PO SION KEV senses Seas adees case A AREE 2 3 Power Connectors for the Probes ccccccsssee
264. ees 1 4 1 14 7 1 App 1 Repetitive Sampling Mode cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 7 7 RESET Key er 2 5 RGB VIDEO OUT sani socataetereuenaunridecssetainenas 12 5 12 6 16 8 RGB Video Signal Output cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 5 16 8 FROM WIG GG suiran eaa adubacacecssiarvecn EAA 5 19 Roll Mode Display sic vic ccsatdeseatviedesi tienen nan susie 1 4 AS22392 MOM ACE wissidsoss dacs aata oaa r AAEREN 16 9 S Sample Rale caa A AN 1 4 App 1 Sampling Mode ccccccsessseeecceeesseeeeeeeeenseeees 1 4 1 16 5 18 Save to File Action ccccccssssseeeeeeeneeeees 6 40 9 46 9 51 SAVING Setup Datas anscss nsn ar E 11 16 Saving Snapshot Waveforms s ssssssssessseeeererrrrrrrrrreeee 11 21 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement 11 25 11 28 Saving to a Network Drive ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 1 30 Saving Waveform Data ccccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaees 11 9 Scale VAISS was Misi N N E 1 17 SCaliNG nente a 1 24 Scaling Coefficient sis sensed qemiennciceeneeaadias aanses 5 15 Scaling VAG vessaan a aa 8 6 Seem Colora E E N 14 1 SChECIS tercari n S 2 6 Index 4 Goll MCAS tisiet sectaona celina Aa sliece locate min etiad intitoinevahinsened 16 7 Search and ZOOM Function c ccecceese cess esse eeeeees 1 26 8 17 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters 7 15 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone
265. eform display position selected in step 13 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying the Previous Search Results 15 Press the Searched Pattern soft key 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 8 18 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Changing the Zoom Rate and Position 17 As in the zoomed waveform you can change the zoom rate of Z1 and Z2 by pressing the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key and turning the jog shuttle 18 Asin the zoomed waveform you can move the section that is being zoomed by pressing the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key and turning the jog shuttle When Performing a Serial Pattern Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key displays the search method menu SEARCH Type fa 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 2 000di4 No Match 4 Press the Serial Pattern soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto ScrollpSearched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Conditions 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the item or ch
266. elow moons gt 100 ns ae gt 100 ns CHi 4 l CHi l Trigger Trigger When Pulse gt T CH1 H and Time 400 ns When Pulse Time Out CH1 H and Time 400 ns Pulse lt T Setup Example 300 ns Trigger CHi L H L H CH2 L H L H L 300 ns 500 ns A ko k Pulse lt T Condition CH1 H CH2 H Condition True Time 400 ns Conditions of Each Channel When the window trigger turned OFF the conditions same as the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Same as the window trigger when the window is ON IN OUT X For details regarding the window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Pulse Width Pulse lt T 7 5 ns to 10s Pulse gt T 5nsto 10s T1 lt Pulse lt T2 5 ns to 10s T1 lt Pulse lt T2 7 5 ns to 10s Time out 5nsto 10s 6 27 Bbunebbiyp 2 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED 6 28 Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Width Trigger The trigger may not operate properly if the time between two pulses is less than 2 ns or if the pulse width is less than 2 ns The time accuracy of the pulse width in the standard operating condition after calibration is 0 5 of the setting 1 ns When set to T1 lt PLS lt T2 the value of T2 Correlation with the Window Trigger When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated based on the time period during which the parallel pattern of the
267. ement value and Y is the scaled value Note that you can select the dimensional unit for the scaled display Scaling Coefficient A and Offset B IM 701610 01E Range for A B 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Default A 1 0000E 00 B 0 0000E 00 Dimensional Unit Unit identifier alphanumeric string of up to four characters Displaying the Scale Value The linearly scaled values of the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis of each channel can be displayed See section 8 4 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display 5 15 SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 5 11 Selecting the Timebase lt For a description of this function see page 1 3 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP RESET SELECT SETUP oP oe mae ae O SHIFT C HORIZONTAL fv O TRIG D JCD o C V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY OO OEE SB Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Time Base soft key to select Int or Ext Record Mode fe Count Length 10k Nornal Inf inite ON ON Ext Threshold Setting If EXT Clock 3 If you have selected use of an external clock you must now set the threshold level This setting is identical to the trigger level setting see Section 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE for the procedure Note that you must set the trigger source to EXT before setting the level 5 16 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 5 11 Selecting the Timebase Selectable Timebases Timebase can be
268. ent in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Any Covers There are some areas inside the instrument with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit Also when touching the circuit turn off the power to the circuit and check that there is no voltage being generated To prevent electric shock connect the ground terminal of the probe or input connector to the protective ground of the object under measurement TCO IM 701610 01E Vil vill Structure of the Manual Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of 16 chapters an appendix and an index as described below Chapter Title 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Functions Name and Use of Each Part Before Making Measurements Common Operations Vertical and Horizontal Axes Triggering Acquisition and Display Display Waveform Analysis Output of Screen Data Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium Content Introduces the unit s features functions and operating principles Please read this information to familiarize yourself with the unit s capabilities This chapter does not pre
269. equency of waveforms in the data Accumulation Period During Persist Mode When using the persistence mode select the period over which waveforms are accumulated from the list below If you select infinite the accumulation is carried out infinitely The default value is 100 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 50 s and Infinite Grade Width for Color Grade Mode In color grade mode the frequency of data value occurrence is indicated in eight colors as illustrated below The grade width can be set within the range given below The default setting is 16 Overlapping display is performed indefinitely in color grade mode 2 to 2048 steps of 2 Higher Frequency Red 28 or more 896 or more Pink 24 to 27 768 to 895 Orange 20 to 23 640 to 767 Yellow 16 to 19 512 to 639 White 12 to 15 384 to 511 Cyan 8to11 256 to 383 Green 4to7 128 to 255 Blue 1 to3 1 to 127 Black 0 0 When Grade Width 4 When Grade Width 128 For example a dot which has appeared on the screen 100 times is displayed in red if the grade width is 4 or in blue if the grade width is 128 Points for Attention e Automatic measurement of waveform parameters and GO NO GO judgment are performed on the latest waveform When displaying all waveforms in the history memory during accumulation the historical waveforms are displayed using the specified accumulation mode However the waveform display become
270. er Level Precision External Trigger Probe Attenuation Trigger Sensitivity Trigger Position Trigger Delay Setting Range Hold Off Time Range Trigger Slope 16 2 Specifications Auto Auto Level Normal Single Single N CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 EXT LINE CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 DC AC EXT DC Trigger source band limit OFF DC to approx 15 kHz selection CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 Select the trigger hysteresis width CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 EXT CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 EXT CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 EXT 1 1 10 1 CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 EXT 4 div from screen center 2 V for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10 V for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 0 01 div for the DL1640 DL1640L 5 mV for the DL1640 DL1640L 5 mV for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 50 mV for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 1 div 10 of trigger level 50 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1640 DL1640L 50 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 500 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected 1 divp p at DC to 200 MHz 300 mVp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1640 DL1640L 100 mVp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1620 with the 1 V range select
271. er sources The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel or the AND of the window conditions of each channel Pulse gt T Triggers when the width above is greater than T Setting range 0 005 us to 1000000 000 us Pulse lt T Triggers when the width above is less than T Setting range 0 0075 us to 1000000 000 us T1 lt PLS lt T2 Triggers when the width above is greater than T1 and less than T2 Setting range T1 0 005 us to 999999 995 us T2 0 010 us to 1000000 000 us T1 lt PLS lt T2 Triggers when the width above is greater than T1 and T2 Setting range T1 0 0075 us to 999999 995 us T2 0 010 us to 1000000 000 us Time out Triggers when the width above exceeds Time Setting range 0 005 us to 1000000 000 us Time accuracy 0 5 of setting 1 ns Minimum detectable time 2 5 ns typical value Trigger for video signal in NTSC PAL 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF or 1080 60ps format Input channel must be CH1 User can select field no and line no e Conditions A and B are parallel pattern conditions that are set separately to High Low or Don t Care for each channel and for EXT input 1 As measured immediately after calibration under standard operating conditions see section 16 11 with machine warmed up 2 As measured under standard operating conditions see section 16 11 after warmed up 3 When set to T1 lt Pulse lt T2 the value of T2 4
272. erating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Graticule soft key to select one of the three graticule types Graticule Trace Accunu late Label Oy EB DFF ON DFF ON OFF The graticule type can be selected from the following 3 types Explanation g D p D lt 2000 10 25 11 25 43 f jqiok Normal 2 AMS s Ansfliv 7 T T Stopped 4 j 7 Tg Maintiok gt gt jjiok Normal 1MS Insfliv 2000 10 25 11 25 11 if Stopped 95 Edge CH1 F Edge CH1 F Auto Auto 0 0 U Format Format ti Single Single 2000 10 25 11 26 14 J fick Normal 95 IMS s _Ins liv Stopped y lt lt Mainf 10k gt gt Edge CH1 F Auto 0 0 U DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule fae E Trace ccumu late Label Next Single Sine y El A OFF ON DFF ON OFF 172 8 5 IM 701610 01E 8 4 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF lt For a description of this function see page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys amp asl LTE OO N mse eonosco MATH nase Aca cO Cory MAGE SAVE o SHET cat SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED o e2 5 V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY cD Operating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF 2000 11 01 09 53 53 pion _ Norna Stopped 5393 S00kS s 2NS liv CH1 16 1 6 566 U diy DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V
273. ered trademark or trademark of lomega corporation in the Unites States and or other countries e UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders All Rights Reserved Copyright 2002 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701610 01E Revisions 1st Edition 2nd Edition 3rd Edition Ath Edition August 2002 November 2002 February 2003 August 2003 IM 701610 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered if some accessories are missing or if they appear abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Main Body IM 701610 01E Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the side panel match those on your order Whenever you contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument tell the dealer your unit s serial number MODEL SUFFIX NO Made in Japan MODEL SUFFIX SPECIFICATIONS 701605 DL1620 2 channels 701610 DL1640 4 channels 701620 DL1640L 4 channels long record length AC 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC DC 12 VDC for 701610 and 701620 Power Cord D UL CSA standard power cord A10
274. erent frequencies preventing display of the correct waveforms The input capacitance varies depending on the probe used so the variable capacitor trimmer provided on the probe must be adjusted Probe compensation must be performed when the probe is to be used for the first time Moreover the appropriate input capacitance varies according to which channel is used so probe compensation is required when the probe is switched from one channel to another Calibration Signal A probe compensation signal square waveform of the following characteristics is output from the CAL terminal on the front panel Frequency approx 1 kHz Amplitude approx 1 V Waveform Differences Correct Waveform Over Compensated Under Compensated Gain is too High at High Gain is too Low at High Frequency Frequency 3 13 s usWaINSses Huryen 3104 g e 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Relevant Keys EAR NAP SNOr HELP OC ET tt LT NY X Y MENU SMENU PHASE SETUP DISPLAY Copy MAGE SAVE o SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED o ACTION DELAY POSITION 2 V DIV TIME DIV P t Operating Procedure Displaying the System Configuration Menu 1 Press MISC 2 Press the System Cnfg soft key to display the system configuration menu 3 Press the Date Time soft key to display the date and time display setting menu
275. ers for automated measurement are measured in each range a b and c and statistical processing is performed on each automated measurement parameter in the order a b and c Automated measurement parameters of other channels are also measured over each range a b and c Automated measurement can also be performed on the period of each waveform Statistical Processing of Historical Data Performs automated measurement of waveform parameters on the waveform that is acquired using the history memory function and performs statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest waveform Perform Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Section 9 4 You can specify two areas and perform automated measurement of waveform parameters on each area You can also perform computation on the parameters determined in the two areas Statistical processing for each period is not possible 1 23 suonoun 4 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Waveform Math lt Chapter 9 gt Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Section 9 5 Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between CH1 and CH2 with Math1 and CH2 and CH3 for Math2 or CH1 and CH2 with Math1 for the DL1620 The result is displayed as waveform Math1 or Math2 or waveform Math1 on the DL1620 Addition and subtraction are useful for comparing signals to the standard signal checking the signal logic and comparing signal phases Multiplicat
276. erver1 9 9 9 9 DNS Server 9 9 9 4 Domain Suffix1Z___ Domain Suffix MISC P a a a a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 14 Move the cursor to Domain Name by turning the jog shuttle 15 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 16 Input the domain name 17 Move the cursor with the jog shuttle to the DNS Server 1 field and press SELECT to display the setting menu Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard El 18 Set the primary DNS server values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 19 Inthe same manner set the secondary DNS server in the DNS Server 2 field 20 Move the cursor to Domain Suffix1 by turning the jog shuitle 21 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 22 Input the primary domain suffix 23 Inthe same manner set the secondary domain suffix in the domain suffix 2 field Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Turning the Power ON OFF 24 You must restart the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L for the settings to take affect After all the settings are complete turn the power to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L OFF then back ON again The following TCP IP settings must be entered to use the Ethernet commun
277. es IM 701610 01E 11 39 WINIPs y 8BHe10 S 34 Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo pue Hulaes Ey 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory Changing the directory file name of the recording medium excepting Net Drive Turn the jog shuttle to select directory or file 7 Note 9 By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp ps jpg or png extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list 2002 06 24 19 40 45 J 26 Stopped File List Path PC Card File Name Space 5685248 byte Size PC_Card NetWork lt old lt RECYCLED CYCLE0009 CYCLE0008 CYCLE0007 CYCLE0006 CYCLE0005 CYCLE0004 CYCLE0003 CYCLE0002 Flash_Men 38574 38574 38574 38574 38574 38574 38574 2602 06 24 11 29 1999 10 03 10 21 2602 06 24 19 27 2602 06 24 19 26 2002 06 24 19 25 2602 06 24 19 25 2602 06 24 19 21 2602 06 24 19 19 2602 06 24 19 16 2602 06 24 19 69 R W R W R U R W R W RW R W If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle Pressing the File Name soft key displays a
278. essories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Power Cord for AC model one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes DC Power Supply Connector UL CSA Standard VDE Standard BS Standard AS Standard GB Standard for DC model A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD A1064 WD A1105JC Front Panel Protection Probe Case 200 MHz Passive Printer Roll Rubber Feet Cover Clear B9989FA B9918EZ Probe Chart x4 DL1640 DL1640L B9850NX B9989EX x2 DL1640 700960 Ee S User s Manual x1 Operation Guide x1 I2C Bus Analysis Function x1 User s Manual Option Communication Interface User s Manual CD ROM B8050XZ A roll chart will be supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a built in printer Only included with I C bus analysis function models Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available On receiving these optional accessories make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional accessories or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument 700924 Differential Probe Differential Probe Differential Probe Current Probe 701920 700937 700925 O c i 5 D fe oy D GO NO GO Cable
279. esults and the measurement rate DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Web Server Function gt Section 13 12 You can use the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L as a Web server From the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Web page you can transfer files monitor waveform display perform basic DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L key operations and acquire waveform data DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Jo Network Interface Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E You can output waveform data to a PC for analysis using the Ethernet interface or perform waveform measurement by controlling the instrument with an external controller Serial GP IB Option and USB Option Interfaces lt The Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E gt A serial RS 232C interface comes standard with the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L GP IB and USB interfaces are also available as options Through communication functions you can output waveform data to a PC for data analysis or control the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using an external controller to carry out waveform measurements A DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L D Communication Interface C TLEiLitiywZ man gt oo a L 3 QJ QJ amp S005 IM 701610 01E 1 31 suopuny 1 7 Other Useful Functions Connecting a USB Keyboard Option lt Section 4 1 gt You can connect a USB keyboard for entering file names comments and other information In addition the keys on the keyboard are assigned to the keys
280. eueeewdareeas 13 17 IP AGAS Soois racetareniecieatis ON 13 5 J Jog and Shuttle Dials 0 0 0 0 ccccccesseeeseeeeesseesseeeeeeseeeseeees 2 5 JOG SMUT oranana e e aS 2 3 K KOV TSH rona E Seseieacatedteesasssatesanactogveneioeels 15 10 Keyboard and Printer Interface cccccccecessseseeeeeeeeees 16 7 Keyboard Operation ix caissateitnaweunerdeiciasclesmeereduecomeare 4 2 KAODS sista eta a E a a Gace ea errors 2 3 L LING MTErDOlAUNON cvecsasscxscnanheedsaietesdcaidactwccnsssctouscanseseunncdnsas 1 18 MGs IN Os Sis soca scsi ceevencaseuceetinne a usacedeatcsers 6 37 Linear SCALING seerste iana 1 21 5 14 5 15 a E E A E AAA 13 27 13 50 Eist Of DETAUNSscisiosineccdarduoboatacaisaaiseeadmuncdensoumanenraciueds App 19 Loading Setup Data cc cc ccceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeaeteeseeeeeeeeeeeees 11 16 Loading Snapshot Waveforms cceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 22 Loading Waveform Data cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 11 9 LOG EEE A E T TT 13 27 13 47 Logi NaM anien ee prencectnderaeeaeensenetes 13 10 13 13 LOM Level eap E Aa RASE 12 4 LPR Client Function saene 1 30 13 14 13 15 LPR GOVE doriarra nE A A EA 13 15 LPR TIMEOUT 3 2522 serene cscu ceutna tamecscusanctouthetnuscasadesucdecoeeteatas 13 25 M MAG Addres Soroa sua ee ese es 13 23 Mal AGGlES S 2cuisec ida caectades onesie leans feaducate tna teaim cnecseniness 13 17 Mail Functions a n ada 13 16 13 19 Mail SErVET ean E N A 13 17 Mak SetNgE A
281. evious Search Results 22 23 Press the Searched Pattern soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 Changing the Zoom Rate and Position 24 Asin the zoomed waveform you can change the zoom rate of Z1 and Z2 by pressing the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key and turning the jog shuttle 25 As inthe zoomed waveform you can move the section that is being zoomed by pressing the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key and turning the jog shuttle When Performing a Parallel Pattern Search 1 2 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH Type fa 21 Nag 6 Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 2 900di4 No Match Press the Parallel Pattern soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto Scroll gt Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Criteria 9 8 22 Press the Setup soft key to display the search criteria settings dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the setting item When you press SELECT the settings menu for the selected item is displayed or the selected value is changed Clock CH Pattern Level cH1 CH 0 500 UJ_6 3di0_ cuz C X_I 0 000
282. eyboard Enter the mail transmission time Move the cursor to Interval using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to select the mail interval IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Sending a Test Mail Transmission 13 Move the cursor to Mail Test with the jog shuttle then press SELECT to send a test transmission to the specified mail recipient Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings For mail sent by this instrument the sender s address will be the same as the specified recipient address When error history is included in the mail s contents the most recent errors appear at the top Before using this function see section 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings If you set Interval to OFF mail is not transmitted at specified intervals You can transmit DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L status information to a specified e mail address on the network at periodic intervals Mail Settings Mail Server Specify the IP address of the network mail server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Mail Address Enter the address of the mail recipient using 40 characters or less Comment The comment appears on the first line of mails that are sent Comments are optional Use 30 characters or less for the comment MailBas
283. eys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to O V Set the Thr Lower 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine High and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to O V Set the Pattern 14 Press SELECT to select the pattern number A to D 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired bit position 16 Press SELECT to select H L or X If you click Clear Pattern all bits are set to X 17 Set other pattern numbers as necessary Setting the Start Point 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the position to 5 div 19 Press ESC close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the Display Position of the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 20 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Type a Result g 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Window x2 6 006di4y Pattern Exec Serial 22 22 Mag 6 22 Pos No Match Pattern x2 6 600di Executing the Search 21 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display position selected in step 17 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions IM 701610 01E 8 21 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Displaying the Pr
284. f lt Section 6 4 gt The trigger hold off function temporarily stops detection of the next trigger once a trigger has been activated For example when observing a pulse train signal such as a PCM code display of the waveform can be synchronized with repetitive cycles or when using the history memory function you may want to change the repetitive period as shown below Repetitive Period T Trigger Level Input Signal Trigger Ssource Signal Trigger Signal Restricted by Hold Off Time t When Rise is selected as the trigger slope 112 IM 701610 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Delay lt Section 6 2 gt Normally the waveform around the trigger point is displayed However the trigger delay function enables display of a waveform which has been acquired after a specified time called the delay time has elapsed following activation of a trigger The range for the trigger delay setting is O to 4 seconds T Trigger Position Delay Time z Trigger Point Trigger Position lt Section 6 3 gt IM 701610 01E The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory will actually be displayed on the screen The trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger is activated In case the trigger delay to be explained here after is set to Os the trigger point and the trigger position see the same location You use this se
285. f performing automated measurement of waveform parameters Automated measurement of waveform parameters within one period P P through Int2XY statistical processing of waveform parameters and statistical processing on the waveform parameters of historical data P P Max Min Ave Rms Sdev High Low OShot OShot Int1TY Int2TY Int1XY Int2XY Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Burst1 Burst2 Pulse AvgFreq AvgPeriod and Delay between channels Statistical processing results Statistics Min Max Avg Cnt and Sdv Waveform parameter computation Operation between waveform parameters and constants Operators are and Measure waveform parameters in different areas on the same channel a suonesiyioeds 16 5 16 5 Functions Item Computing Functions Phase Shift GO NO GO Function Specifications X power spectrum However select the range for the power spectrum 1 kword or 10 kwords The phase of CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 can be shifted for monitoring Computation is performed using the phase shifted result Judgment is made on the automatically measured value of waveform parameters and the results are output to the printer or to a storage medium buzzer or send a mail 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed Screen Data Output Item Built in Printer Option External Printer Floppy Disk Zip Disk PC Card
286. face Option 13 1 Connecting the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to a Personal Computer Workstation through an Ethernet Interface Option Ethernet Interface Specifications A 100BASE TX port is provided on the rear panel of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Item Specifications Communication Port Number 1 Electrical Mechanical Specifications IEEE 802 3 standards Transmission Method Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T Transmission Rate Max 100 Mbps Communication Protocol TCP IP Supported Services FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission DHCP DNS Connector Type RJ 45 connector LINK LED ACT LED This indicator lights This indicator blinks when the connection when packets are between the normally transmitted and DL1640 DL1640L and received the other device is established and communication becomes possible Items Necessary for Connection Cable Use only the following cables for connection UTP unshielded twisted pair cable category 5 STP shielded twisted pair cable IM 701610 01E 13 1 uodo ddej10 U JOUIEYLA a 13 1 Connecting the DL1640 DL1640L to a Personal Computer Workstation through an Ethernet Interface Option Connection Method When Connecting to a Network PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power to the instrument 2 Connect one side of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX terminal on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or
287. form Z1 Z2 The range of zoom waveform 22 Z1 amp Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z1 amp Z2 Selecting the Compression Format You can select whether to P P compress or Decim compress the waveform data before saving it Power spectrum computation data cannot use P P compression Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Medium Flash _Mem Internal flash memory PC_Card PC card FD Floppy disk ZIP Zip disk NetWork Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option File Name and Comments You must specify a file name Comments can be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and Types of Characters that can be Used Item Number of Characters Characters that Can be Used File name 1 to 16 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with four digit numbers from 0000 to 2399 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of twelve characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the four digit number Specifying the Files to Display in the File list Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display WVF CSV or FLD Displays only the files that have
288. form goes out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position during the waveform acquisition is starting a chopped waveform is displayed as shown in the following figure even if the vertical position is returned to its original position after stopping the acquisition JVV e Ifthe vertical position is moved the effective data range also changes For details see section 1 2 5 3 The data which go out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position are SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 5 4 5 3 Selecting Input Coupling Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 6 gt SNAP HELP amp ellie ae OO ca PH ree heo SETUP Ca ei rere eae O SHIFT VERTICAL SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV lt a The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Coupling soft key to display the menu used to select the coupling Display Position Coupling Probe 6 Offset Je Bandwiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 172 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 5 3 Selecting Input Coupling Input Coupling The following three types of input coupling are available AC Acquires and displays only the AC content of the input signal DC Acquires and
289. g D R24 12 R Real Part I Imaginaly Part Reference OdB for Log Magnitude 1Vrms 1 25 suopuny 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Data Search History Search Function lt Sections 7 7 to 7 8 gt This feature can be used to search waveforms that match the specified conditions from the history memory History Memory Search Using Zone Section 7 7 Searches waveforms that did or did not pass through the specified area from the history memory Waveform that was Saved Using the History Memory Function Specified Area Selected Record No 0 Detects Waveforms that did or did not Pass through the Specified Area Selected Record No 25 History Memory Search Using Waveform Parameters Section 7 8 Searches waveforms that did or did not satisfy the specified condition from the history memory Waveform that was saved using the history memory function Item Setup P P Condition OUT End Rec Start Rec Selected Record No 0 Detects position T Range2 Selected Record No 28 Data Search Search and Zoom Function lt Section 8 10 gt Edge Search Searches the position where the signal went above rising or below falling the specified level the specified number of times from the search start position Displays the waveform expanded around the detected position in the zoom window Start Point of the Dearch Detected Position i Hysteresis t Specified Level I l I l I l I l I l
290. g ON the power The instrument has not been Perform calibration 4 7 calibrated The probe s phase has not been Correct the phase properly 3 5 corrected The probe attenuation is not Set to the correct value 5 4 correct An offset voltage is added Set the offset voltage to zero 5 5 Other causes Perform calibration If the measured 4 7 values are still odd servicing is required Cannot output to the The printer head is damaged or Servicing is required 15 6 internal printer worn out Output from internal printer The printer head is dirty Perform the self test for the internal 15 6 is blurred printer This can eliminate dirty from the printer head Cannot save to the medium The medium has not been Format the medium 11 4 formatted The medium is write protected Remove the write protection from the medium Insufficient space on the medium Delete unnecessary files or use anew 11 10 medium Communication Interface User s The instrument cannot be The address used in the program configured or controlled via is different from the actual address Use the same address in the program and the instrument the communication interface IM 701610 01E The GP IB interface is not being used according to the electrical and mechanical specifications Comply with the specifications Manual IM701610 17E 15 1 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnoIL 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages
291. g menu GO NO GO Mode OFF 3 Press the Zone soft key to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Creating a Determination Zone 4 Press the Edit Menu soft key 5 Press the New soft key to display the zone creation reference waveform selection menu GO NO GO a a New Redraw p Menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the reference waveform to display the zone editing menu CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 O NO GO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 p Menu IM 701610 01E 9 47 SISAJEUY WUIOJOARM e 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Editing All Zones 7 When Edit is set to something other than Whole press the Edit and select Whole GO NO GO Edit Upper fs Left Store as a div 0 0 div Store Quit amp Whole Part ff Lower f6 Right zone1 Exec TopMenu 6 60di v 60di v 8 Press the Upper Lower or Left Right soft keys to select the zone setting direction 9 Turn the jog shuttle to create a zone 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to edit the zones 11 Press the Store as soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 12 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location Zone Zone6 or Zonet Zones for the DL1620 to select it Quit amp TopMenu 13 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone Proceed to step 14 to edit a partial zone or skip to step 22 to quit GO NO GO Edit Upper Left Store as 6 66di
292. g TT m Eh ji az Saws inp Pe 3 Hard Copy EA 0 aad u Dra ol fection kaz E See to File E Hard Copy J aye Sa i Bem Rall Hail Count C IF imge Gave D Send Hail Hail Coma C PEF a mil pea f IM 701610 01E 8 11 8 8 X Y Waveform Display Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 19 gt NAP SNAP HELP So T TT LL INe66 Cor HORIZONTAL SEARCH oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY Operating Procedure 8 12 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press DISPLAY Selecting the Display Format 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the mode selection menu X Y Mode T Y 4 Press the T Y X Y or T Y amp X Y soft key to set the mode X Y T Y xX Y T Y amp X Y Continue with steps 5 12 below if you selected X Y or T Y amp X Y 5 Press the Select soft key to select the X Y waveform that you want to set DL1640 DL1640L only Setting the X and Y Axes 6 Pressing the Source soft key displays the channel menu 7 Press the soft keys corresponding to the channels that you want to assign to the X and Y axes If you select None X Y waveforms are not displayed X Y 6T Range 5 600diy 6T Rangez 5 000diu Setting the Display Range 8 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the display T Range1 9 In a s
293. g on the displayed record length Maximum zoom rate displayed record length 50 or 40 Note that the displayed record length is not necessarily the same as the record length of the acquisition memory For details regarding the displayed record length see Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length You can change the zoom rate for Z1 and Z2 zoomed waveforms of two locations Zoom Position Z1 Position and Z2 Position The zoom position can be set by specifying the center position in the range 5 to 5 div from the center of the waveform display frame The resolution is as follows Zoom position resolution T div x 10 displayed record length The zoom box enclosed by solid lines is Z1 and the one enclosed by dashed lines is Z2 Since each box is independent you can set the position separately IM 701610 01E 8 15 8 9 Zooming the Waveform Changing the Range of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Fit Meas Rng to Z1 Fit Meas Rng to Z2 Sets the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 This is valid even if the automated measurement of waveform parameters is turned OFF Changing the Range of the X Y Waveform Display Fit X Y Rng to Z1 Fit X Y Rng to Z2 The X Y waveform display range can be fitted to match the Z1 or Z2 zoom range This setting is effective even when X Y Mode is T Y Zooming the Power Spectrum It is not pos
294. g the Offset Value Set to 0 V 4 Press RESET to set the offset value to O V The offset voltage setting applies to all input couplings AC DC and GND couplings Offset Voltage Setting Range Sensitivity Range Probe 1 1 Offset Voltage Setting Range 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 0Vto1 0V 0 1 V div to 0 5 V div 10 0 V to 10 0 V 1 V div to 5 V div 100 0 V to 100 0 V 10 V div 50 V to 50 V The setting resolution is 0 01 div If the voltage scale is 2 mV div for example the setting resolution will be 0 02 mV Resetting the Offset Voltage You can return the offset to OV by pressing RESET Important Points e Setting the offset voltage while acquisition is stopped will change the display position only The newly set offset voltage will come into effect when acquisition is restarted e You can select whether or not the offset voltage is reflected in the results of cursor measurements automatic measurements or math computations If you change the probe attenuation the offset changes proportionally to reflect the new attenuation rate Changing the voltage sensitivity does usually not affect the offset value Only if the change would cause the offset to go out of range the offset moves to the nearest range limit If you then return to the original sensitivity the offset returns to its original setting as well provided that you have not explicitly changed the value in the meantime 5 7 S XY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110
295. ger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the Window 8 Press the Window soft key to select either ON or OFF If OFF is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel edge If ON is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel s window conditions ENHANCED Type a a Window figHold Off et Pattern Levely uS OR Coupling OFF DN 0 08 Setting the Hold Off 9 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 30 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED This function activates a trigger on the OR of each channel s edge trigger Setting the Edge Trigger of Each Channel Select from the following f Rising 4 Falling Dont care Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source
296. h the top menu point to the item that you wish to select and click the item Top menu Right click to display the top menu 2002 07 05 18 53 37 J tok Eny Stopped 695 p ZM3 iv en TRIGGER SIMPLE CHANNEL ENHANCED PRESET MODE Pointer DISPLAY POSITION ZO00M ACTION x DELAY Submenu SS Items that have HATH lower layers PHASE ii 7 7 are displayed as SEARCH submenus GO NO GO MISC SETUP FILE COPY MENU l Edge CH1 F IMAGE MENU Auto START STUP 8 62 SNAPSHOT COPY CHI gt Display Position CLEAR TRACE B UF Fset Banduidt MANUAL TRIG Next ON 0 O0div 9 00 uf Full 1 2 IMAGE SAVE 4 The setup menu appears T Type Polarity Is Level Line rane Ship 1080 25p Neg Pos 1 0div 2 4 Note e The following keys do not appear on the top menu ESC RESET SELECT HELP and arrow keys e The top menu also displays characters that are indicated in purple on the front panel e The TRIGGER submenu contains the following TRIGGER group keys MODE SIMPLE ENHANCED POSITION ACTION and DELAY e There is no MANUAL TRIGGER key on the front panel e To display the COPY menu or the IMAGE SAVE menu select COPY MENU or IMAGE MENU To execute the COPY or IMAGE SAVE operation select COPY or IMAGE SAVE 4 7 suoieiadQ uowwoy gt 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings 4 8 Format ACCUMU Late Va lue Label Singley f HE x ON ON OFF
297. h to 20 21 22 take the FFT Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 k or 10 k and press SELECT Mi Setup Operation Source Scale Center Unit FFT Points FFT Window FFT Range Sensitivity CH1 puto _Manua tJ Z 0000E 01 Mi Displayahi Setup f M1 Label DFF DN C1 C2 Mathi MATH Z Display janz Setup MZ Label ON C3 C4 Mathz Selecting the Time Window Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Window Pressing SELECT displays the time window menu 25 Turn the jog shuttle to select Rect Hanning or FlatTop and press SELECT 23 24 Operation Source Scale Center Unit FFT Points FFT Window FFT Range Mi DisplayaHi Setup f M1 Label OFF DN C1 C2 Mathi Setting the FFT Range 26 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Range Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to select the calculation range 28 Turn the jog shuttle to select Main Zoom1 or Zoom2 and press SELECT 27 Entering Labels Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels 29 9 38 Sensitivity C M em _ Lro CH1 puto Manual 2 O666E 61 select Rect Flat Top 2000 10 31 13 56 13 Bei Normal 621 7 Stopped 5060kS s ZMsAiv lt lt Main 10k gt gt l m la J m MI DisplayaMi Set
298. he Manual sesse E tae soadeandtenies viii Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 BOCK DIAG I AN snis Gectetet a E wanuecw nin war E waren eee eiaaee 1 1 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes ccccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeessaeaaaeeeeessaaaaeeeees 1 3 SOUL 5 TRIOS Eria tat eee Mere T E tex eaa chee A 1 8 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions cccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaeeeeeens 1 14 Analyzing the Waveform ss cesxess cc tenadidandabastederaesei ceakiuscethacbidentatadsadediacesanaaienieabeanidestacsaaeies 1 21 COMMMUNNCATONS aux Sdaretiaatectaaescaccen ne Maite a renaa its Reet A 1 30 other Usedl FUNCIONS senean a 1 32 Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 2 2 2 3 Front Panel Mear Panel idani aaa a a ar a aT OTLA 2 1 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs cccccccccssseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeecesaueeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeesaageeeeeesaeas 2 3 DCIOCN SiGe aaa tie a a n Sant nec wee CODE 2 6 Chapter 3 Before Making Measurements 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Precautions DURING WSC zeroren en a a N E a AE 3 1 NASA ATION ai a a NE E N N 3 3 Connecting Ihe POWen GOI uaea a a a a 3 5 COMMECHIAG A PrOD insaat a N eo aveseaantas 3 9 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction ccccssececccseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeess 3 12 Setting tHe Date ame TIME snieni nan iene ate atentiscaeei ate 3 14 Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4
299. he DL1620 Back Background color of the waveform display area Others Snap Snapshot waveform Snap1 to 4 Loaded snapshot waveforms Grid Grid Cursor Cursor Marker Marker Brightness You can set the brightness for the following items from 1 to 15 steps Menu Menu screen Waveform Waveform Snap Snapshot waveform Grid Grid Cursor Cursor 14 3 SUOI E19dO 19410 z 14 2 Changing the Message Language and Click Sound Relevant Keys NAP OO anal MO LLELI Lo Sas cE TA Jono co MATH Reser eect wise aco cai 400 samrsron stanrisroP PHASE SETUP ET SPLAN COPY MAGE SAE T cae O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY o s Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the System Cnfg soft key displays the system configuration menu MISC a a a a alibrationRemote Cnt USB Network Bystem Cnf me Next 1 2 Selecting the Message Language 3 Press the Message soft key to select ENG or JPN Message Click Sounda Offset Date Time Cancel ENG OFF Pn ON Setting the Click Sound 3 Press the Click Sound soft key to select ON or OFF o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED Message lick Sound Offset Date Time Cancel ENG OFF pN ON Explanation Selecting the Message Language A message appears when an error occurs You can set whether to display these messages in English or Japanese The message codes are the same for both languages For messages see
300. he Parameter soft key to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Setting Param1 4 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the determination criteria menu GO NO GO Mode a la T Range1 Setup 5 000di Exec Parameter ST Range2 5 600di Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode under Param1 Parani Paran2 Paran3 Paran4 Mode DFF __ON__ J DFF __ON__ DFrF __ON__ DFF ___ON Trace CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 Iten Maxi ns vg upper CR O KT Lover XXX XXX XXX XXX Condition DUN __IN__ pUT __IN__ pUT __IN__ pUT __IN Logic M OR Settings for the following items can Sequence Single __ Continue be input directly using a USB ACQ Count i keyboard Action o Buzzer 0 Save to File o Hard Copy 0 Image Save 0 Send Mail Mail Count LGO NO GO faT Rangei 5 000di Exec ST Rangez 5 000di Mode Parameter 9 43 s s jeuy WUIOJOARM e 9 9 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 44 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF If OFF is selected Param1 will be excluded from the determination criteria Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace Pressing SELECT displays the channel menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel and press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Mode Trace Item Up
301. he Record Length soft key to display the record length setting menu ACQ Record Mode fe Count ireso ModeRepetitive J Time Base Length 10k Nornal Inf inite ON PFF ON f Int 3 Press the soft key of the record length that you want to set Explanation The record length sets the amount of data to be written into the acquisition memory Available length settings are as follows DL1620 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 8 Mwords in high resolution DI1640 mode 4 Mwords DL1640L 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 4 Mwords 10 Mwords 32 Mwords in high resolution mode 16 Mwords Setting Precautions The sampling rate and displayed record length vary according to the T div setting For details see Appendix 1 If the record length was modified because of the T div setting the number of history waveforms that can be saved according to the record length When the record length is set to 1 Mword with the DL1640L 4 Mwords the number of history waveforms that can be saved depends on the record length modified by the T div setting When the record length is set to any length except 1 Mword with the DL1640L 4 Mwords the number of history waveforms that can be saved depends on that record length The maximum record length for the high resolution mode is half the record length indicated above IM 701610 01E 7 1 Aejdsig pue uolnisinboy 7 2 7 2 Acquisition Mode Relevant Keys Operating Procedure lt For
302. he Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Max Maximum Y axis value of Cursor1 or Cursor2 Min Minimum Y axis value of Cursor1 or Cursor2 Avg Average Y axis value of Cursor 1 or Cursor2 Sdv Standard Y axis deviation of Cursor1 or Cursor2 Cnt Amount of data used in statistical computation for Cursor1 or Cursor2 The Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 are displayed in a list The maximum Y axis value difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 is indicated by an arrow pointing upward and the minimum Y axis value difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 is indicated by an arrow pointing downward 9 10 IM 701610 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors Cursor types and Measurement Items Type When Displaying the X Y Waveform H Horizontal Cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 V Vertical cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor When measuring the logic waveform with the V Coursor select a binary or 16 base measurement value Also choose the order of the data x1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 Marker Cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values T The time difference from the trigger point at the cursor X The X axis value at Cursor We The Y axis
303. he log item to be displayed from the following Error log of errors that occurred on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Go Nogo log of GO NO GO determinations For the setup procedure of the GO NO GO determination see sections 9 9 and 9 10 Action Trigger log of action on trigger events For the setup procedure of action on trigger events see section 6 15 Updating the Log Update Click Update to display the selected log If the selected type of log is the same as that of the log being displayed the log is updated 13 47 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Log Display Example The following figure shows an example of GO NO GO determination log Displays Executing while GO NO GO determination or action on trigger is in progress Time Factor Action 3 2002 07 29 14 34 31 30 trigger Buzzer o A 2PO OD0E TIF A 2 2002 07 29 14 34 23 483 trigger Buzzer File 2PO O009WVF A 2PO OD05TIF A 1 2002 07 29 14 34 14 18 trigger Buzzer File o A o A f l If screen image data or waveform data files are saved in the GO NO GO determination or action on trigger the files can be saved on the computer from the log display Drives are displayed as follows in the GO NO GO determination log RDO Internal flash memory CAO PC card FDO Floppy disk ZPO ZIP disk NDO Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed Note e When the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is printi
304. he trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops This mode is used when acquiring a waveform using the sequential store function If the repetitive mode turn ON this mode is automatically changed to single mode Note The trigger mode setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 2 IM 701610 01E 6 2 Setting the Trigger Delay lt For a description of this function see page 1 13 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press POSITION 3 Units ms us ns and ps are displayed on the screen Press the soft key corresponding to the desired unit Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger delay You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing RESET resets delay to 0 s Bbunabbiuy 2 You can set the trigger delay by pressing the Delay soft key and turning the jog shuttle Explanation Although the display usually shows the waveform before and after the trigger point using the delay function it is possible to display the acquired waveform after a fixed time period elapses Setting Range for Trigger Delay 0 to 4 s Resolution is 1 sample rate T Trigger Position Delay Time Trigger Point Points for Attention When T div is changed the trigger delay remains unchanged However its position in relation to the
305. her Web server functions cannot be used When using the storage function of the FTP server function on the Web browser data capture function or the log display on a computer other computers cannot use the Web server function The Web server function uses communicates through the Ethernet interface If the Ethernet interface is configured to control the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using a communication command refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E the Ethernet interface cannot be used simultaneously e When the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is printing or operating on files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function the Web server function cannot be used 13 29 uodo d9ej10 U JOUIEYLA a 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Preparations for Using the Web Server Function Connecting the Computer and the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the Network Connect the computer and the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the network For the connection procedure see section 13 1 Preparations on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Setting the Communication Interface to Network 0 TRACE sy O a A A Ao Cesar Creff mse Jporoed mar Reser eeo aca stanrisro rouse 4c0 SETUP aaa Eo re Ai ae eae IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT Ss SJS ea O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED Turn ON the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L After it starts perform the following procedure 1 Press M
306. here are two or more periods of waveform in the measurement range the time axis parameter measurement is performed on the first cycle Every time the waveform is updated the waveform parameters are measured automatically When loading waveform data of the maximum record length automatic measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on calculated waveforms is displayed for the measured results IM 701610 01E 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 24 gt NAP SNAP HELP Citi yt E E Svoo PEN CELE msc conog marn z Gexecr MENU __ MENU X Y i serup pispLay Copy mace SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D D a TIME sDIV ACTION DELAY Operating Procedure Turn ON OFF the display Press MATH Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display M1 IM 701610 01E 1 2 M1 DisplayaM1 Setup M1 Label Math2 is not available on the DL1620 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 4 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source1 Operation Scale Center O 00Q0QE 00 Sensitivity 1 0000E 02 Unit Smoothing W a on Press SELECT to display the operator setting menu Turn the jog dial to select CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 or CH1 CH2 and press SELECT
307. ht Increment V Div Jogshuttle up Increment T Div Select Soft key1 Same as left Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Select Soft key4 Select Soft key5 Select Soft key6 Select Soft key7 Select Soft key2 Same as left Select Soft key3 Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left Select Soft key7 Same as left Same as left Same as left F Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left 4 F7 Same as left Same as left Escape SSS is ee Same as left Same as left Scroll Lock Same as left Same as left Increment V Div Increment V Div Same as left Page Up Same as left Delete Same as left Page Down Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Numbock fo eee START STOP Same as left Same as left Select Soft key1 Same as left C Insert mode Same as left Delete Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Select Soft key6 Select Soft key6 Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Return Enter Same as left CH1 menu Decrement V Div Jogshuttle down Decrement T Div Cursor to the left Cursor to the right 7 Increment V Div Vogshutieup P Increment Div Insert mode DELETE O c Oo mp e _s gt p Q gt mmp m Ez F3 Fa F5 Fe E F8 Fo Fio m F2 Print Sereen
308. huttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the coupling is to be set 17 Press SELECT to select DC or AC Setting the HF Rejection 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the HF rejection HF Rej is to be set 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the Number of Times Condition B is to be Met 20 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Count press the Count soft key ENHANCED a a i Count eHold Off et Pattern Levely uS Coupling 1 0 08 Type A gt BCN 21 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to 1 Setting the Hold Off 22 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note The status setting of conditions A and B applies to all trigger types The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 15 Bbunebbiy 2 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED Explanation This function activates a trigger on the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Setting Conditions A and B e Channel Status Select the status of the channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don t care Condition Select from the following two conditions Enter Trigger is activated when
309. ia la h h li li TCP IF User Mail Het Drive Net Print Others Connect setup Account setup Setup setup Log List Enter the user name If you do not wish to limit access use the anonymous setting If access is to be limited enter a user name of 15 characters or less Move the cursor to Password using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter the password Enter the same password again If the user name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password Move the cursor to Timeout using the jog shuttle then press SELECT Enter the Timeout time using the jog shuttle If the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is not being accessed at the Timeout time the connection to the network will be automatically closed For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings 13 21 uodo d9ej10 U JOUIEYLA a 13 8 Accessing DL1640 DL1640L Drives from a Network Drive FTP Server Function Executing the FTP Client Software 10 Execute the FTP client software from a personal computer or workstation Perform file operations using the username specified in step 6 Displaying the Connection Logging List 11 When you press the Connection Logging List soft key the 25 most recent Note Explanation access times user names and IP addresses are displayed a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 2002 06 24 19
310. ications functions on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address Internet Protocol Address Assign an IP address to the instrument The default setting is 0 0 0 0 A unique IP address must be assigned to each PC on an IP network such as the internet or an intranet The address is a 32 bit value normally expressed with four values 0 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 Obtain an IP address from your network administrator The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP Subnet Mask Specify the mask that is used to determine the network address from the IP address The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Huge TCP IP networks such as the internet are often divided up into smaller networks called subunits The subnet mask is a 32 bit value that specifies whether to use an IP address containing some number of bits that identify the network address The portion other than the network address is the host address that identifies which computer on the network the address belongs to Consult the network administrator for the subnet mask setting value In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP Default Gateway Set the IP address of the gateway default gateway for communicating with machines on different networks The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The default gateway has control functions that han
311. ick the left or right of the value At this point the pointer changes to or If you point to the left and click the current digit moves to the left if you point to the right and click the current digit moves to the right The current digit moves one digit at a time for each click To reset the value to its default right click the desired menu item CURSOR Type Trac Moving the pointer in this area causes the pointer to change Click to move the current digit Right click to reset the value to its default IM 701610 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Selecting Toggle Box Items in the Dialog Box Click the item that you wish to select The item is selected Click the selected item again to deselect it To close the dialog box click anywhere outside the dialog box Iten Setup o P P fo Freq fo AVgFreg Max Period i i l Is 4 Click the item that you wish to select fo Min 2 Aug fo Rma fo Sdew High fo Low 0Shot OShot fo Rise Fall Width Width fo Duty fo Bursti fo Burst2 fo Pulse IntiTy IntzTy Intixy Intzxy All Clear Copy To All Trace Note To close an error dialog box click anywhere outside the error dialog box O O 3 3 O 5 O D D 5 D Selecting a File Directory or Medium Drive in the File List Window e Click a file directory or medium drive name to select it
312. ics uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 43 13 12 Using the Web Server Function 13 44 E 2 Ew 4 5 6 8 9 10 ml 12 13 14 15 16 ea 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Display Example of Measurement Values Trend Graphs and Statistics f 35 Chani AVERAGE Chani MarkerfM2 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 3 333 01 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 0 000E 00 3 333E 01 3 333E 01 List of measurement values Measurement Trend graph Graph1 4 000E 01 3 000E 01 2 000E 01 1 000E 01 0 000E 00 1 7 13 19 235 31 TE TS TC CR E A a a Chanl AVERAGE 37 43 49 55 61 6G 73 79 85 91 9 Current Value 3 333E 01 A Newest measurement value Trend graph Graph2 4 000E 01 Statistics Count 22 Max 3 333E 01 lt Statistics Min 3 333E 01 Average 3 933E 01 Chant Marker M2 2 000E 01 2 000E 01 4 000E 01 Current Value 3 333E 01 al Newest measurement value noooeroo Caa E anmeeneee ene eeeaeres Milz 19 19 25 an ar 49 49 s5 o1 o7 79 70 95 91 o7 Statistics2 C
313. ight If a key is pressed when the backlight is OFF the screen returns to the measurement screen Automatically Turning OFF the Backlight Auto OFF The backlight automatically turns OFF if there is no key operation for the specified time Brightness of the Backlight Brightness You can also change the brightness of the backlight The lifetime of the backlight can be prolonged by dimming the backlight or turning OFF the backlight when it is not necessary 146 IM 701610 01E 14 4 Canceling the Offset Voltage Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP Reser eect ae Gea aca stant sror SETUP EN T Et mae ae O SHIFT C wm A SEARCH O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY oT TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the System Cnfg soft key displays the system configuration menu 3 Press the Offset Cancel soft key to select ON or OFF The default value is OFF Message lick Sound Offset Date Time Cancel ENG OFF pN ON Explanation You can select whether or not the offset voltage that is specified for each channel is reflected in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters OFF Does not reflect the offset voltages in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The vertical position of the display screen corresponds to the offset voltage ON Reflect the offset voltages in the results of c
314. imilar fashion press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the display T Range 2 Setting the Split View DL1640 DL1640L only 10 Press the Split soft key and select ON or OFF to separate the display of the XY1 and XY2 waveforms X Y Mode Select Source Split gl Rangei 5 000diy T Y amp X xY2 X chi forF pN ST Rangez Ch2 5 000diy IM 701610 01E 8 8 X Y Waveform Display Explanation Assigning X Horizontal and Y Vertical Axes Source The channels that can be assigned to the X and Y axes are as follows X Y waveform X axis Y axis XY 1 X CH1 X CH2 Y CH2 a Y CH1 XY2 X CH3 X CH4 DL1640 DL1640L Y CH4 Y CH3 None X Y waveforms are not displayed Number of X Y Waveforms that can be Displayed The number of X Y waveforms that can be displayed is two XY1 XY2 or one XY1 for the DL1620 The display of each X Y waveform can be turned ON OFF Selecting the Display Format Mode You can choose from the following three display formats T Y amp X Y The top window displays normal T Y waveforms The bottom window displays X Y waveforms X Y Displays only X Y waveforms T Y Displays only T Y waveforms Selecting the X Y Waveform Display Range T Range1 T Range2 The X Y display shows the range selected on the T Y waveform You can set the start fine dashed line and end coarse dashed line positions in the range 5 to 5 div from the center of the waveform display frame The start
315. in Steps of 2 in Steps of 2 Exponential averaging cannot be used when trigger mode is single or single N Simple averaging cannot be used with repetitive sampling The maximum record length is 1 Mword 4 Mwords with the DL1640L during simple averaging For more information about the relationship when roll mode or repetitive sampling mode is active or trigger mode is single or single N see Appendix 1 Acquisition Count The available count settings are indicated below If you set the value to Infinite acquisition will continue until you switch it off with START STOP The default count is Infinite You cannot change the acquisition count during measurement The new value is activated when the measurement is stopped If Normal or Envelope mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 1 Infinite If Average mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 2 Infinite 7 3 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 2 Acquisition Mode 7 4 Important Information about the Averaging Mode Averaging mode is useful when working with repetitive waveforms Correct averaging is not possible if the waveform has imperfect triggering since synchronization will be poor and the displayed waveform will be distorted When working with this type of signal set the trigger mode to Normal so that the waveform display is updated only when the trigger occurs See section 6 1 Roll mode display is disabled during averaging If you stop waveform acquisition by pressing START STOP the aver
316. in order of channel number The Math2 window is at the bottom with the Math1 window directly above it User Assign numbers from 0 to 5 to CH1 CH2 Math1 and Math2 The display position varies depending on the assigned numbers DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 4 and Math2 Assignment Example when the Display Format is Set to Dual on oza CH2 BETE Fixed If CH3 OFF Auto If CH3 OFF User The number of points that can be displayed vertically for each channel varies as follows according to the display format However the vertical resolution remains unchanged Single L 383 points Quad H 95 points Dual H 191 points IM 701610 01E 8 2 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method lt For a description of this function see page 1 18 gt Relevant Keys Cons OCLLLL LI L766 O Enma e e pocan He Geo pame ED Reser seuecr MENU __MENU Se aYXCOPY MAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT EARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV A a ACTION DELAY Se Operating Procedure Set the Interpolation Method 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Interpol soft key to display the interpolation method menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine AHE O E ON ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired interpolation method Explanation interpolate Any area along the time axis having less tha
317. ing rate as determined by the time axis settings and the resulting data is written to the acquisition memory The data written in the acquisition memory is then converted to waveform display data by the processing circuit and transferred to the waveform processing circuit by which the data are stored in the display memory Waveforms are displayed on the screen based on the data stored in the display memory IM 701610 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Time Axis lt Sections 5 11 and 5 12 gt IM 701610 01E Selection of the Timebase With the default settings sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal output from the timebase circuit of the instrument see the Block Diagram section 1 1 The sampling timing can be controlled by an external clock signal instead of the clock signal from the timebase circuit An external clock signal can be input to the EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel This external clock function is useful when you are observing a signal whose period varies or when you are observing a waveform by synchronizing it with the clock signal to be measured Setting the Time Axis When using the internal clock set the time axis scale as a time duration per division of the grid The setting range is 2 ns div to 800 s div The time range in which waveform is displayed is time axis setting x 10 as the display range along the horizontal axis is 10 divisions 1 div 500us 1 div 1 ms ALON
318. ing soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed The setting also applies to A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Level Hys Coupling HF Rej cHi 0 0 Ulver cuz 0 0 UL_ x m p oF ca O oov Aa corr cla Type a a fade lay us Set Pattern Level A Delay B Coupling 0 003 Setting the Delay Time 11 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Delay press the Delay soft key The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a ENHANCED Type a a febe lay tus GHold Off et Pattern Levely uS A Delay B Coupling 0 00 0 08 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the delay time You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to 0 005 us Setting the Hold Off 13 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note The status setting of condition A and B applies to all trigger types The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 18 IM 701610 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Explanation This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses Setting Conditions A and B e Channel Status Select the status of th
319. ion Vidiv x 1 100 Mesial Range 0 to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution Vidiv x 1 100 Distal Range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution Vidiv x 1 100 Notes when Making Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters e The measured value will display if the measurement is not possible Ifthe waveform is of small amplitude measurements may not produce correct results e When there are two or more cycles of a waveform in the measurement range the time axis parameter measurement is made on the first cycle e When loading waveform data of the maximum record length automatic measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on calculated waveforms is displayed for the measured results 1 Cycle Mode This mode is used to compute items related to the voltage axis or the area over one cycle after determining the cycle This is suited to items such as Rms and Avg that produce errors depending on the measurement range This does not affect the items related to the time axis or the area of the X Y waveforms Every time the waveform is updated the waveform parameters are measured automatically Note When items IntegiTY Integ1 XY Integ2TY and Integ2XY are measured automatically the completed percentage is displayed IM 701610 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 22 gt
320. ion file list dialog box appear Function a Filter ra et Reset A11 Set f Property Dest Dir Copy SET f File List Utility S Path Flash_Mem Path PC_Card_ Space 442368 byte File Nane__ a Flash_Men Flash_Men PC_Card PC_Card NetWork NetWork lt old lt RECYCLED CYCLEQ9008 x CYCLE9007 CYCLE9006 CYCLEQ605 CYCLE0004 CYCLE0003 CYCLE0002Z CYCLE0001 Function a et Reset jAll Resetj Property Copy Selecting the Destination Medium Directory 12 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading vl Waveform Data Executing the Copy Operation 13 Press the Copy Exec soft key to copy all source files that have an asterisk Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set f Property Copy SET e Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Copy Source Files You can copy all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be copied Selecting the Files One at a Time Place an asterisk to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting All Files at Once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk on every file in
321. ion is suspended the new setting will not become effective until acquisition is resumed and the waveform is updated e Note that cursor time measurements are with respect to the trigger position Changing the trigger position therefore changes the measurement values except during roll mode display e When you change the T div setting the time axis setting is rescaled with respect to the trigger position Bbunebbiyp 2 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time lt For a description of this function see page 1 12 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP ca mse eons SETUP PET T E U IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH aS x3 V DIV TIME DIV Oo aa Operating Procedure During Simple Trigger 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis oHold Off us CH1 0 000 UIF ft ac 0 o jA zx 0 08 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us SIMPLE Source e Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis gHold Off us CH1 0 000 VIF ft AC nim 0 08 During Enhanced Trigger 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key ENHANCED Count ahold ue bet Patter ko A gt BN Coupling 3 Turn the jog sh
322. ion is useful for checking power signals by applying voltage and current signals Addition Subtraction Multiplication Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Scaling of Math1 and Math2 Waveforms Section 9 5 to 9 6 The instrument normally auto scales when displaying the computed waveform but manual scaling can also be selected If you select auto scaling the center value and sensitivity suitable for displaying the waveform is calculated from the voltage axis offset voltage type of computation and other factors of the waveform being computed If you select manual scaling then the center value and sensitivity of the computed waveform display can be set to any desired values Phase Shifted Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Section 9 8 Displays the phase shifted waveforms of CH1 to CH4 or performs a computation using the phase shifted waveforms or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 1 24 IM 701610 01E Power Spectrum Display lt Section 9 6 gt IM 701610 01E FFT Fast Fourier Transform computation can be performed on the input signal to display its power spectrum This is useful when you want to check the frequency distribution of the input signal Power Spectrum Waveform Three time windows are available a Rectangular window a Hanning window and a Flattop window 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform T l
323. is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password Connecting to a Network Drive 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press SELECT to make the connection If the connection was made successfully the icon appears in the upper right of the screen Saving the Screen Image 11 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 12 Press IMAGE SAVE 13 Press the File List soft key to display the File List and select NetWork IMAGE Format color fa a File Name Comment File List TIFF OFF File List Path NetWork space Z147483647 byte lt File Name size Date Attr ih Flash_Men ZIP NetWork J lt Netuork 2002 07 15 11 46 lt Sof tuare 2002 07 09 09 23 lt KAI 2662 06 20 16 69 Utilities 2002 06 25 18 20 lt Docunents 2002 06 20 15 37 lt Desktop 2661 1671 66 66 lt resource frk 2661 68 10 60 66 66726606 x 36574 2002 07712 09 15 66726603 x 38574 2002 07 12 09 13 66726004 x 38574 2002 07 12 09 13 14 For the remaining procedures please see 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data through section 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory aa 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function Note Explanation You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also p
324. ish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace When the target channel is Math1 or Math2 Int1XY and Int2XY are not displayed Press SELECT to select ON 9 19 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 3 Statistical Processing 9 20 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary The setting of other parameters is the same as that of normal automated measurements See section 9 2 Statistical Processing by Period 1 2 Press MEASURE Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 1 2 5 000di Press the Cycle Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing by period MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 000di Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measuring item dialog box and the measurement source channel selection menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next tatistics Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 1 2 5 600di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement source channel to select it CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 0 P P co Freg AYgFreq 0 Max c Period AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTY 0 Avg co Fall Int2TY Rms
325. isitions 26 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of waveform acquisitions and press SELECT Selecting the Action to Take when the Condition is not Met 27 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 28 Press SELECT to turn the action ON or OFF Setting the Determination Range 29 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 30 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the determination range 31 In a similar fashion set the end point of the determination range with T Range2 Executing the GO NO GO Determination 32 Press the Exec soft key to execute the GO NO GO determination GO NO GO Mode a f T Rangei Setup 5 000di Exec Parameter feT Range2 5 600di When the determination terminates the waveform acquisition is automatically stopped To forcibly stop the operation press START STOP or the Abort soft key to stop the acquisition Explanation Waveform Parameters that can be Determined using GO NO GO Operation Item This function is applicable to the all of waveform parameters 27 items in section 9 2 Up to four types of parameters can be determined simultaneously Mode OFF Does not perform GO NO GO determination ON Performs GO NO GO determination Upper and Lower Limits of Parameters Upper Lower The upper and lower limits depends on the parameters They can be set in the range 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Setting the Condition IN When the value is insid
326. isk cannot be Ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given above in Removing the Zip Disk from the Zip Drive carry out the following steps to remove it Insert a pin of approximately 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected Zip Disk Eject Button Hole for Removing th Zip Disk Insert Z Pin 11 2 IM 701610 01E 11 2 Zip Disks CAUTION e Removing the Zip disk while the access indicator is ON may damage the data on the Zip disk e Do not use the Zip drive with the rear panel facing down This may damage the data on the Zip disk Do not turn the power ON or OFF when the Zip drive is installed as this could damage the drive e When turning ON OFF the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L have the Zip disk removed from the drive Immediately after inserting the Zip disk the access indicator lights Do not use the instrument while the access indicator is lit as this may cause a malfunction If you turn OFF the power when a Zip disk is inserted in the drive the disk is ejected General Handling Precautions of Zip Disks IM 701610 01E For the general handling precautions of the Zip drive read the instruction manual that came with the Zip disk WINIPs B6e10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 3 PC Card PC Cards that can be Used The following types of cards can be used Flash ATA cards PC card TYPE Il
327. it Breaker When the circuit breaker activates and the power supply is cut wait 1 minute then push in the Reset button The Reset button returns to its original position If the overload continues the Reset button will not return to its original position CAUTION e When the circuit breaker activates and the power supply is cut this may indicate an abnormality in the internal circuitry If the Reset button does not return to its original position regardless of how many times you repeat the reset procedure contact Yokogawa Engineering Services w ooo 15 6 Recommended Replacement Parts IM 701610 01E The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items such as expendable items items which wear out Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Limited Life Built In Printer Under normal usage 120 rolls of paper part No B9850NX LCD Back Light Approx 25000 hours when used continuously The following parts are wear out parts We recommend you replace them periodically as indicated below Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Cooling Fan 3 years Backup Battery Litium Battery 5 years 15 13 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Huljooyussjqnoi Chapter 16 Specifications 16 1 Input Section Item Number of Input Channels Input Coup
328. itialization Initialization means resetting parameters to their factory setting values For details on factory settings see the Appendix Settings which cannot be Initialized Date and time Communication or ethernet interface related settings Setting parameters on storing and recalling function Setting the message language English or Japanese Internal flash memory Canceling Initialization If you have performed initialization by mistake press the Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings used before the initialization was performed Initializing All Settings Turning the power switch ON while holding down RESET will start initialization This also initializes settings relating to the communication or ethernet interface settings stored to the internal memory using the store recall function and so on If settings are initialized using this method you will not be able to restore the previous settings IM 701610 01E 4 3 Performing Auto Setup Relevant Keys JOC LLLELLE Less MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC GO NO GO MATH Cu asure CURSOR ACE Gea srarsron CD Reser Serec oe A rma A CRO R O TRIG D SmmPLe ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY oT Operating Procedure Performing Auto Setup 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Auto Setup soft key to perform auto setup When auto setup is executed waveform acquisition starts automatically _SETUP__ Initialize Auto Store Undo Setu
329. k 100M 200 500M 1k 200M 200 1G 1k 100M 100 1G 1k 200M 100 2G 1k 2G 1k tons 2ns 50G 1k 50G 1k 50G 50G 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active App 6 IM 701610 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 kwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words NO O i oO O aA x 50s 10k 20 10k 20 20 10k 20s 50 10k 50 10k 50 50 10k 10s 100 10k 100 10k 100 10k 100 10k 5 200 10k 200 10k 200 10k 200 10k 2s 500 10k 500 10k 500 10k 500 10k 1s 1k 10k 1k 10k 1k 10k 1k 10k 500ms 2k 10k 2k 10k 2k 10k 2k 10k 200ms 5k 10k 5k 10k 5k 10k 5k 10k 100ms 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 2ms 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 10k Ims 1M 10k 1M 10k 1M 10k 1M 10k 500us 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 10k 200us 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 2us 200M 4k 500M 10k 100M 2k 500M 10k Tus 200M 2k 1G 10k 100M 1k 1G 10k 500ns 200M
330. k 10M 20k 10M 100k 100k 16M 50k 16M 08 100k 10M___ 50k 10M 16s 200k 200k OOK 16M 100k 16M 10s 200k 200k 100k 10M 100k 10M fat es ae Co 32M 500k 6 4s 500k 5s 500k 3 2s 2s 25M 500k F 200k 200k 10M aM _ 32Mm__ 500k__ 16M__ 500k__ 16M 1 M 20M 1M 20M 500k 10M 500k 10M 1 6s a ae 32M 1M 16M N 16M isp eo 10M 10M 800ms 16M 16M PEGE a 500ms 10M 10M 320ms 10M 16M 200ms 10M a 10M 10M 10M 160ms 20M SaN 20M 16M aT 16M 100ms 2m 20m 20M 10M 16M 16M 10M 10M O 100M 16ms m 16M 100M T T 10M zars 200M ams m fm fam fam fiom fam 200M 200M 1 100M 500k 200M om 200M 400k 100M 200k 100M 200k 200M 200k 200M 200k 100M 100k 100M __ 100k 200M mm 100k 100M 200M __ 100k 200M 200M 100k 100M_ 200M an ee 100M _ 10k 1G 100k 200M 0 100k 100M__ 5k 2G 100k 200M 4k 200M 2k 200M 2k 200M_ 100k 100M__ 1k 2000 T 200M 100k 100M 200ns 400 50G 100k 100M toons soc 200 soc eC 5k 50G 5k 50G ans fee as sa 2s fs ams so k c k 50 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active IM 701610 01E App 12 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform IntegiTY Total Area for Positive Side Only S1 S2 ae Integ2TY Total Area for both Positive and Neg
331. k 2k 1k 20 ms 5k 1k 5k 1k 5k 1k 5k 1k ik jok fik ik 20k 1k tk 50k fik 1 ms 100 k 1k 100 k 1k 100 k 1k 100 k 1k 500 us 200 k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 1k 200 us 500 k 1k 500 k 1k 500 k 1k 500 k 1k 100 us 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 50 us 2M 1k 2M 1k 2M 1k 2M 1k 1 us 100M 1k 100M 1k 100 M 500 ns 200 M 1k 200 M 1k 100 M 500 200 M 1k 200 ns 200 M 400 500 M 1k 100 M 200 500 M 1k 100 ns 200 M 200 1G 1k 100 M 100 1G 1k 50 ns 200M 100 2G 1k 5G ik 20 G 1k 20 G 1k wo ak jao 1k 5 50 G 1k 50 G 1k 50 G 1k 50 G 1k e Q gt x lt 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active IM 701610 01E App 1 Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode Setting kwords When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Standard resolution High resolution Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words a e J E ce C oe jok j 50 1o Sample rate S s Displayed record length words 500s e 200s 100s en 50s 20 20 10k 20 20 10k 20s jso jox s0 50 iok 10s fioo 10k 100 100 j10k 5s 200 10k 200 tox 200 iok 200 10k 2s 500 fiox soo
332. k input appear in section 16 3 This terminal is labeled EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN on the DL1640 DL1640L or EXT on the DL1620 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Output Level TTL Output Logic Negative logic Output Delay Time 50 ns max Output Hold Time 1 us min for low level 100 ns min for high level RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT Item Specifications Connector Type D Sub 15 pin socket Output Type VGA compatible GO NO GO Input Output NO GO OUT GO OUT Item Specifications Connector Type RJ 11 modular jack Input Output Level START IN input TTL 0 5 V switch input possible GO OUT NOGO OUT output CMOS 0 5 V Signal START IN NOGO OUT GO OUT Cable Four wire modular cable Power Connectors for the Probes Option Item Specifications Number of Output 4 Output Voltage 12 V Usable Probe Current probe 700937 and 701930 CH1 OUT Signal Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Output Level 20 mV div 30 50 Q termination Frequency Range DC to 20 MHz 3 dB attenuation point 16 8 IM 701610 01E 16 10 Computer Interface GP IB Option Item Electrical and Mechanical Specifications Interface Functions Protocol Code Mode Address Setting Remote Mode Clear Specifications Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1992 ISO ASCII code Addressable
333. key after pressing the SHIFT key TRQG D Indicator Lights up when a trigger is activated 2 3 Hed y283 JO 9S pue oweN 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs 2 4 Other Menus CLEAR TRACE HISTORY C CEA e e MENU PHASE X Y MENU Er Corfe e la i GD Sl DISPLAY Key Sections 8 1 to 8 8 Displays the screen display menu Press SHIFT DISPLAY to produce the menu for X Y display setup MISC Key Sections 3 6 4 7 Chapters 13 14 15 IM701610 17E Displays the menu for selecting GO NO GO judgment communication interface system configuration settings system status check screensaver setting and the self diagnostic function FILE Key Sections 11 4 to 11 12 Displays the menus that you can use to save load or perform file operations with the internal flash memory floppy disk Zip disk PC card network drive when the Ethernet interface is installed SHIFT COPY Key Sections 10 2 10 3 13 5 Used for printing out hard copy of the screen data If you press SHIFT COPY the screen displays a menu that you can use to print or save the screen image For the save location you can select any of the following internal printer option and USB printer SHIFT IMAGE SAVE Key Sections 10 4 13 4 You can store the screen image to an external storage medium Press the SHIFT key followed by the IMAGE SAVE key to display a menu used to save the screen image data to internal flash memory
334. key displays a menu used to select the width type 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired type from Pulse gt T Pulse lt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 or Time Out ka Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 J Time Out Hold Off 0 08 6 24 IM 701610 01E 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Conditions of Each Channel 6 Press the Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Condition ENHANCED Type idth Type fja a faTimetuS Window Hold Off Set Pattern Levels Width Pulse lt T Coup 1 ing 6 0075 DFF ON 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 8 Press SELECT to select H L X when the Window is ON IN OUT or X 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition 10 Press SELECT to select True or False Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 11 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1620 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Bbunebbiy 2 Level Coup ing Level Hys Coupling HF Rej cH1 0 000 V w e_o cz CH3 6 660 VJ a I DC I OFF CH4 0 000 vI 2E I DC I OFF The Level setting for each channel can be input
335. ks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Login Name Enter a login name of 15 characters or less The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Password Enter a password corresponding to the login name using 15 characters or less The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Time Out When accessing the FTP server from this instrument if can t receive even after a fixed time the timeout time elapses this means that the instrument is unable to send to or receive from the FTP server and the connection will close The available setting range is 0 to 3600 s The default setting is 15 s IM 701610 01E 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E lt For a description of this function see page 1 30 gt NAP SNAP HELP D T mse We MEN X Y AVE d l O TRIG D SEARCH oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV Entering Settings for a Network Drive 1 2 Press MISC Press the Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC a a a alibrationRemote Cnt1 USB Netuork Bystem Cnfgj fvervieu Next 1 2 a a a ia TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Set
336. l One Click One to display a single history data point that is selected by the data number or selected by newest or oldest All Click All to display all history data Updating the Settings Panel Update Click Panel Update to update the control panel settings on the Data Capture window computer to match the latest setting of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Automatically Updating the Screen Image Confirmation Select the Confirmation check box to automatically update the screen image using the same conditions as Color OFF when you change settings above that can change the screen image Clear the check box not to update automatically _ w eel History Histor a Curent Newest Oldest One All W Confirmation Psnel Update Note e You cannot set the history data display when the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is making measurements Setting the history data display when there is no history data results in an error When controlling the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L the timeout time on the computer is 30 s Depending on the condition of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L a timeout may occur preventing you from controlling the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 13 40 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Displaying the Measurement Trend of Waveform Parameters Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network see page 13 30 Click the
337. l Select the assignment method of High and Low from the following two methods e Auto Sets the higher amplitude level to High and lower level to Low within the measurement range based on the voltage level frequency of the waveform by taking the effects of ringing spikes etc into consideration This method is best suited when measuring rectangular waveforms and pulse waveforms e MaxMin Sets the maximum value to High and lowest value to Low in the measurement range This method is best suited when measuring sine waveforms ramp waveforms etc It is not suited for measurement of waveforms with ringing and spikes Setting the Distal Proximal and Mesial Values Distal Prox Select the method of assigning the three levels that are used as references in measurements such as the rise and fall times Percentage Set the distal value mesial value and proximal value using a percentage with respect to an arbitrary trace CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 with High set to 100 and Low set to 0 e Unit Set the distal value mesial value and proximal value of an arbitrary trace CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 to an arbitrary voltage 9 30 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Setting the Measurement Range T Range Set the measurement range of Area1 using T Range1 and T Range2 Set the
338. l Exec soft key to start calibration ase Auto Cal Deskeu Target CH jf Deskew pare Exec Time OFF pN oF pN 00ns IM 701610 01E 4 19 suoieiadQ uowWwoy gt 4 7 Calibration Explanation Calibration The following parameters can be calibrated Perform calibration when highly accurate measurements are required e Ground level offset e A D converter gain e Trigger threshold Time axis for repetitive sampling mode Points for Attention Always allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes after the power is turned ON before starting calibration If calibration is performed immediately after the power is turned ON the calibration may be inaccurate due to drift caused by fluctuation in the temperature of the instrument Calibration must be performed when the temperature of the instrument is stable and is between 5 C and 40 C preferably at 23 C 5 C When performing calibration remove the input signals Otherwise proper calibration may not result Note The above calibration is performed automatically when power is turned ON If the V div knob has been turned perform calibration for all parameters except the time axis for repetitive sampling mode Auto Calibration Auto Cal Calibration is performed automatically after the times shown below elapse after turning ON the power when the T div setting is changed or when waveform acquisition is started After 3 minutes After 10 minutes After 30
339. laelutahetdateemceteee 13 8 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function 0008 13 11 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer LPR Client Function 13 14 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval cccccccccccssseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeenaneeessaessees 13 16 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function ccccccssseeeeceeeeeeeceeseeesseseeeesaaaees 13 19 13 8 Accessing DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Drives from a Network Drive FIPS FUNCION mantia A a a E 13 21 13 9 Viewing the Ethernet Interface Option and MAC Address cccccccseeeeeeneeeeessaeeeees 13 23 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout cccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 24 13 11 Setting the Time Difference from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time 0 sceeeseees 13 26 13 12 Using the Web Server Function cccccccccesseeeeecccessseceeccsceseeneeescccsseeeeessoussenseesees 13 27 IM 701610 01E Contents Chapter 14 Other Operations 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness ccccccsccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseess 14 1 Changing the Message Language and Click Sound cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeees 14 4 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight 0 14 5 Canceling the Offset VONaGe scaisisiccct tanthetas cedez
340. lay IntiTY AvgFreq Int2Ty AvgPer iod Intixy Int2x Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Ope of User1 and press SELECT to select the computation from and Select Set Trace Item and Unit for Area2 in a similar fashion To set constants turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Const1 through Const4 Press SELECT and set the constant using the jog shuttle You can set up to four constants 9 27 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 9 28 14 To set User2 through User4 repeat steps 7 through 13 as necessary Areal reaz Mode Trace Item Ope Trace Iten Unit User1 PFFDR Cont F postr ag E User2 DPFF_DN L_CH1_ Min___ Lenz Min__ L__ user3 DFFDN CO meg E None pogreriow C users DFFTON None IWEIXY 7 onse Cimeaxy C7 Const1i Const2 Const3 Const4 Iten 5 600di MEASURE a fe1 Rangel fT Range3 Dual Area 5 0 i Setup ST Rangez ST Range4 OFF pN 5 000di4 5 000di Setting the Measurement Range 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Press ESC To set the measurement range of Area1 press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key MEASURE Dual Area T Range2 ST Ranges OFF pN Set the measurement start point of Area1 If the jog shuttle action is not set to T Range1 press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the action to T Range1 Turn the jog shuttle to
341. lay Items X Y Display Accumulation Snapshot Trace Clear 16 5 Functions Specifications Select from three graticule types Select display or nondisplay of scale values waveform labels or trigger mark Display two X Y waveform XY1 or XY2 Displays multiple iterations of waveform in either persistence mode or color grade mode Freezes the current waveform on screen Saves or loads the snapshot waveforms Removes the currently displayed waveform Vertical Horizontal Axis Setting Item Channel ON OFF Input Filter Vertical Position Setting Linear Scaling Roll Mode Analysis Item Search and Zoom Function History Search Function Cursor Measurement Function Automatic Measurement of Waveform Parameters Function IM 701610 01E Specifications Independent ON or OFF for each channel Set a 20 MHz 1 28 MHz 640 kHz 320 kHz 160 kHz 80 kHz 40 kHz 20 kHz or 10 kHz band limit ON or OFF independently for each channel Waveforms can be moved vertically in the range 4 div from the center of the waveform display frame Set scaling coefficient offset and unit separately for each channel The roll display mode is enabled when the trigger mode is auto auto level or single and the time axis is as follows Model Record Length T div DL1620 1 kwords 50 ms div to 5 s div DL1640 10 kwords 50 ms div to 50 s div 100 kwords to 1 Mwords 50 ms div to 500 s div 8 Mwords 200 ms div to 800 s div DL16
342. lease note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by the dir command Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than seventeen or more characters Depending on the server the lt gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed e In the following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When Windows NT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list The following are not possible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network e This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server or Web server functions e Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP e When connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect e When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if Network Drive is selected for Sav
343. lect MOS SY PCMOS 3 3U User Exec All 9 Press the V div soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value PRESET Select Type Probe I Y div je Offset aTrig Lvi All User 16 1 56 6 VY 0 0 Y 0 0 V a 11 Press the Offset soft key to select Offset then turn the jog shuttle to set the Offset value PRESET Select Type Probe U7div ji Offset elrig Lvl Exec All User 10 1 50 0 V 0 0 U 0 0 V 12 In a similar fashion set the Trig Lvl You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuitle Executing the Preset 13 Press the Exec soft key to execute the preset PRESET Select Type Probe U7div je Offset lrig Lvi Exec All User 10 1 50 0 V 0 0 U 0 0 V The preset function automatically sets each key setting such as the V div input coupling and trigger level to the optimum value for measurement of 5 V or 3 3 V CMOS signals or to an arbitrary value Also you can automatically set the appropriate values for use with the current probe 700937 701930 sold separately This function allows you to make settings for a selected channel or for all channels at the same time Settings Made by a Preset CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V User Input Coupling DC DC DC Trigger Coupling DC DC DC Probe 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10 A 1 V 700937 or 100 A 1 V 701930 are available Vidiv 2 Vidiv 1 Vidiv Arbitrary Offset Voltag
344. left Cursor to the right Cursor to the right Cursor to the left Cursor to the left Jogshuttle down Select Soft key6 Jogshuttle up Select Soft key6 SETUP menu Select Soft key1 Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left u Same as left Q Same as left START STOP Same as left Scroll Lock Same as left Page Up Delete Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Same as left Same as left V JE amp N si2l j gt l lt t s o o S amp lt Jogshuttle down Same as left Jogshuttle up Same as left x Same as left a a ee ait START STOP ata Seas Return Enter CH2 menu CH3 menu CH4 menu ees 7 DELETE prev char Same as left START STOP Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left Decrement V Div Jogshuttle down Decrement T Div Cursor to the left Cursor to the right Increment V Div Jogshuttle up Increment T Div Insert mode DELETE gt D 5 Q x IM 701610 01E App 23 Index Symbols SK CY S vars alee es cael tel sacs an aon REAA tau seteatannse aves 2 5 MOY ClO MOJE es cnsastscccvils esrar EEE 9 18 TOA KEV OGG iis tainkscencnes ee a E a 4 4 104 Keyboard US ccccccssseeeeeeessessseeeseeeeesseeenensees App 20 TOS KE VD O aU d usien erin a E 4 4 109 Keyb
345. levant Keys eto SNAP HELP JOT Voo C rreg msc ponoco mart Serue iseca Copy mace save o SHE SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o s aa Operating Procedure Entering Settings for a Network Drive 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC a A A a a alibrationRenote Cnt USB Netuork Bystem Cnfgj Overview Next 1 2 a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Connect Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Drive Setup Cc Login Name ANONYMOUS Passuord Ss Tine Outiser The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard i MISC FTP Server a a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Enter the IP address of the FTP server When using DNS you can specify it by name 5 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard 6 Enter a login name of 15 characters or less 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press SELECT to display the keyboard 13 8 IM 701610 01E 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform and Setting Data to and from a Network Drive FTP Client
346. ling Settings Input Connector Input Impedance Voltage Axis Sensitivity Setting Maximum Input Voltage DC Offset Range Max At 1 1 probe attenuation Specifications 4 CH1 to CH4 or 2 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 AC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ GND BNC 1 MQ 1 0 approx 28 pF 1 MQ input 2 mV div to 10 V div 1 2 5 steps 1 MQ input at 1 kHz or less 300 V DC or 300 V RMS CAT I 424 V peak 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 V 100 mV div to 500 mV div 10 V 1 V div to 5 V div 100 V 10 V div 50 V Vertical Voltage Axis Precision DC Precision Offset Axis Precision Frequency Characteristics 3 dB point when sine wave of amplitude 4 div is input 3 dB Point for AC Coupling Used Interchannel Skew with identical settings Residual Noise Interchannel Isolation at identical voltage sensitivity A D Conversion Resolution Probe Attenuation Settings Bandwidth Maximum Sample Rate Maximum Record Length 2 mV div to 5 mV div 10 mV div to 10 V div 2 of 8 div offset voltage precision 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 5 of 8 div offset voltage precision 1 of set value 0 2 mV 1 of set value 2 mV 1 of set value 20 mV 100 mV div to 500 mV div 1 V div to 10 V div 1 MQ input BNC terminal 1 V div to 10 mV div DC to 200 MHz 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 80 MHz 1 MQ input defined at the tip of the probe when using the passive probe 700960 10 V div to 10 mV
347. lling f Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Setting the HF Rejection Set ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source 6 9 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated by small changes in the trigger signal A Approx 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approx 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 10 IM 701610 01E 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP SEA C ACTION DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Pressing the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 000 VIF ft ac on 4 0 08 3 Press the Ext soft key Ch3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 SIMPLE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ext Line Hold
348. llows Format The connector uses a modular jack RJ12 Use the optional accessory 36973 sold separately for the cable If you are using a commercially sold cable 4 contact modular cable for telephone circuits wire te pins according to the following figure Pin Arrangement sheild deal Pin Number Signal Logic 1 NC Unconnected 2 NC Unconnected 3 GO OUT Negative 4 NO GO OUT Negative ae 1 5 GND e2 DL Side Connector NC Unconnected Output Timing EXEC 10 ms or more Acquisition lt gt Acquisition WX lt gt Determination Determination l Result Result NOGO OUT GO OUT Remains Low until the system is ready for the next judgement If an action is specified for when the condition is met the time is prolonged until the action has finished IM 701610 01E 9 11 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Connecting to Another Instrument IM 701610 01E CAUTION e Never apply an external voltage to the NO GO OUT and GO OUT terminals otherwise damage to the instrument may result e When connecting the GO NO GO signal output externally make sure not to connect other signal pins by mistake Errors in connection may cause damage to this instrument or to the other connected instrument e Do not mistakenly insert the USB cable to the GO NO GO output terminal This may cause damage to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L To connect the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to external equipment use the GO
349. lossy showing on top for the following procedure Set the roll paper Insert the edge of the roll paper evenly in the space between the roller and the black guide then rotate the paper feed knob in the direction of the arrow until about 10 cm of the roll sheet is showing from the top of the roller MAN FEED Rotate the Paper os Feed Knob Move the release arm to the FREE position and straighten out the roll sheet Then move the release arm to the HOLD position The printing will fail with an error message if the release arm is in the FREE or MAN FEED position during operation Pull the printer cover back to its original position and close the cover Make sure that the edge of the roll sheet is showing from the opening of the printer cover Push the printer cover down firmly until it clicks into place Note After loading the rool paper the paper feed may be unstable Print out 2 or 3 screen images before using the printer in your work 10 2 IM 701610 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Relevant Keys HELP Soe Se Ce O TRIG D SPE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E Selecting the Printer 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press COPY 3 Pressing the Copy to soft key displays the output medium menu Copy to Infornat ions Comment Built in q ON 4 Press the Built i
350. me and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note e You cannot delete files while data acquisition is in progress Deleted data cannot be recovered Make sure not to erase the wrong files Directories can be deleted if there are no files in them If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error will not be deleted Directory attributes cannot be changed This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the thumbnail function becomes disabled IM 701610 01E 11 11 Copying Files A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D o e2 SIMPLE ENHANCED a cs V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY OILO ICD Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Utility_ Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Copy
351. me exists in the same directory renaming is not allowed If a directory with the same name exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the thumbnail function becomes disabled 7 cr Chapter 12 Trigger Input Trigger Output RGB Video Signal Output 12 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input A CAUTION Never apply signals that do not meet the following specifications as this may damage the instrument due to overvoltage for example External Trigger Input Terminal Input Terminal DL1640 DL1640L Rear Panel EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN lt 40Vpk 1MQ DL1620 Front Panel 1MQ 28PF lt 40Vpk 1MQ This terminal is used when an external signal is used as a trigger source See section 6 2 Specifications Connector Type Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Range Input Impedance Input Range Trigger Sensitivity Trigger Level IM 701610 01E BNC at 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or less DC to 100 MHz approx 1 MQ and 28 pF 2 V for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10V
352. ment uses 8 bit A D converters Incoming signals are sampled at a resolution of 255 levels LSB or 32 levels per division Effective Data Range The instrument uses 8 bit A D converters Assuming that output values range from 0 to 255 the vertical center line of the display corresponds to a value of 127 Because the A D converter reaches full range at 255 screen level 256 is not used Note also that the insturment treats an A D output value of O as if it were a 1 The screen s effective display range extends approximately 5 29 divisions in each direction from the screen s center line However if the vertical axis position is moved while the data acquisition is stopped the effective data range also moves by the same amount Since a total of four input waveforms can be displayed they may overlap each other making observation difficult In this case the waveforms can be moved in the vertical direction so that they can be observed more easily The vertical position mark can be set to any value in the range between 4 div Changing the V div setting the vertical axis setting is rescaled with respect to the vertical position Position 0 div Position 2 div Position 2 div 1 5 suonoun 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Offset Voltage lt Section 5 5 gt When observing a voltage riding on top of a predetermined voltage an offset voltage can be applied
353. minutes After one hour and every hour thereafter If the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is auto calibrated while input takes place it is recommended that you disconnect the input and then repeat calibration Deskew Corrects the CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 delays Deskew Time Setting Range The correction time is set within the following range 100 ns to 100 ns 4 20 IM 701610 01E 4 8 Using the Help Function Relevant Keys 0 tel Graal Ge E O TRIG D sme ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV o m na ACTION DELAY o a Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E Displaying a Help Window 1 Press HELP 2 Press the function key or soft key for which you want help Clearing the Help Window 3 Press HELP again to close the window Displaying a Help Window Pressing HELP displays the soft key menu which was in effect before HELP was pressed or displays a help window which contains information related to jog shuttle menu settings If a key is pressed or the jog shuttle is turned while a help window is displayed the help window relating to the displayed soft key menu or the jog shuttle menu will appear Clearing the Help Window Pressing HELP again while a help window is displayed will clear the help window 4 21 suoieiadQ uowwoy gt Chapter 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Channels ON OFF Relevant Keys TRACE NAT HELP oF LL TTT ace MEASUR
354. mmand input area Displaying the Responses from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Response The responses from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L to the commands queries sent to it using the control script function can be received and displayed Clearing the Responses Clear Response Area Click Clear Response Area to clear all the responses received from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L that are displayed in the response display area Sending Commands Periodically and Displaying Responses The commands in the transmission command input area can be sent periodically If commands queries that require responses from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are sent the responses from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are displayed in the response display area Setting the Transmission Interval Select the command transmission interval from the following 2 s 5s 10 s 30s and 60s Starting Periodic Transmission Start Click Start Stop The indicator becomes in yellow and the command transmission and response display start at the specified transmission interval Stopping Periodic Transmission Stop Click Start Stop while the periodic transmission is in progress The indicator goes OFF and the command transmission and response reception display stop However if the last command before stopping the periodic transmission was a query command the response to that command is displayed in the response display area Note If a wrong command is sent the error message is not automatic
355. mode Searching is not possible when all patterns are set to X e Patterns from undisplayed waveforms will not be referenced during searcles Determination when Using the Edge for the Search When the peak immediately after the rising edge of the waveform is less than or equal to the upper limit of the hysteresis or when the peak immediately after the falling edge is greater than or equal to the lower limit of the hysteresis it is determined as false not counted as a specified edge Determined as False Detected Position The Upper Value of Hysteresis The Lower Value __ of Hysteresis gt Specified Level Start Point of the Search When the Edge is Set to Rising and the Count is Set to 2 Determination when Searching Using a Serial Pattern The points between the Thr Upper and Thr Lower are always determined to be true matches the specified status If such a point is included at the time the pattern is checked a message is displayed as a notification High Thr Upper Thr Lower A B Always Determined as True 8 31 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Search Start Point when Using a Serial Pattern Search The search start point is as follows when Clock CH is set to None On the screen the first rising or falling edge to the right of the specified Start Point becomes the reference The search start point is set to 1 2 the specified interval right of the reference point However if the Star
356. mode Listener and talker addresses 0 to 30 are settable Remote mode can be cleared by pressing the SHIFT key the CLEAR TRACE key except when local lockout has been set For details refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E Serial RS 232 Standard Item Connector Type Electrical Specifications Connection Format Communication Format Synchronizing Format Baud Rate Specifications Half pitch interface cable D Sub 9 pin plug Conforms to EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 Standard for 9 pin Point to point Full duplex Start stop asynchronous transmission 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 For details refer to the Communication Interface User s manual IM701610 17E USB Option ltem Connector Electrical and Mechanical Specifications Speed Number of Ports Supported Systems Ethernet Option Item Communication Port Number Electrical Mechanical Specifications Transmission Method Transmission Rate Communication Protocol Supported Services Connector Type IM 701610 01E Specifications Type B connector receptacle Conforms to USB Rev 1 0 Max 12 Mbps 1 Models with standard USB ports that run Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP A separate device driver is required for connecting to a PC Specifications IEEE 802 3 standards Ethernet 100OBASE TX 10BASE T Max 100 Mbps TCP IP FTP server FTP client network drive L
357. mulate mode menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Quad Sine gt H O GS DFR on ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the corresponding to the desired accumulate mode Format Interpol J Graticule Scale OFF Persist Color Value Quad Sine gt G BY ON Proceed to step 4 if you have selected Persist or to step 5 if you selected Color Setting the Accumulative Time When Persist has been Selected 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired accumulative time DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Labe1 Persist Ez Quad Sine y G E ON DFF ON f oe Setting the Grade Width When Color has been Selected 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired color width DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value m 1 Color Ez Quad Sine y EI EH pEF ON ON fa i IM 701610 01E 8 9 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display Explanation 8 10 During normal operation the display is updated every time the trigger is activated making it difficult to capture transient conditions such as sudden distortion of waveforms By using the accumulate function the waveform display of the acquired data remains on the screen for the specified time Accumulate Mode Persist Accumulate using each channel color Displayed for the specified time period by gradually lowering the brightness Color Accumulate using eight colors that indicate the fr
358. n 500 points per 10 divisions less than 250 points in the Z1 and Z2 window when displaying Main amp Z1 amp Z2 is recognized as an interpolation area If you leave interpolation off these points will appear as discrete dots so that the display will show gaps between dots or vertical lines If you set interpolation on however the DL1640 DL1640L will connect the points Three interpolation settings are available Sine A Interpolates between two dots using a sin x x function Line a Interpolates between two dots in a straight line PULSE 3 Draws a horizontal line to a point directly above or below the next data point and then interpolates using two dots so that the end of the horizontal line is connected to the next data point by a vertical line OFF No interpolation IM 701610 01E 8 3 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method Outside the Interpolation Area If interpolation is set to Sine Line or Pulse the instrument draws lines between points that are aligned vertically MER Interpolate Sine Line Pulse Within the Interpolation Area Interpolate OFF Sine Line Pulse 8 4 IM 701610 01E 8 3 Changing the Graticule lt For a description of this function see page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys TRACE SNAP HELP SoTL Tiss Sei eS aoe sca srarsros CD Reser Serec ee MENU IMAGE SAVE Cre ea neo SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY Se JCD i Op
359. n or tilted using the stand as shown below When you use the stand pull it forwards until it locks To return the stand to its original position push it backwards When installing the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L with the rear panel down use the stand on the rear panel CAUTION Do not use the Zip drive when the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is installed with the rear panel down If the instrument is installed in the tilted positon rubber feet can be attached to prevent slipping Four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package IM 701610 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Before Connecting the Power Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument A Before connecting the power cord make sure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply and that it is below the rated voltage of the power cord Connect the power cord after confirming that the instrument power switch is OFF Always use protective ground to prevent electric shock Connect the instrument power cord to the 3 prong power outlet with grounding terminal Do not use non grounding extension cords or other measures that defeat the protective grounding Never use an extension cord that does not have a protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be invalidated Connecting the Power Cord with the AC Power Model AC Suffix Code IM
360. n progress it is restarted from the first trace The instrument is performing GO NO GO determination action on trigger or waveform search The SNAP SHOT and CLEAR TRACE are not Operative in the Following Cases e The instrument is in remote state controlled via the communication interface The instrument is performing an operation for example it is in the process of printing out or performing auto setup determining GO NO GO performing an action on trigger or searching data IM 701610 01E 4 7 Calibration Relevant Keys N PHASE BaD aca rrr aca stanr sroP Ee es SEARCH O TRIG D ext D D 12 SIMPLE ENHANCED a TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY Operating Procedure Performing Calibration 1 Press MISC The MISC menu will appear 2 Press the Calibration soft key MISC a a alibrationRenote Cnt1 Netuork Bystem Cnfg aes Next 1 2 3 Press the Auto Cal soft key to select either ON or OFF alibration Auto Cal Deskeu al Exec OFF DN ON 4 _ Press the Deskew soft key to select either ON or OFF 5 If ON is selected in step 4 select the desired channel Pressing the Target CH soft key displays a menu used to select the channel TSC Auto Cal Deskeu Target CH f preia p Exec OFF pN OFF pN o oons 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel Auto Cal al Exec OFF pN 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the Deskew Time oo Press the Ca
361. n soft key USB is displayed only when the USB optionis installed COPY Net Print is displayed only when the USB option or the Ethernet interface option is installed _cOPY___ pe in Net Print Comment Setting the Output Format 5 Press the Format soft key to select Normal or Long Copy to Information Comment Built in g DFF ON 6 Press the Information soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Comments 7 Pressing the Comment soft key displays a keyboard 8 Enter comments according to the procedures described in section 4 1 Setting the Magnification Ratio When the Output Format is Set to Long 9 If you selected Long in step 5 set the magnification ratio using the jog shuttle Press the Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Mag _COPY_ Copy to Inf ornmat iona Comment f iy Previeu Built in Normal Long DFF ON 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the magnification ratio The number of output pages is displayed according to the ratio 10 3 eed Us919S JO nd no 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Setting the Output Range When the Output Format is Set to Long 11 If you selected Long in step 5 set the output range Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 Copy to Inf ornmat iona 5 Comment Built in Normali Long OFF DN 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the output range 13 In a similar fashion set the end p
362. n use the computer to set the display format and the data save conditions of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L The settings made here apply to the display format and save conditions used to save the data described on the previous page Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition Acquisition Start Click Start to start waveform acquisition Stop Click Stop to stop waveform acquisition Turning the Waveform Display ON or OFF and Setting the Vertical Position Channel Selecting the Target Waveform In the Channel group box select the channel that you want to display or not and for which you want to set the vertical position from the following Chan1 to Chan4 or Chan1 to Chan2 channels1 to 2 for the DL1620 channels 1 to 4 Display ON or OFF To display the waveform of the selected channel turn it ON select the Display check box Clear the check box not to display the waveform of the selected channel turn it OFF Vertical Position You can set the vertical position of the waveform of the selected channel Fora description of the vertical position selectable range see section 5 2 Setting the Display Format Display Display Format Select the number of divisions on the screen when displaying waveforms from the following Single Dual or Quad For the meaning of the selections see the explanations in section 8 1 Turning the Display of the Waveform Labels and Scale Values Label ON or OFF e Display Waveform Label TraceLabel To display the
363. nal at all times The picture on the monitor may flicker if the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L or another instrument is brought too close to the monitor The ends of the screen may be cut off on some monitors 12 6 IM 701610 01E 12 4 Using the CH1 OUT Signal Output Specifications for the CH1 OUT Signal Connector type BNC Input level 20 mV div 30 with 50 Q termination Frequency bandwidth Approx 20 MHz DC 3 dB Offset deviation 20 mV Output Signal Terminal The terminal labeled CH1 OUT on the rear panel CH1 OUT Notes About Signal Output For the output level the vertical center of the voltage axis in the waveform display frame is taken as O V As sectarian 7 e For waveform B output is an 80 mVp p ONAN signal with an offset of 20 mV 0 V HINUN 80 mV Th TINY ONZ JT ERP LING LOAGA 80 mV The output level does not change even if sensitivity of the voltage axis is changed If the CH1 trigger level is set to any value other than O0 div output may be distorted When HF Reject is selected for the CH1 trigger the bandwidth is limited to about 15 kHz When NTSC PAL SECAM or 480 60p is selected as the video signal format for the TV trigger the bandwidth is limited to about 300 kHz AN CAUTION Do not apply voltage externally to the CH1 OUT terminal Doing so may damage the terminal IM 701610 01E 12 7 yndyno eubls oaplA g9Y Andino 1066u Andy 406611 Chapter 13 Ethernet Inter
364. nch floppy disk can be used Floppy disks can be formatted on this instrument 2HD 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD 720 KB MS DOS format Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive Hold the floppy disk with the label facing left and insert it with the shutter section facing the drive Insert the floppy disk until the eject button pops out Note Floppy disks with bad sectors cannot be used unless you first repair them using a PC Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive Check that the access indicator is not lit then press the eject button Access Indicator CAUTION Removing the floppy disk while the access indicator is lit can damage the drive s magnetic head or destroy the data on the disk General Handling Precautions For general handling precautions see the instructions that came with the floppy disk IM 701610 01E 11 1 WINIPs y BHe10 S By Wo pue o eeg Hulpeo pue Bulnes Ey 11 2 Zip Disks Zip Disks that can be Used The following types can be used You can format the zip disk on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Size 100 MB and 250 MB Format FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Inserting the Zip Disk in the Zip Drive With the label facing left insert the disk from the side with the shutter Removing the Zip Disk from the Zip Drive With the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L turned ON check that the access indicator is turned OFF and press the eject button Eject Button Access Indicator Procedure when the Zip D
365. nd the difference between the two are measured e Marker Cursors Markers Use this feature to place one or two markers onto the waveform You can then read the voltage value and time value relative to trigger position at each marker and the voltage difference and time span between the markers e Angle Cursors Degree Set the measurement zero point and the end point and then using the angle corresponding to the width between the two as a reference measure the angle of the two angle cursors Statistical Processing of Historical Data Vertical History Performs the V cursor measurements of the waveform acquired using the history memory function and calculates the maximum and minimum values mean value and standard deviation For V Cursors For Marker Cursors Marker2 Cursor1 2000 10 31 16 16 16 SaSS ck_ sCNE1L 2000 10 31 11 11 25 JE Qtok Normal Stopped 265 T 500kS S ZMs div Stopped 21 pi 500k5 5 ZMs liv Marker4 Marker3 645 833m 437 500mU 729 167m 979 167m 875 000m l 104 167mU 1 06250Y Measurement Value Cursor2 Markert Measurement Value of Cursor of Cursor IM 701610 01E 1 21 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Automated Measurements lt Section 9 2 to 9 4 gt Automatic Measurement of Waveform Parameters Section 9 2 This feature automatically measures selected waveform parameters such as rise time and pulse width You can select parameters separa
366. nd the level at which the trigger level is judged The setting range is from 0 1 div to 2 0 div The setting resolution is 0 1 div The default setting is 0 5 div Setting the Frame Skip Frame This is a function for skipping frames when the color burst is inverted on every frame You can select how many frames to skip from the following choices Frame1 Trigger every frame at the specified field Frame2 Trigger every two frames at the specified field Frame4 Trigger every four frames at the specified field Frame8 Trigger every eight frames at the specified field Precautions to be Taken when Setting the TV Trigger Video signals can only be input to CH1 All other channels do not support video signals Hold off trigger coupling and HF rejection settings are ignored 6 38 IM 701610 01E 6 15 Setting the Action On Trigger lt For a description of this function see page 1 11 gt Relevant Keys HORIZONTAL Av SEARCH TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press MODE Turning ON OFF the Action 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to enable and select ON ACTION Buzzer pra to Hard Copy Image Save ffgACQ Count Send Mail an E E l i ON Exec DFF ON DFF ON DFF ON DEFF ON Infinite eine ik Selecting the Number of Waveform Acquisitions 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisiti
367. ndow appears It displays the screen image of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the control panel that allows you to save and load data Web server window File Edit View Favorites Tools Help qaBack amp 4 Gisearch Favorites 4 Gh Sp x Address E http idli 600 1 Pao YOKOGAWA 2 Test and Measurement amp Measurement Instruments Web Service E coments DL 16407 CH beac Ss a ae gt Hy ia a a a A Data Capture window Address http dl1600 1 DataCapture htm y Go Links Data Capture Display Control Panel Amage Cantrof Date Conal Z 002707729 13 5 36 17 110k Norma 1 Monitor and Capture Capture Running 500kKS S s 2NSfliv P S Main 10 Waveform Binary x Interval Abort Capture Exec 10s x Load Color Setup Load JON X Input Password fastrument Contras Acquisition Display Format Stat Stop ne Ej Single v Channel i m Label Chant z IV Display TraceLabel Position I ScaleValue 0 00 Diy Mm History File HistoryNo m Trace Curent H al z Newest Oldest _ r Range Main 7 One All J Confirmation Panel Update DL1640 DL1640L screen image Control panel IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Func
368. ne 1 to Zone 4 and execute the search to reset the search results You can search for a waveform that matches the specified conditions from the past waveforms in the acquisition memory and display it Search Parameters Four types of search parameters can be registered in Zone1 to Zone4 You can change the channel that is to be searched the search condition and the search range for each search zone Search Condition Condition IN Searches for waveforms that pass through the specified search window OUT Searches for waveforms that do not pass through the specified window OFF Do not search for waveforms Source Channel Source Search is carried out on the channel that is specified as the Source Waveforms of other channels are also displayed The Vertical Range of the Search Window Upper Lower The range is 4 div The resolution is 0 01 div Upper must always be greater than or equal to Lower The Horizontal Range of the Search Window Left Right The range is 5 div The resolution is 10 div displayed record length Right must always be greater than or equal to left Search Logic Logic AND Searches for waveforms that meet all search conditions from Zone1 to Zone4 OR Searches for waveforms that meet any one of the search conditions from Zone1 to Zone4 7 13 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 7 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Search Range of the Historical Data The search range is between
369. ned ON data points before the point at which the save operation is executed are saved However the data points that are saved are limited to those that are acquired after fixing T div V div and Measure settings Output example CH1 P P CH1 Max CH1 Min CH2 P P V V V V 70 0 199E 00 0 199E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 Oldest data 65 0 207E 00 0 207E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 60 0 377E 00 0 152E 00 0 125E 00 0 02E 06 Newest data For information related to the automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Data Size Data size Number of items x 15 x number of history waveforms me IM 701610 01E 11 8 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters File Extension The file extension is CSV The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note e Ifa key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving an error occurs e This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions 11 27 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 9 Saving the Cursor Measurement Values A N CAUTION Never
370. nel High Low or Don t Care or the AND of the window conditions of each channel IN OUT or Don t Care CH1 H L H L H L CH2 H L H L H L H L 500 ns 300 ns 400 ns lt gt T gt a 450 ns lt H A A A DA B C 1 9 suopuny 1 3 Setting a Trigger The description of the figure above is as follows If CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X Condition True Time 350 ns The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 The trigger is activated at point B if Pulse lt T The trigger is activated at points A and C if Pulse gt T The trigger is activated at point C if T1 lt PLS lt T2 where Time1 350 ns Time2 450 ns The trigger is activated at points A B and D if T1 lt PLS lt T2 where Time 350 ns Time2 450 ns The trigger is activated at point D if Time out is specified where Time 450 ns OR Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 12 A trigger is activated when any of the edge trigger conditions specified on CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 or the window condition is met A trigger can be activated by either the rising edge of CH1 or CH2 CH1 CH2 Tigger Tigger Tigger When CH1 and CH2 Window Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 13 A certain voltage range window is set and a trigger is activated when the trigger source level enters this voltage range IN or exits from this voltage range OUT It is possible to combine the use of the Window trigger with
371. ng or operating on files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function files cannot be saved on the computer In addition other Web server functions cannot be used while saving files e Files on the network drive NetWork cannot be saved to the computer 13 48 IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Displaying the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Information Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network see page 13 30 Click the Information icon in the Web server window The Information window displaying the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L model Model the maximum available record length Record Length the storage media type Media the presence of options Option the ROM version firmware version Soft Version and other information appears Web server window y Realtime Digital Filter CH1 4 gt Bandwidth Selects a cut off frequency of 20 WIHz to 10 kHz Smart Search SHIFT ZOOM Information window ae ormation Pace Contents Model 70 1610 AC RecordLength Maza MW CH Media ZIP J2 Option Printer Yes GPIB No Ether Yes MAC O00064 830 0013 USB Yes USB Fives Others No Saft Mersior 1 01 uodo ddej190 U JOUIEYLA a IM 701610 01E 13 49 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Viewing the Link Destination Before using this function make sure that the communication i
372. ng the Jog Shuttle Before using the jog shuttle to enter a value you must select the desired parameter by pressing the corresponding soft key The jog shuttle ring the outer ring of the jog shuttle allows you to enter values in larger steps than the jog shuttle dial The size of the step depends on the angle by which the shuttle ring is turned For some parameters you can use the arrow keys below the jog shuttle to shift from one digit to the next 2601 65 28 17 06 55 4 Nornal Stopped 84 SOOkS S 2ZMS div ins CH1 10 1 6 560 U diy DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Urdiv DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto Parameter for Setting with the Jog Shuttle Note If you make an incorrect change with the jog shuttle you can undo the change by pressing RESET 4 1 suoieiadQ uowWwoy gt 4 1 4 2 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Character String The date time file name and comment can be entered using the keyboard displayed on the screen Operate the keyboard using the jog shuttle the SELECT key and arrow key to enter a character string as follows Keyboard Operation 1 Turn the jog shuttle and move the cursor to the character you wish to enter The A and W soft keys can be used to move the cursor up and down 2 Press SELECT to confirm the character entry If a character string is already entered use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position at which you wish to enter the character 3 Rep
373. ng the Mail Function Action Mail Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701610 01E lt For a description of this function see page 1 31 gt NAP SNAP HELP OO PHASE X Y MENU MENT Zs Serr ase1a Corr ace save o SH SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION TIME DIV Mail Settings 1 Follow steps 1 through 9 in section 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval to input the MailServer MailAddress and a Comment if necessary It is not necessary to set the MailBaseTime and Interval using the action mail function However turn Interval OFF when only using the action mail function without using the fixed interval mail function Setting the Action 3 4 5 Press GO NO GO Press the MODE soft key then select Zone or Parameter GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Press the Setup soft key to display the GO NO GO setting menu Condition zonei CH1 DFF ___ON pun IN zonez LC cH2 7 pFFy oN Zone3 zone4 CH4 PFF ___ON pur IN Zone5 C mathi F_N Zone6 Logic LAND __OR__ Sequence ACQ Count Action Buzzer c Save to File c Image Save Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Hard Copy s Send Mail Mail Count i it rel 13 19 uodo ddej190 U JOUIEYLA a 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Func
374. ng the power OFF before turning it back ON again e If calibration does not start when the power is turned ON or if the normal waveform display screen does not appear check the following points e Check that the power cord is plugged in properly e Check that the main power switch is turned ON e Check that the correct voltage is being supplied from the AC outlet See section 3 3 If there is still no power even after the above points have been checked contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual 3 7 s u w nse N Huryen a10jog e 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord 3 8 For Accurate Measurement Turn the power switches ON and allow the unit to warm up for at least 30 minutes After warm up is complete perform calibration See section 4 7 Response at Power OFF When you press the power switch to turn OFF the power the power to the unit turns off only when access to the storage media is done If you turn OFF the power when a Zip disk is inserted in the drive the disk is ejected Settings made prior to turning OFF the power are retained even if the power cord is removed This allows display of waveforms using those saved settings the next time the power is turned ON NOTO The settings are backed up by a lithium battery The battery lasts for approximately 5 years if it is used at an ambient temperature of 23 C When the battery voltage drops below the specified level a message will ap
375. ngs Keyboards that can be Used The keyboards that can be used depend on the language that you selected in section 14 5 English or Japanese A 104 USB keyboard English or a 109 USB keyboard Japanese that conforms to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Ver 1 1 can be used When the language is English 104 keyboard When the language is Japanese 109 keyboard The default language is English Note Connect only the keyboards that are allowed However operation of USB keyboards connected to a USB hub or those that have mouse connectors is not guaranteed For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Connection Procedure When connecting a USB keyboard directly connect the keyboard to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L with a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of the power ON OFF state of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L supports hot plug Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L connect the type B connector to the keyboard When the power switch is ON the keyboard is detected and enabled approximately 6 seconds after it is connected DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Oo Zoo USB Cable Connect the keyboard directly without going through a USB hub Connect only a USB keyboard printer or mouse to the USB PERIPHERAL connectors Do not connect multiple keyboards Do not connect mor
376. ngs stored to the internal memory using the store recall function and setting the message language Automatically sets key settings to the optimum values for the input signals Store and recall up to three arbitrary settings Presets for the CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V and user settings Hard Copy Save to File Buzzer and Send Mail are performed every time a trigger is activated Sending mails for DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L condition via the Ethernet interface Auto calibration and manual calibration are possible Allows setting of screen color date time message language click sound ON OFF Outputs a square calibration waveform signal approx 1 Vp p approx 1 kHz from the probe compensation signal output terminal on the front panel Shows system configuration Allows memory test key test printer test FD drive test Zip drive test PC card drive test or an accuracy test Displays help about settings Displays the thumbnail preview window containing screen image files 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed 16 6 IM 701610 01E 16 6 Built in Printer Option Item Specifications Printing System Thermal line dot method Dot Density 8 dots mm Paper Width 112mm 16 7 Storage Built in Storage Floppy Disk Drive Item Specifications No of Drives 1 Drive Size 3 5 inches Capacity 720 KB 1 44 MB Zip Drive Item Specifications No of Drives 1 Capacity 100 MB 250 M
377. nimum values rising OFF 50 Os Auto Automatic setup affects only the settings listed above All other settings remain unchanged IM 701610 01E 4 4 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP amp VASeeen ey OO Gena eiatie a A rma A HORIZONTAL fv m O TRIG D D o SmmPLe ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV m a ACTION DELAY S o a Operating Procedure 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Store Recall soft key SETUP ee a Initialize Auto Store Undo Setup Recall Recalling 3 After step 2 press the soft key corresponding to the memory number to be retrieved Recall 1 through Recall 3 to execute the recall operation en ecall 1 Recall 2 fRecall 3 tore 1 ime 2 tore 3 Store Detail Storing 3 After step 2 press the soft key corresponding to the memory number to be stored Store 1 through Store 3 to execute the store operation The execution date of the store operation is also displayed ene ecall 1 Recall 2 fRecall 3 tore 1 ia 2 ae 3 Store Detail 4 Press the Store Detail soft key to display the details of the store operation To enter a comment follow the procedure described in section 4 1 Entering a Character String There is a lock switch that you can use to prevent lock overwriting of the stored data Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the lock button corresponding to the store number that you wish to lock P
378. nnector If you do not have a floppy disk Zip disk or PC card handy you can use the 2 MB internal flash memory It is possible to save or load data on a floppy disk Zip disk PC card internal flash memory or network drive You can save data in any of the following formats PostScript TIFF BMP JPEG and PNG This means that you can easily insert the saved images into documents produced with conventional DTP software packages DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L ia Oo 00 26lolSe Floppy Disk 5 Zip Disk or PC Card You can normally rewrite to the internal flash memory approximately 100000 times However this number can deteriorate and become less Therefore do not overly rewrite to the internal flash memory IM 701610 01E Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 Front View Esc Key Closes pop up menu or soft key menu Menu keys Section 2 2 Press a key to display the corresponding menu VERTICAL Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make settings for the vertical axis HORIZONTAL Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make settings for the horizontal axis Power Switch Section 3 3 DL1620 Rear View AC model Power Connectors for the Probes Section 3 4 option N Provides power to YOKOGAWA differential probes or current probes USB PERIPHERAL Connector Connects to a USB printer A keyboard or mouse USB Interface Connector For details about communication functions refer to the c
379. not be viewed on the instrument However it can be used when you analyze the waveform using a personal computer 1 Endian Mode for Storage Big Data for Motorola 68000 series Ltl Data for Intel 86 series 2 Binary File Storage Format Trace Groups into blocks each block for a single waveform Block Groups into blocks each block for a given time interval 3 Binary File Start Position Offset from the beginning of the file 4 Maximum Number of Blocks per Group Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies between waveforms 5 Y Axis Conversion Equation for Each Waveform Y axis value VResolution x Raw data VOffset 6 Data Type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m byte data 7 X Axis Conversion Equation for Each Waveform X axis value HResolution x Data No 1 HOffset App 18 IM 701610 01E Appendix 4 Menu Key CH1 to 4 Vidiv T div PRESET ACQ TRIGGER HISTORY FILE COPY MENU Soft Key Display Position Cupling Probe Offset Band Width Invert Variable Linear Scale Label Select Type Prove Record Length Mode Count Repetitive Hi Res Mode Time Base SIMPLE Source Level Slope Coupling HF Rejection Histeresis Hold Off Select Record Display Mode Start Record End Record Show Map No Search Mode File Item File Name Auto Naming Copy to
380. not displayed on the DL1620 DISPLAY Single Dual Quad Scale Trace ccunulate Value Label Next ON ON OFF 1 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine FO A ON ON OFF 1 2 Press the Mapping soft key to select Auto Fixed or User DISPLAY Translucent Mapping Next ON Auto 2 2 DISPLAY ans lucen Auto Fixed User Next ON 272 Pressing the Set Mapping soft key displays a menu used to assign the waveforms On the DL1620 the CH3 CH4 and Math2 settings are not displayed CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi C4 Mathz ansiucent Mapping Ja Set Mapping ON User 8 1 8 1 Changing the Display Format Explanation 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired channel 7 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the number CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a number Pressing ESC closes the menu 9 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary Main Format Single 1 waveform window Dual 2 waveform windows Quad 4 waveform windows DL1640 and DL1640L only Mapping Auto Windows are arranged from top to bottom in order CH1 CH2 Math1 Math2 But no windows are shown for channels whose display is set to OFF Fixed Channels are displayed regardless of whether their display setting is ON or OFF
381. nsion of the original image data and is shown as follows TIFF files ttd PNG files ntd BMP files btd JPEG files jtd PS files ptd Each of these files is approx 17 KB in size Thumbnail Window Items The following three items are displayed in the thumbnail window A compressed image of the waveform File name Color information The file name and color information appear on the bottom of the compressed waveform image Thumbnail Display Window Format Four thumbnails can be displayed in the window The order in which the files are displayed is the same as that in the File List dialog box Files are displayed from left to right and top to bottom Scrolling the Thumbnail Window If the number of files compatible with the thumbnail feature is greater than four you can scroll the thumbnail window one row 2 thumbnails at a time To scroll the files upwards turn the jog shuttle in the minus direction counterclockwise To scroll the files downwards turn the jog shuttle in the plus direction clockwise Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image ea Chapter 11 Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium 11 1 Floppy Disks Floppy Disks that can be Used The following types of 3 5 i
382. nt otherwise a breakdown may occur Do not Cause Shock to the Input Connectors or Probes Shock to the input connectors or probes may turn into electrical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines Do not Damage the LCD Screen Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also it should not be exposed to vibrations and shocks When the Instrument is not going to be Used for a Long Period Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet s usWaINSses Huryen 3104 g e 3 1 Precautions During Use Carrying the Instrument Before carring the instrument remove the power cord and other cables Always carry the instrument by the handles or carry it with both hands see below Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel unplug the power cord from the plug first then wipe with a dry soft clean cloth Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzene or thinner for cleaning as this may lead to discoloration or deformation 3 2 IM 701610 01E 3 2 Installation Installation Conditions IM 701610 01E The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met Flat Location Set the oscilloscope in the proper direction and in a level and stable place If placed in an unstable place printing quality decreases Well Ventilated Location Vent holes are situated on the bottom In addition vent holes for the cooling fans are also
383. nt Keys NAP SNOr HELP ca mse eons SETUP na a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH a er1 TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Press the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 000 UIF ft ac 0 o jA zx 0 08 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel to be set as the trigger source Ch3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1620 SIMPLE CH1 CHZ CH3 CH4 Ext Line Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Trigger Level 4 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 000 UIF ft AC nim 0 08 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the trigger level to the current offset voltage value Note The trigger level setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Slope soft key to select or ft Setting the Trigger Coupling 7 Press the Coupling soft key to select DC or AC Note The trigger coupling setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Setting the HF Rejection ON or OFF 8 Press the HF Reject
384. ntact with plastic films containing plasticizer for instance vinyl chloride film cellophane tape etc for a long period of time discoloration will occur on the recording area of the chart due to the plasticizer If you are going to keep the roll chart in a holder for instance use a polypropylene holder When you use adhesive on the roll chart never use adhesive which contains an organic solvent such as alcohol or ether otherwise color may develop on the chart When you are going to store recorded roll charts for a long period of time we suggest you make a copy of the charts since discoloration may occur Usage Precautions Use only YOKOGAWA genuine roll charts Do not touch the roll chart with sweaty hands otherwise it may become stained with your fingerprints and information may be lost Do not rub the surface of the roll chart strongly with a firm object color development may occur due to frictional heat Do not allow chemicals or oil to come into contact with the roll chart otherwise color development or loss of information may result 10 1 e eq Us919S JO nd no 10 1 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Operating Procedure Press the PUSH OPEN button and lift the PUSH OPEN Button handle on the right of the printer cover and open the cover Printer Cover Move the release arm located on the right near the front to the MAN FEED position Have the inner side of the roll paper the side that is not g
385. nterface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network See page 13 30 Click the Link icon in the Web server window You can view the Web page of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Web server window A A ME N ote Realtime Digital Filter CH1 4 gt Bandwidth Selects a cut off frequency of 20 WIHZz to 10 kHz Smart Search SHIFT ZOOM Web Page Example English Web Page E DL1640 DL1640L Digital Oscilloscope Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back amp At Gisearch Favorites EA Gi Sp x Address Pall Attp fiw yokogawa contr Bu DL 1600 YOKOGAWA Products Digital Oscilloscope DL1640 DL1640L Specifications Software Support ContactUs OL1640 0L1640L Product Tour FLASH plug in required Note Test and Measurement Search SiteMap Worldwide Portable Instruments with Super Long Memory and Advanced Analysis Capability Features and Benefits t 4 channels 200 MS s 200 MHz analog bandwidth E Maximum memory length 32 Mw OL1640L and 5 MW DL1640 H 64 inch wide angle view TFT color liquid crystal display t Compact and lightweight approx 3 9 kg t 44 size or smaller footprint P Internal storage media select PC card Zip drive or floppy drive USB compliant foptional t Ethernet connectivity optional Real time digital filtering e To use the link function the computer must be connected to th
386. o not match measured values cannot be read correctly When Using the Current Probe 700937 701930 or the Differential Probe 701920 A 3 10 When using YOKOGAWA current probe 700937 701930 or differential probe 701920 use the power supply for the probe provided on the rear panel of the instrument CAUTION Use the power connectors for the probes on the rear panel only for powering probes 700937 701930 or 701920 Using the power connectors for any other purpose can damage the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L or the device that is connected IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Precautions to be Taken when Using the Current Probe 700937 701930 or the Differential Probe 701920 When connecting the current probe 700937 or 701930 or the differential probe 701920 to the probe power supply terminal on the rear panel make sure that the current does not exceed the range shown below Otherwise the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L operation may become unstable due to the activation of the excessive current protection circuit DL1640 DL1640L DL1620 PROBE POWER OP PROBE POWER OP 12 V 12V Total current consumption lt 450 mA When using the current probe 700937 or 701930 the number of probes that can be used is limited by the current generated by the device under measurement Examples of current consumption measurement using an active probe that can be connected to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L are shown
387. oard Japanese ccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 22 A A gt BUN Tigger neiiice eee dna eo 1 8 6 14 A Delay B Tigers ienirst a a Aai 1 9 6 17 Accumulate Mode itil etc niin weds oleate tesa sean cel 8 10 Accumulated Waveform Display ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 16 ACCUMULATION F CMG oat sciatica te ee ieee Neeley 8 10 Accuracy NOS uini a al eres hear taeere is athicos 15 10 ACO ROY i sect ti ee eee E eet rare Rea 2 5 ACQUISITION MOde ic cnwedictacse sais dcunhaes aden ducantaetuansicusei deca 1 15 7 2 Action Mail Function isis cies iau tote ds OS tt emuane ae 13 19 AGHON ON TOG OF 2hats sesasscievnonetha den sheassivedbeatha ee ciesewets 1 11 6 39 1AX 0 919 oara ae eres a ye tr nne ee eee este eee 9 33 RAION sareen a leona alien eerie conden S 1 24 Andle CUrSOR siti ek a a 1 21 9 4 PUN OW KCN Stead ss E E A tauataotetyas 2 5 yo Gd ete enter E eee ere een een rere 11 13 PS NE OMIM AR sous Anite cdc le deee A ee lbs osless 11 13 ASCII Header File Format cccccsssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees App 15 PUNO CG Alecetsbe ig at strate taeda toda a coset a 4 20 Auto Calibration sde a eis cca 4 20 Auto Level Mode veins ieee toe ssia laa tile Sectcet cen loads 1 11 6 1 Auto Measurement Mode c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 9 15 At MOG Enirar ranna e aan a ae Raai 1 11 6 1 Auto Naming Function n 10 13 11 14 11 19 a Eo eo eKO DENSE EEES Ee E ENA T 1 29 8 28 Auto Scroll Se
388. od Int1TY Int2TY IntiXY and Int2XY When the measurement trace is Math1 or Math2 or Math1 for the DL1620 it is not possible to select Int1XY or Int2XY For details on each item see the Measurement Parameters Items and Delay between channels Delay Setup sections in section 9 2 If you set the measurement trace to None or Const1 through Const4 you cannot select the measurement parameter Computation Ope Select the computation to be performed between items of Areai and Area2 You can select or If you set the measurement trace to None the computation is not performed In this case the value of the measurement parameter in the other area is displayed Setting Proximal Mesial and Distal Dist Prox Unit Dist Prox Selectable Range of Proximal O to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps Selectable Range of Mesial 0 to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps Selectable Range of Distal O to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps 9 31 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 9 32 Precautions to be Taken when Performing Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters The measurement value displays if the measurement is not possible For waveforms of small amplitude correct measurements may not be possible When t
389. odel Record Length T div DL1620 1 kwords 50 ms div to 5 s div DL1640 10 kwords 50 ms div to 50 s div 100 kwords to 1 Mwords 50 ms div to 500 s div 8 Mwords 200 ms div to 800 s div DL1640L 1 kwords 50 ms div to 5 s div 10 kwords 50 ms div to 50 s div 100 kwords to 1 Mwords 50 ms div to 500 s div 4 Mwords 100 ms div to 800 s div 10 Mwords 500 ms div to 500 s div 32 Mwords 1 s div to 640 s div 500 ms div to 800 s div Ranges in parentheses take effect in high resolution mode 5 19 SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue ed1110 Chapter 6 Triggering 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode lt For a description of this function see page 1 11 gt Relevant Keys 0 TRACE 765 OO HELP SETUP PENT a me ae O SHIFT EARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press MODE 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode to set the trigger mode Bbunebbiy 2 MODE SAC Count Auto uto Level f Normal Single Single N Inf inite 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of times to acquire the waveform MODE fesingle ND Auto uto Level f Normal Single ing 1e N Count 2 Explanation Auto Mode If the trigger condition is met within the 100 ms timeout period the waveform is updated on each trigger occurrence If the trigger condition is not met after the timeout period elapses the waveform is automatically updated If the time axis setting is in the range in which the dis
390. og shuttle Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If you press the Set Reset soft key the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears This file will not be copied Go to step 11 Flash_Men PC_Card 1 NetWork J lt old 2002 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED 1999 16 03 10 21 CYCLEQG06 2602 06 24 19 25 RU CYCLE0005 2602 06 24 19 21 RW CYCLE0004 2602 06 24 19 19 R W CYCLE9603 2602 06 24 19 16 RW CYCLE0002Z 2602 06 24 19 09 R U CYCLE0001 2602 06 24 19 07 R W CYCLE9660 2602 06 24 19 65 R W Dest Dir Selecting All Copy Source Files at Once 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium Pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These directories and files will be copied The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset Resetting All Selected Copy Source 10 Pressing the All Reset soft key removes the asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory The directories and files will not be copied The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 11 11 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 11 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destinat
391. ogether with one or both zoom windows the main area will include vertical lines or zoom boxes indicating the zoom area s The center of the zoom area corresponds to the center of the zoom box Z1 Box Z2 Box 2606 11 06 11 47 40z fick Norma Stopped 5193 p 500k F Main Waveform 1 Nal N Z2 Waveform 120 IM 701610 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Linear Scaling lt Section 5 10 gt It is possible to append a scaling constant A an offset value B and a unit to the measurement value X of cursor or automated measurements Linear scaling is useful when applying a voltage divider ratio to the measurement values Linear scaling is also handy when you want to your scope to automatically convert the measured voltage results into the for example current or temperature measurement unit of your signal suonoun source Y UNIT AX B Y result of linear scaling Cursor Measurements lt Section 9 1 gt You can use the following cursor types to analyze the waveform data e V Cursors Vertical Two vertical broken lines V cursors are displayed The time from the trigger position to each V cursor and the time difference between the V cursors are measured In addition the voltage of the signal at each cursor position and the voltage difference between the cursors are measured H Cursors Horizontal Two horizontal broken lines H cursors are displayed The values in the vertical direction of each H cursor a
392. ogic 33 34 Move the cursor to Logic with the jog shuttle Press SELECT to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 35 36 IM 701610 01E Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence Press SELECT to select Single or Continue 9 49 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Explanation 9 50 Setting the ACQ Count 37 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Count 38 Press SELECT to display the waveform acquisition count setting menu 39 Use the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisition count then press SELECT Selecting the Action for Condition not Met 40 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 41 Press SELECT to turn action ON or OFF Setting the Determination Range 42 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight the T Range1 jog shuttle icon 43 Use the jog shuttle to set the head of the determination range 44 Inthe same manner set the tail of the range to T Range2 Executing Determination 45 Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination The Exec changes to the Abort soft key When the determination is completed acquisition automatically stops You can force a stop by pressing START STOP or the Abort soft key Create zones using a standard waveform as a base and from those zones let GO NO GO be determined by whether a waveform extends outside or inside of the zone Waveform for GO NO GO Determination Determination criteria Setup You c
393. oid electric shock confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF before making connections To avoid electric shock or fire use a cable having a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22 AWG or more Attach the DC power supply and cable to the DC power supply connectors part no A1105JC ahead of time as shown in the figure below Use a cable having a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22 AWG or more Soldering 10 to 18VDC 1 Check that the power switches on the instrument and DC power supply are turned OFF 2 Connect the cable connector assembled ahead of time according to the instructions above to the DC power supply connector on the instrument 3 Connect the ends of the cable to a power supply meeting the conditions below Item Conditions Rated supply voltage 12 VDC Operating supply voltage 10 to 18 VDC Power consumption 60 VA max Note e If the power supply voltage falls between 10 VDC and 11 VDC a message appears on the DL1600 screen indicating that the power supply voltage is low Turning ON OFF the Main Power Switch Main power switch rear panel on the right Press the switch to the left to turn it ON press the switch to the right to turn it OFF 3 6 IM 701610 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Turning ON OFF the Power Switch CAUTION Do not turn the power ON or OFF when the Zip drive is installed as this could damage the drive To avoid damaging the Zip drive remove it before turning the
394. oint of the output range in T Range2 Previewing Long Copy 14 Pressing the Preview soft key displays the output image on the screen Copy to Informationa 5 Comment Built in Normal Longj OFF DN 15 Turning the jog shuttle changes the displayed page 16 Pressing the Quit soft key returns to the original screen Executing Print Out 17 Pressing COPY outputs a hard copy of the screen Pressing COPY again aborts the output Output Example when Mag is Set to Long LITTE Te g Lok AUrrid 1 SiLnppinl au psd Se 1 Bia Aree 10 4 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Output Format In addition to normal size long copy is possible in which the time axis of the displayed waveform is magnified 2 to 800000 times before printing The magnification ratio varies depending on the T div and record length settings Outputting Optional Information Outputs the results of the setup information at the same time as the waveform Comments You can output a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters in the lower section Print Range Sets the range to output to the printer from 5 div to 5 div Preview The output image can be previewed using the specified output format Precautions to be Taken when Printing with the Built in Printer Printing is not possible while the waveform acquisition is in progress Only the main waveform is long copied When displaying a
395. olution mode is ON Even when the repetitive sampling is turned OFF there are cases in which the mode automatically changes to the repetitive sampling mode when the T div is changed For the relationship between the T div setting and the sample rate see Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length Explanation The T div setting is made by setting the time per division on the screen grid Setting Range For a record length of 1 kKWord 2 ns div 5 s div For a record length of 10 kWord 2 ns div 50 s div For a record length of 100 k 1 M or 10 MWord 2 ns div 500 s div 10 MWord for 1640L only For a record length of 32 MWord on the DL1640L 2 ns div 640 s div or 2 ns div 800 s div when in high resolution mode For a record length of 8 MWord on the DL1620 DL1640 2 ns div 800 s div For a record length of 4 MWord on the DL1640L 2 ns div 800 s div T div and Sampling Mode Use of repetitive sampling mode lets you get the sample rate of 200 MS s and above or 100 MS s and above if the high resolution mode is ON But note that the allowable time scale settings vary according to record length For details see Appendix 1 5 18 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 5 12 Setting T div T div and Roll Mode When acquisition count is infinite acquisition mode is not average or the trigger mode is auto auto level or single roll mode display is enabled at the following T div settings M
396. ommunication Interface Manual Doc IM701610 17E GO NO GO Output Terminal Section 9 14 Outputs the GO NO GO judgements RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal Section 12 3 DL1620 IM 701610 01E Front Panel Rear Panel Floppy Disk Drive Zip Drive or PC Card Interface Chapter 11 Jog Shuttle Changes the selected value or moves the cursor The more the shuttle ring outer ring is turned the more the setting increment increases TRIGGER Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make trigger settings YOKOGAWA DL 164 O ierit dseiNscore Hed y283 JO 9S pue oweN COMP Output Section 3 5 N Outputs probe phase compensation signal Ground Connector Ground connection used for probe phase compensation Input Terminals Section 3 4 Used to connect a probe N The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Instead an external trigger external clock multi purpose terminal is installed in place of the CH4 terminal Power Connector Section 3 3 Main Power Switch Section 3 3 Ethernet Connector Chapter 13 Option or GP IB Connector Option For details about the communication functions refer to the Communication Interface Manual IM701610 17E Serial RS 232 Interface Connector For details about the communication functions refer to the Communication Interface Manual IM701610 17E CH1 OUT Connector Trigger Output Terminal Section 12 2
397. omputations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The waveform that has offset voltage DC voltage removed from the input signal can be observed In this case the vertical position becomes 0 V Note Offset cancel applies to all channels To set whether or not to cancel the offset for each channel use linear scaling IM 701610 01E 14 7 SUOI E19dO 19410 z 14 5 Changing the USB Keyboard Language Confirming the Type of Keyboard that is Connected Option Relevant Keys SNAP AC m FILE misc MATH Reser eect a oz TAC EPHA E Aca ee a ae D oke E 5 2 A Q o s Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the USB soft key Changing the USB Keyboard Language 3 Press the USB Keyboard soft key to select ENG or JPN Confirming the Type of Keyboard that is Connected 3 Press the USB List soft key to display the USB Device List Check the type of USB keyboard that is connected 14 8 IM 701610 01E 14 5 Changing the USB Keyboard Language Confirming the Type of Keyboard that is Connected Option Explanation IM 701610 01E The USB keyboard that can be used depends on the language English or Japanese selected A 104 USB keyboard English or a 109 USB keyboard Japanese that conforms to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Ver 1 1 can be used ENG 104 keyboard and 89 keyboard JPN 109 keyboard and 89 keyboard The default language is English 14 9
398. on Display Position Coupling Probe 6 Offset Je Bandwiat Next OFF pin O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 V Full 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation 16A 1U 106A 1 1 1 16 1 100 1 1000 1 700937 701930 Next Probe attenuation for each channel can be selected from the following 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10 A 1 V 700937 or 100 A 1 V 701930 Note If an incorrect attenuation has been selected V div will also be incorrect If you set the attenuation to 1 1 when using a 10 1 probe for example the displayed value for automatically measured amplitude will be 1 10 the true value IM 701610 01E 5 5 Setting the Offset Voltage Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see page 1 6 gt NQF HELP ca msc eonoso SETUP Coe EE N IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT C HORIZONTAL y an O TRIG D smrce ENHANCED TIME DIV oe Poemon DELAY The DL1620 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E Setting the Offset Value 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 to select the channel 2 Press the Offset soft key Display Position Coupling Probe J6 Offset J Banduiat OFF DN O OOdiv DC 10 1 0 000 U Full 1 2 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the offset value You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle Resettin
399. on must be stopped Use of the snapshot function allows the currently displayed waveforms to remain temporarily on the screen without acquisition being stopped To activate this function just press SNAP SHOT without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained This waveform is called a snapshot waveform The snapshot waveform is displayed separately in white making comparison between the two easier Snapshot waveforms are screen image data so they cannot be used for cursor measurement or automated measurement However screen image data output hard copy is possible Snapshot Waveform Clear Trace lt Section 4 6 gt This function clears all waveforms other than the loaded waveforms and restarts the averaging repetitive sampling and accumulation in a signal operation Preset lt Section 5 6 gt This feature automatically sets the V div input coupling trigger level and other parameters to appropriate values for 5 V or 3 3 V CMOS signals or 700937 or 701930 current probes Optional Accessories GO NO GO Determination lt Section 9 9 9 10 gt The GO NO GO function is useful when you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms on a production line making electronic equipment Two determinations are available GO NO GO operation using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters and using the zone This function detects whether an automatically measured value falls within the specified range and respond
400. on count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the count to Infinite Executing the Action On Trigger 5 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the waveform acquisition and executes the action on trigger Aborting the Action On Trigger 6 Pressing the Abort soft key or START STOP stops the waveform acquisition and aborts the action on trigger IM 701610 01E 6 39 Bbunebbiy 2 6 15 Setting the Action On Trigger Explanation Operation to Perform when the Trigger is Activated The specified operation from the following list is performed every time a trigger is activated Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB or Net Print Ethernet interface option that was specified in Copy to of the Copy menu Image Save Saves the screen image data to the output destination FD Zip disk PC card internal flash memory or network drive that you specified in the Image Save menu Save to File Saves the waveform data the automated measurement value of waveform parameters or snapshot waveforms to the storage medium FD Zip disk PC card internal flash memory or network drive specified in the File menu Buzzer Sounds an alarm Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Note _ When the action on trigger is started the specified operati
401. on is performed when the trigger is activated in the normal mode regardless of the trigger mode setting Number of Operations ACQ Count 1 to 65536 Repeats the operation the specified number of times Infinite Repeats the operation until the waveform acquisition is stopped Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation Operates according to the settings in the FILE COPY or Image Save menu File name of Image Save or Save to File Saved using AUTO Name For details see section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium or section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Send Mail Operation Sends e mail messages to the address specified through MISC gt NetWork gt Mail Setup gt Mail Address Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Action On Trigger Action on trigger cannot be used when the action mode is Average or Box Average The settings cannot be changed during an action on trigger Trigger Mode The trigger mode is set to Single 6 40 IM 701610 01E Chapter 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 Setting the Record Length lt For a description of this function see page 1 14 gt Relevant Keys TRACE SNAP HELP JOC woo PHASE X Y MENU __ MENU setup oispLay Copy mace save o sHiFT SA SEARCH O TRIG D D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV m m o a ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION D 0 Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press t
402. onnection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings Set a correct password Corrective Action Set a correct date and time The file name contains characters that are not allowed or the file name is restricted in MS DOS Press START STOP to the waveform acquisition All keys other than START STOP are disabled during GO NO GO determination Set a different label Turn ON the channel display or set Math operation Change the timebase to Internal Select Abort or press START STOP Reference Section 9 1 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Reference Section 3 6 4 1 4 5 9 9 9 10 8 5 5 1 9 5 to 9 7 5 11 4 5 6 15 15 5 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnoIL
403. or more detailed information see Appendix 1 Relationship between Time Axis Setting and Sampling Mode The sampling method sampling mode for an input signal changes according to the time axis setting as described hereafter But note that the time axis range over which this feature is actually available will vary according to the maximum displayable record length as shown in Appendix 1 e Real Time Sampling Mode Changing the time axis causes a corresponding change in the sampling rate The maximum sampling rate is 200 MS s or 100 MS s if the high resolution mode is ON The input signal is sampled sequentially and data is stored in the acquisition memory In this mode the waveform can only be displayed correctly at frequencies up to half the sample rate due to Nyquist s theorem Sample rate is expressed in S s number of samples per second Thus this mode is suitable for observation of a waveform which fluctuates more slowly than the sample rate If the sample rate is higher than the frequency of the input signal high frequency components will be lost In this case a phenomenon in which high frequency components change to lower frequency components occurs due to Nyquist s theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing can be avoided by setting the acquisition mode to envelope mode and acquiring the waveform Aliasing Signal Input Signal Sampling Point e Repetitive Sampling Mode To enable this mode you must
404. ore turning this knob be sure to select the channel you want to adjust by pressing the corresponding channel key CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 HORIZONTAL Group TIME DIV TRIGGER Group O TRIG D o m SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY IM 701610 01E TIME DIV Knob Section 5 12 Use this knob to set the time scale If you change the scale while acquisition is suspended the new value becomes effective when acquisition resumes SHIFT ZOOM Key Sections 8 9 8 10 Displays a menu related to the waveform zoom display Pressing the ZOOM key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to data searching Search and Zoom Function SHIFT MODE Key Sections 6 1 6 15 7 3 Displays a menu used to select the trigger mode Pressing the MODE key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to action on trigger SIMPLE Key Sections 6 4 to 6 7 Displays the menu for the simple trigger mode which provides normal triggers such as the edge trigger Simple trigger mode is selected when the indicator located above this key is lit ENHANCED Key Sections 6 4 6 8 to 6 14 Displays the menu for enhanced trigger mode which provides complex triggers such as the pattern trigger Enhanced trigger mode is selected when the indicator located above this key is lit SHIFT POSITION Key Sections 6 2 6 3 Used to set the trigger position You can set the trigger delay by pressing the POSITION
405. orm acquisition is stopped and then restarted provided that acquisition conditions remain unchanged If you change the acquisition settings history memory is cleared when you restart acquisition using the new settings lf CLEAR TRACE is pressed during waveform acquisition or after the waveform acquisition is stopped data in the history memory are cleared when the data acquisition is restarted Precautions to be Taken when Recalling Data from the History Memory 7 10 Acquisition will stop when the history memory menu is displayed It is not possible to recall waveform data from the history memory while acquisition in progress Acquisition can be restarted while the history memory menu is displayed However it is not possible to change history memory settings such as Selected Record No while acquisition is in progress Settings are restricted by the following formula End Rec No lt Selected Record No lt Start Rec No If you load a waveform record from floppy disk or external storage device the loaded waveform becomes Record 0 In the case of multiple records Sequential store the records will be loaded sequentially with the latest record as 0 Computation and automatic measurement of waveform parameters are always performed on the currently displayed waveform i e the waveform identified by the record No designated for Selected Record No Analysis of old data is possible as long as the history memory content remains unchanged
406. orm data For explanation and procedures see section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading the Snapshot Waveform The snapshot waveform can be load as four waveforms Snap1 to Snap4 Clearing the Waveform The loaded snapshot waveform is cleared when unload initialize or auto setup is performed Note If a key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP server LPR client or Web server functions ma i oi a 11 8 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters AN CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys PHASE O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Measure FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Cursor Image Utility Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the File Name Comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note
407. ory File Name of the storage medium Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of Characters Characters that can be Used File name 1 to 16 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Creating a Directory A new directory can be created on a medium See above for the assignment of the directory name when creating a new directory Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e x Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note e You cannot rename a directory file or create a new directory while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON Directory attributes cannot be changed If a file with the same na
408. ount 21 Max 3 333 E 01 lt Statisti Min 3 333E 01 S arenes Average 0 000E 00 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Using Control Scripts Before using this function make sure that the communication interface of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is set to Network see page 13 30 Click the Control Script icon in the Web server window The Control Script window used to send communication commands see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and display the responses from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L appears Web server window Control Script window 25 E aoe Control Script Page Control Script Panel Command IEEE4A88 2 Channel disp on Channel disp Transmission command input area Clear Command 4rea Response CHAN DISP 1 Response display area Clear Response Area Interval 2s Start Stop Indicator 13 45 uodo ddej190 U JOUIEYLA a 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Sending Commands Command IEEE 488 2 Entering Transmission Commands Enter commands in the transmission command input area Maximum number of input characters Up to 50 000 50 KB Sending Commands Click Send to send commands in the transmission command input area collectively in the display order of the area Clearing the Entered Commands Clear Command Area Click Clear Command Area to clear all the commands in the transmission co
409. oupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Correlation with the OR Trigger or Width Trigger OR and Width are the trigger types on which the window trigger can be used When using the window trigger of a single channel set the window conditions of all other channels to or x IM 701610 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP SEA TIME DIV Operating Procedure Inputting the Video Signal Connect the probe cable used to input the video signal to the CH1 input terminal Bbunebbiy 2 Selecting the TV Trigger 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type fe Count gHold Off Set Patter levels us A gt B N oupling 1 0 08 3 Press the TV soft key Selecting the Broadcasting System of the Video Signal to be Monitored 4 Pressing the TV Type soft key displays a menu used to select the broadcasting system ENHANCED
410. ow eT i i D IV i I Di i i l l i y I i i F Pulse lt T eee b tthe ee rete ede hanehane Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out V Zoom Screen Center Position Vv Starting Point for the Next Search Pulse Time Width when the Specified Condition is Met T Specified Time Width The center position of the waveform displayed in the zoom screen differs between Pulse gt T and Time Out Auto Scroll Set the scroll speed choosing from one of 7 steps The higher the number the faster the scrolling You cannot set any settings other than direction and speed while auto scrolling IM 701610 01E 8 33 Chapter 9 Waveform Analysis 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors lt For a description of this function see page 1 21 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP O E ED FILE MISC Gacor SETUP PEST i ce me ae O SHIFT C wm A SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV a ACTION DELAY o SIMPLE ENHANCED o o Operating Procedure Selecting the Cursor Type 1 Press CURSOR 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the cursor type menu CURSOR Type OFF 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired cursor type to select the cursor When not Displaying the X Y Waveform CURSOR__ OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Vertical History When Displaying the X Y Waveform OFF orizontal Vertical Marker eooo T FT T For H Horizontal Cursors When Not
411. ower Signal ee 6 13 GOUT irera E a 16 8 GO QU SIG AN a A N EAR 9 52 GO NO GO Determination 0 cccccccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenes 1 33 GO NO GO Determination Parameter ccceeeeee 9 43 GO NO GO Determination Zone cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 47 GO NO GO KEY ecean eea eee erara TAEAE TE A 2 4 GO NO GO OUIPUT ieran A aaaea 16 8 GO NO GO Signal Output 2 0 0 0 cece ee ee eee ee eee 9 52 GPIB IMECHACE sree nd staems 16 9 Grade Width sereia a a cece aesanteeans 8 10 Graticule 3 55 sachanspuazomcadsadsaedenteueeasaseataacnrvaadenasceiesoaents 1 17 8 5 H FACUNSOl Aca s otcce sect suse a a code aston tacked 1 21 9 1 9 7 Hard Copy Action cseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 6 40 9 46 9 51 FIG IP FUNCIO eitas 4 21 HEEP KoV tutes tusiaha nates n 2 5 HEID VVINGOW scsszcnescannevetetssarensas send tcbebrecsteeen das aemeceaeetaenassat 4 21 HF Rejection 1 12 6 9 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 28 6 31 6 34 PAI G Ss EE SE E T A E TE 7 6 PIG POV CW nerasi a A 12 4 high resolution mode 1 14 4 14 5 18 7 1 7 6 16 1 Historical data V Cursors ccsccceccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 9 5 PIO TOR Y Key naen A 2 5 History Memory csesnsarsa a EN 1 17 7 8 History Memory Search Using Waveform Parameters 1 26 History Memory Search Using ZONE ceceeeseeeeeeeees 1 26 History Search Function cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 26 7 11 7 15 Aod
412. ower than the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div to 4 div Time Set the determination time T The range for this setting is 1 sample rate display range Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div Display Position of the Searched Waveform Result Window When the zoom mode is set to Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 you can select whether to display the searched waveform in the Z1 or Z2 window Search Count The search can be carried out up to 1000 times When the type is edge the rising or falling edge is counted from the previous search position In addition the past search results can also be displayed Changing the Zoom Rate and Position The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display area As in the zoomed waveform the zoom rate and position can be changed 8 30 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Precautions to be Taken when Searching e Searching is not possible while the data acquisition is in progress e Searching is not possible on the computed results of the power spectrum e The search result is void if the following operations are carried out Starting data acquisition Changing the Search Setup setting Shifting the phase of the source or the clock e Searching is not possible when setting CH2 or CH4 as the clock channel while in high resolution
413. p or PC card test 15 9 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Huljooyussjqno 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Explanation 15 10 Memory Test This test checks the internal ROM The ROM is functioning correctly if Pass is displayed If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Key Test Tests whether or not the front panel keys are operating correctly If the name of the key that is pressed is highlighted then it is operation correctly If it does not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Floppy Disk Drive Zip Drive PC Card Drive Test This test checks the floppy disk drive Zip drive or PC card drive If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Printer Test This test checks the optional built in printer The printer is functioning correctly if gray shading is printed properly If it is not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Accuracy Test This test checks A D accuracy If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual IM 701610 01E 15 4 Checking the System Condition Relevant Keys RESET SELECT oe ea aca stant sror SETUP EN T Et mae ae O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o o m 12 SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV m a ACTION DELAY
414. p Recall Canceling Auto Setup 3 Press the Undo soft key to restore the settings that existed immediately before auto setup Explanation The key settings such as V div T div and trigger levels are automatically set to optimum values for the input signal 2000710731 19 46 51 J ick Normal 2000 16 31 19 47 26 j Stopped 105 Stopped 140 iv y iv CH1 10 1 CH1 10 1 2 00 U div 0 500 Uzdi y DC Full DC Full Edge CH1 F Edge CHI F 0 00 U a s00 Y e SETUP r Initialize uto Store mdo EJ iad do etu eca etu EJ Before Auto Setup After Auto Setup Center Position The center position after auto setup is set to O V Target Channels Auto setup is performed on all channels Loaded Waveforms When you perform auto setup the loaded waveforms are unloaded Pressing the Undo soft key has no effect IM 701610 01E 4 13 suoieiadQ uowwoy gt 4 3 Performing Auto Setup 4 14 Canceling Auto Setup By pressing the Undo soft key the settings can be set back to the values that existed immediately before auto setup was performed However settings which existed before auto setup are erased when the power is turned OFF In this case the Undo operation will have no effect The setting parameters that existed immediately before auto setup are Cleared if you execute initialization after auto setup Waveforms that can be Automatically Setup Frequency Approx 50 Hz or more Ma
415. page Operating Environment Computer Environment gt See page 13 28 DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Environment gt See page 13 29 Preparations for Using the Web Server Function Preparations on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L gt See page 13 30 Preparations on the Computer gt See page 13 31 Using the Web Server Function Using the FTP Server Function gt See 13 35 Capturing Data gt See page 13 36 Displaying the Measurement Trend of Waveform Parameters gt See page 13 41 Using Control Scripts gt See page 13 45 Displaying the Log gt See page 13 47 Displaying the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Information gt See page 13 49 Viewing the Link Destination gt See page 13 50 Overview of the Web Server Function IM 701610 01E FTP server function on the Web browser View the list of files stored on the storage media of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L internal flash memory or built in storage medium and transfer files to your computer Data capture The following operations are possible Change the display format of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and display data in the history memory Display the screen image of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Save waveform and setup data on your computer Load setup data saved on your computer to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Measurement trend of waveform parameters Using the Excel function display the trend of the selected waveform parameters The statistical processing of measured values is also possible Control scri
416. pear on the screen In this case the battery needs to be replaced immediately The battery cannot be replaced by the user so contact the nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual IM 701610 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Input Terminals A A probe or an input cable such as a BNC cable must be connected to one of the input terminals CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1620 located on the lower section of the front panel The input impedance is 1 MQ 1 0 and approximately 28 pF The number of input terminals varies according to the instrument model CAUTION The maximum allowable input voltage is 300 VDC or 300 Vrms when the frequency is 1 kHz or less Never input a voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of the instrument If the frequency exceeds 1 kHz the input section may be damaged even when the voltage is below 300 VDC DL1640 DL1640L 1 MQ 28 pF lt 300V CATI OED O D OD DL1620 1MQ 28pF lt 300V CATI Points to Note when Connecting a Probe IM 701610 01E When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time perform phase correction of the probe as described in the section 3 5 Failure to do so may result in unstable gain across different frequencies thereby preventing correct measurement Calibration must be performed for each channel If the object to be measured is connected to the instrument directly without using
417. per and printer errors on the USB printer If you executed printing on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L when the USB printer is in such condition press COPY to stop the printing 10 9 e eq UZ919S JO nd no 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Relevant Keys srm a g OO X Y ME END a GETOP osu Co mace sae vertical CO O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press IMAGE SAVE Selecting the Format 3 Pressing the Format soft key IMAGE a Format Color a a aFile Name Thumbna i1 Comment File List TIFF OFF 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the type of format to be selected a a ee Setting the Color for formats other than PS 5 Press the Color soft key to select ON ON Revers ON Gray or OFF IMAGE a Format OFF ON DN Revers ON Gray File Nane Thumbnail TIFF sd Setting Comments 6 Pressing the Comment soft key displays a keyboard 7 Enter comments according to the procedures described in section 4 1 Setting the Compression for BMP Color is ON 8 Press the Compression soft key select ON or OFF When Compression is ON you cannot store to Network Drive a Format Color fa Compress iona aFile Nane Thumbnail Comment File List BMP ON DFF ON 10 10 IM 70
418. per Lower Condition Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Buzzer Save to File c Hard Copy 9 Image Save Send Mail Mail Count Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Item Pressing SELECT displays the automated measurement item menu Mode Trace Iten Upper Lower Condition Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Save to File c Hard Copy Turn the jog shuttle to select the item and press SELECT i Select Select A Burst2 AvgFreq Pulse AvgPer iod Delay AvgFreq AvgPer iod IntiTY Int2TY Intixy Int2x Int 1Ty v Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper Pressing SELECT displays the upper limit setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the upper limit and press SELECT Set Lower in a similar fashion Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select IN or OUT Set Param2 to Param4 as necessary IM 701610 01E 9 9 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Logic 20 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Logic 21 Press SELECT to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 22 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence 23 Press SELECT to select Single or Continue Setting the ACQ Count 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Count 25 Pressing SELECT a menu used to set the number of waveform acqu
419. play a menu used to set the PC card partitions Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 7 Turn the jog dial to set the number of partitions Utility FILE Function fa Format 11 6 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium Formatting the Internal Flash Memory 6 Press the Format soft key to display the format menu Proceed to step 8 Function Ja a edia Info Format Format e Executing Canceling the Format Operation OK Cancel 8 Pressing the Exec soft key displays the alert dialog box Utility FILE Function fa Format 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel 10 Selecting OK and pressing SELECT starts the format operation Selecting Cancel and pressing SELECT cancels the format operation File List File Name Size Flash_Men 2097152 442368 PC_Card 19467936 5279744 Please Confirm PC_Card will be formatted by deviding 2 part OK Cancel Function fa wPartitio edia Info Fornat 2 Viewing the Media Information Follow steps 1 5 to select a media Utility FILE 6 Pressing the Media Info soft key displays information about the medium that was selected in step 5 Media Info File Name Media Name PC_Card i Media Size 16407936 byte PN Flash_Men Used Space 5218364 byte PC_Card Vacant Space 5189632 byte Partition Size 1 4 Function Format
420. play mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Auto Level Mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same fashion as in the auto mode Ifa trigger does not occur within the timeout period the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected the trigger level is automatically changed to the center value and the trigger is generated to update the displayed waveform The auto level mode is valid only if the trigger is a simple trigger and the trigger source is CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 For all other cases the operation is the same as the auto mode If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Normal Mode The display is updated only when the trigger conditions are met The display will not be updated if no trigger is caused Therefore to check the waveform or ground level when no trigger is detected use auto mode IM 701610 01E 6 1 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode Single Mode The display is updated once when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops In the time axis setting range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode When a trigger occurs the specified record length of data is acquired and the displayed waveform stops Single N Mode The display is updated according to the number of times specified when t
421. play window Cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress There is no data to be undone Cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress This data cannot be backed up There is no data to be recalled Cannot start during data output Cannot access file while hard copying Cannot compress this screen image Turn off the compression switch Calibration failure Disconnect the input and execute again If it fails again servicing is required Cannot start when loading waveform data that has been saved in history All mode Insufficient output data Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval Hard copying Abort or wait until it is complete Cannot perform calibration while waveform data is loaded Pattern is not specified Cannot start when waveform data that has been acquired in the linear average mode is loaded Cannot be executed while computation is in progress Failed to measure statistics The target waveform data exists or the measured waveform data may not exist If Cycle Statistic is specified the instrument may be configured in a way that fails to detect the cycle Cannot store because the data is locked Release the lock through Store Detail Corrective Action Set the release arm to the HOLD position Load a paper roll Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required Check that the printe
422. pped the number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt is the number of waveforms that have been acquired since the parameter was added Statistical Processing for Each Period Determines the period of the displayed waveform from the oldest data measures the selected parameters for automated measurement on the data within the period and performs statistical processing The period is determined in the same fashion as the period for the waveform parameter You can select whether to apply the period of the specified waveform to all waveforms or determine the period for each waveform CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 Apply the period of the specified waveform to all relevant CH1 CH2 and Math1 waveforms and perform statistical processing for the DL1620 Own Determine the period for each relevant waveform and perform statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest data of the displayed waveform in blocks of periods It can not be used with the 1 cycle mode at the same time In addition the following waveform parameters are not measured For waveforms whose period is measured Avg Freq average frequency Avg Period average period PISN pulse count Int1XY area Int2XY area and Delay For other waveforms Int1XY area Int2XY area and Delay Note Statistical processing for each period is not possible on automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas described in
423. ps when the specified number of waveforms is acquired Executing Aborting GO NO GO Operation The operation starts when you press the Exec soft key Waveform acquisition is automatically stopped when the determination is complete To forcibly stop the operation press START STOP or press the Abort soft key Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation Operates according to the settings in the File menu the Copy menu or the Image Save menu File Name when Action is Set to Save to File or Image Save The file is saved with AutoName under the File menu or the Image Save menu For details see section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium or section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Notes when Performing GO NO GO Determination The determination results the number of Successes and failures are displayed All keys other than START STOP and the Abort soft key are disabled during the determination When GO NO GO determination is executed the trigger mode is automatically changed to Single Determination is not possible when the acquisition mode is set to Average 9 46 IM 701610 01E 9 10 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones lt For a discription of this function see page 1 33 gt Relevant Keys O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Mode 1 Press GO NO GO 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the GO NO GO determination mode settin
424. pt Control the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L using communication commands Refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701610 17E Log Displays the log of errors GO NO GO determinations and action on trigger events that occurred on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Up to the 30 newest incidents are logged DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L information Displays the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L model the presence absence of options the ROM version firmware version etc Link View the Web page of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L 13 27 uodo d9ej190 U JOUIEYIA a 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Operating Environment Computer Environment Computer Computer running Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Microsoft Windows XP Professional OS Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Microsoft Windows XP Professional Internal memory 64 MB or more recommended Communication port Ethernet communication port that supports 10BASE T or 10O0BASE TX Use this communication port to connect the computer to the network Display Display supported by the OS indicated above with a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher Mouse or pointing device Mouse or pointing device supported by the OS indicated above Files required for the Web browser The
425. py to Infornat iona Comment Built in g OFF PN 8 Press the USB soft key to select USB Selecting the Type 9 Press the Format soft key to display the menu used to select the output command type Copy to Format Color a a Comment Select USB ESC P ON 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired command type COPY Copy to ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCLS BJ USB Setting the Color 11 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Comments 12 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears on the screen 13 Enter the comment string according to the procedure given in section 4 1 Setting the Resolution When Format is Set to BJ 14 Press the Resolution soft key to display the resolution menu COPY Copy to Format Color a Resolution fa Comment Select USB BJ ON 180dpi 15 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to 180 dpi 300 dpi 360 dpi and 600 dpi to set the resolution Ee Copy to Format Color 160dpi Net Print BJ ON Executing Hard Copy 16 Press COPY to output a hard copy of the screen Press COPY again to stop the output 360dpi 600dpi 10 7 e eq Us919S JO nd no 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Option Explanation On the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L you can print the screen image data to a USB printer via the USB interface You can also print the screen image to a network printer via the Ethernet network when the Ethernet interface option is ins
426. r OSY Key Po fe Shift Operation Po Shift Operation s Shift Operation ACQ menu Same as left MATH menu COPY DISPLAY menu ENHANCED menu FILE menu GO NOGO menu HISTORY menu Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left PRESET menu Same as left Same as left POSITION menu CLEAR TRACE RESET SHIFT condition TRIGMODE menu CURSOR menu Same as left p Same as left a Same as left ro o Same as left s Same as left to o Sameasteft u SIMPLE menu Same as left Same as left CH1 menu CH2 menu CH3 menu C J L T V xX Y CH4 menu A Same as left Return Enter Same as left Same as left Escape Same as left Back Space Same as left Same as left Return Enter Select Back Space Tab Space Bar SETUP lt gt MISC menu HELP Q m S lt m O x lt p O c ai 1 oO D 5 D a Pa o tx x Caps Lock Same as left gy N IM 701610 01E Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard Select Soft key1 Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Select Soft key4 Select Soft key5 Select Soft key6 Select Soft key7 START STOP Increment V Div Increment T Div PECENE Decrement V Div Decrement T Div i Cursor to the left Jogshuttle down Jogshuttle up Return Enter Select Decrement V Div Jogshuttle down Decrement T Div Cursor to the left Cursor to the rig
427. r for video signal input into Channel 1 Settings and functions are as follows Video Signal Formats with which the TV Trigger can be Used NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF and 1080 60p Selecting the Field No Field 1 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse and the line start at the same time 2 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse starts 1 2H H horizontal scan time after the line starts X Detects both of the above types of field IM 701610 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Selecting the Line No Line A trigger is activated at the beginning of the selected line e NTSC 5 to 1054 Field 1 starts at line No 5 Field 2 starts at line No 268 Line Nos in cannot be set phe Waman A A laleal lalstelzisl9 l10l11l12l13l14l15l16l17l18l19 20 21 22 524525 526 1049 1050 1051 gt 1054 Line No Field 2 Line No gt 26 esclesslesalessieceiz67i26sie69270le7 tle7alersle7ale7sie7ele77le78le7sle60 281ee2iessesdlees nn e PAL SECAM 2 to 1251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 315 Line Nos in cannot be set Field 1 i Il 2 Be lle oA Be AG Line No 621 622 623 624 625 626 gt 632 1246 gt 1250 1251 Bbunebbiy 2 Field 2 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Line No
428. r is installed Servicing is required Servicing is required Press START STOP to stop the waveform acquisition Cannot undo because the data were cleared during initialization or auto setup Press START STOP to stop the waveform acquisition Wait until data output is complete Wait until the hard copy completes Turn OFF the compression setting Servicing is required Unload the files Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval Pressing Copy again aborts the operation Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu Set at least one search pattern not to X Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu Aborted when Math Display is turned Off Check that there is at least one period of waveform within the measurement range Release the lock through Store Detail Reference Section 10 1 10 1 10 4 4 5 4 2 4 3 4 5 4 4 Chapter 10 10 2 10 3 10 2 10 2 8 9 11 5 9 5 9 3 4 4 IM 701610 01E Code 776 T11 778 779 780 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 845 846 857 858 859 Message The File item is inappropriate Select Waveform Snap or Measure Executing file Load Save or Format Abort or wait until it is complete Hard copying or saving image Abort or wait until it is complete Specified data does not exist Execute the analysis Failed to process statistics The target waveform data may not exist
429. r than Through is selected the computation is performed on the smoothed value Smoothing 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 5 Press SELECT to select ON Operation Source Scale center Sensitivity Unit ih Smoothing OFF 1 z L The moving average is determined every five data samples and the waveform is displayed based on the results Since this process is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory it can be executed even when the waveform acquisition is stopped This smoothing process has the following frequency characteristics with respect to the sample rate The 3 dB point is at approximately 13 of the sample rate 0 dB 3 dB Attenuation f Sample Frequency Frequency 9 41 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e 9 8 Phase Shifted Display Relevant Keys lt For a discription of this function see page 1 24 gt Dy N O TRIG D SEARCH oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Operating Procedure Explanation 9 42 Setting the Computation Mode 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press MATH 3 Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF These soft keys are not displayed on the DL1620 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel whose phase is to be shifted 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the shifted time Eraslan 14 04 50 E a Norma
430. reated The header file is used when analyzing the waveform on aPC The header file cannot be opened using this instrument For the header file format see Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format The file extension is WVF The file extension of the header file is HDR e When saving waveform data in binary format a header file is automatically created with the extension HDR When the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L is used to copy delete change filenames or change file ownership of waveform data files files with the extension WVF the header files are automatically updated to reflect the changes Do not delete the header file only or the waveform data file only as this may cause a system malfunction ASCII The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument e The file extension is CSV Float The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in 32 bit floating point format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument e The file extension is FLD Data Size The following list shows the data size when the record length is set to 100 kwords waveform data of CH1 to CH4 are saved and Math1 and Math2 are turned OFF Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 800 K 100 kwords 32 x 4 channels x number of history
431. remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D o e2 SIMPLE ENHANCED a cs V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY C QO o s Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Cursor FILE Setup Wavef orn Snap Measure Cursor Image Utility Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the File Name Comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note When saving the results of the cursor measurement values Comment is not available 11 28 Explanation 11 9 Saving the Cursor Measurement Values Saving the File 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Save FILE ke F Canceling the Saving Operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec aFile ListaFile Nam PC_Card 0000 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Propertie
432. ress SELECT to lock the data Press SELECT again to release the lock Store Detail Date Time Comment Lock Store 1 00 12 01 18 05 40 i Store 2 00 12 01 18 05 50 L____ Store 3 00 12 01 18 07 07 L____ ie 1 Recall 2 fRecall 3 pee 1 pee IM 701610 01E 4 15 Str Rcli SETUP a tee 2 tore 3 Store tee 00712701 Detail suoieiadQ uowwoy gt 4 4 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters Explanation Items that are Stored Stores all information that you entered using the soft key menu or jog shuttle menu START STOP and the ON OFF conditions of channels Selecting the Storage Destination of the Setting Parameters You can store the setting parameters to three memory locations Store 1 through Store 3 If the setting parameters are already stored to the selected number the previous data is overwritten However an error message is displayed if the data is locked Selecting the Setting Parameters to be Recalled Select the setting parameters that are stored in the three memory locations Recall 1 through Recall 3 You can only select memory locations that have setting parameters stored Note The stored setting parameters are not cleared even if you initialize the settings on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L A waveform stops loading when its setting parameters are recalled 4 16 IM 701610 01E 4 5 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP RESET SELECT
433. ress the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort FILE oad Exec Snap soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Clearing the Waveform IM 701610 01E Follow steps 1 3 to select snapshot data waveforms 4 Pressing the Unload soft key displays a menu used to select the waveform to be cleared File Item a Py a Save Load Utility Snap 5 Press the Trace soft key and press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be cleared FILE Trace nload Exec All Snap _Unioad B ER ii ER _ faa rr D pE Y a 6 Pressing the Unload Exec soft key clears the selected waveform Unioad_ FILE Trace Nload Exec All Snap J 11 23 wnip 8BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bunes Ey 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Explanation You can take snap shots of the waveform and save the image to the file You can also load the snapshot waveform Data Size Approx 40 Kbytes File Extension The file extension is SNP The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal wavef
434. rning X Do you want to install and run Microsoft Common Dialog Control signed on 5 24 2000 6 47 AM and distributed by Microsoft Corporation Publisher authenticity verified by YenSign Commercial Software Publishers LA Caution Microsoft Corporation asserts that this content i safe You should only install view this content if you trust Microsoft Corporation to make that assertion Always trust content from Microsoft Corporation Yes More Info Security Warning Do you want to install and run Microsoft Runtime signed on 12 2000 4 07 AM and distributed by Microsoft Corporation Publisher authenticity werified by YenSign Commercial Software Publishers LA Caution Microsoft Corporation asserts that this content iz safe You should only installview this content if you trust Microsoft Corporation to make that assertion Always trust content from Microsoft Corporation jes More Info IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 13 12 Using the Web Server Function Using the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L without Connecting to the Internet If Msvbvm60 d11 cmdlgjp dlland comdlg32 ocare not installed on the computer when using the Web server function for the first time install the files beforehand according to the following procedure 7 Download the following file from the YOKOGAWA Web site http Awww yokogawa com tm Bu DLsoft web htm YOKOGAWA T amp M Web Runtime ytmwrun exe Data size Approx
435. rocessing wei cscssesuuiescasderenetacenreeesdaadevenres 1 22 9 19 Statistical Processing for Each Period 4 1 23 9 24 Statistical Processing of Historical Data 1 21 1 23 9 24 Status Messages vrisctictiertadsuses siseeenannaserviadememiarenasdd 15 2 Sragen 16 7 Storage Medii arrenca naan a eee 10 10 Storage Medium Saves and Loads cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 34 TOMO cechar o e auehorn aauitnataaanonk 1 32 4 15 STP shielded twisted pair Cable cccccccssesseeeeeeeees 13 1 Supne Masks e a r SR 13 5 SUDUACHING ncira N 9 33 SUHT ACUO M esea a T N a orcadunncaventas 1 24 SUFERE sor a S ianancanhesessaqizenaee iii System CONPFIQUIATION cece ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaaeeeeeeees 1 1 System Operation Errors cccccsssceeeccsessseeeeseeeeeseeeesesees 15 7 T Eo amen mies ERASE a OR 8 Re A 5 18 5 19 NOTIN ede Meseanncateceoateseasaxeenanani E a EERE 13 3 Threshold Level oreina a E REA 12 2 Treshold SEWING scrasa tatana eani ia 5 16 TUNA WAN orare a A 10 14 IM 701610 01E TUM aI VW INGOW estaren vac E 10 14 TLV E E A E te esct ia eect see esce a ece cane 3 14 3 15 TIMEAXIS isoctcacs teas ane ads O 1 3 16 4 App 1 TINE QU n 13 10 13 13 13 22 HUMEDIY KIO paeen suesiunaniuat abate 2 3 IMIG DAS Ss cicio a a a aaia 1 3 5 16 Translucent Mode nosennnonennnnenensrnreeerrrerrrreeerrrrerrrreerereee 8 11 POV kisenan E E 13 27 TRO DAN GICatOr sia a Saationssedants 2 3
436. rs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active IM 701610 01E App 5 gt x D D 5 2 x Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length DL1640L Record length 1 kword When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Setting Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length S s words S s words S s words S s words 20 1k 20 1k 20 1k 20 1k 50 1k 50 1k 50 1k 50 1k 100 1k 100 1k 100 1k 100 1k 200 1k 200 1k 200 1k 200 1k 500 1k 500 1k 500 1k 500 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 2k 1k 2k 1k 2k 1k 2k 1k 5k 1k 5k 1k 5k 1k 5k 1k 10k 1k 10k 1k 10k 1k 10k 1k 20k 1k 20k 1k 20k 1k 20k 1k 50k 1k 50k 1k 50k 1k 50k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 200k 1k 200k 1k 200k 1k 200k 1k 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 1M 1k 2M 1k 2M 1k 2M 1k 2M 1k 5M 1k 5M 1k 5M 1k 5M 1k 10M 1k 10M 1k 10M 1k 10M 1k 20M 1k 20M 1k 20M 1k 20M 1k 50M 1k 50M 1k 50M 1k 50M 1k 100M 1k 100M 1k 100M 1k 100M 1k 200M 1k 200M 1k 100M 500 200M 1k 200M 400 500M 1
437. ruments Web Service Microsoft Internet Explorer l Ee x File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Bak gt A Qsearch i Favorites 4 B amp H Address http OOOO O ea YOKOGAWA Test and Measurement z Measurement Instruments Web Service Contents DL 1640 phe woervwvwyv uw ev www a a SS DL 16401 aran Eme ee x RKC 13 31 uodo ddej190 U JOUIEYLA a 13 12 Using the Web Server Function 13 32 Installing Files Required for the Web Browser e Using the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and the Computer While Connected to the Internet When you use the Web server function for the first time the files required for the Web browser are installed automatically from the Microsoft Web site If Msvbvm60 d11 cmdlgjp dll and comdlg32 ocx are already installed on the computer when using the Web server function for the first time step 7 is not required re When the data capture measurement trend or command script function of the Web server function are used for the first time three files Msvbvm60 d1 cmdlgjp dlland comdlg32 otmre automatically downloaded from the Microsoft Web site and installed on the computer At this point a dialog box allowing you to confirm the installation appears Click Yes You may need to restart your computer during the installation After the installation is completed successfully proceed to step 9 Security Wa
438. s 14 2 f 10 11 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired item Back Focus 9 9 7 Select 9 4 i5 Dialog 3 A 3 Shadou 9 9 9 Line 5 B 5 a a Waveform Others Pressing SELECT displays the color setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the color Pressing SELECT closes the color setting menu Pressing ESC closes the dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items In a similar fashion set the colors for the Waveform and Others items Snap1 Snap f5 4 fi Snap3 fJ f5 4 Snap4 E Grid 8 8 8 Cursor f3 3 A3 Marker f5 i5 5 Setting the Brightness 5 Pressing the Intensity soft key displays the brightness setting menu raph Colo MISC raph Colo MISC Mode Intensity Turn the jog shuttle to set the brightness of the menu screen In a similar fashion set the brightness for Waveform Snap Grid and Cursor items IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness Screen Color You can set arbitrary colors for the following items The colors are set using R red G green and B blue ratios from O to 15 Menu Screen Fore Selected menu item Back Background Focus Selected cursor Select Selected menu Dialog Dialog box Shadow Background color of the selected menu Line Lines on the menu screen Waveform CH1 to CH4 Waveform color or CH1 to CH2 for t
439. s The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data The cursor measurement values can be saved in CSV format CSV file extension to a floppy disk a Zip disk or PC card A CSV file is a comma separated format file The CSV file is one of the common file formats used to exchange data between spreadsheet and database applications The data that are saved are the cursor measurement values This function is valid for cursor measurements the value measured with the cursor is displayed on screen using the Cursor Exec soft key when the cursor type is Vertical History Note An error occurs if the cursor type is something other than Vertical History or if a cursor measurement the value measured with the cursor is displayed on screen was not performed Notes when Saving the Results of the Cursor Measurement Values The restrictions are as follows Up to 82000 the number of items that are turned ON data points before the point at which the save operation is executed are saved However the data points that are saved are limited to those that are acquired after fixing T div V div and Measure settings e Output example DL1600 x1 X2 DX 1 DX S S S Hz 2 000E 02 2 000E 02 4 000E 02 2 500E 01 Y1 C1 Y1 C2 Y1 C3 Y1 C4 V V V V Max 8 333E 02 1 042E 00 4 167E 02 4 167E 02 Oldest data Min 2 083E 00 1 021E 00 4 167E 02 2 083E 02 Avg 1 499E 00 2 481E 02 1 086E 02 1 589E
440. s accordingly either by sounding the buzzer saving the waveform data to internal memory or disk printing out the screen image option or sending a mail Ethernet interface option In addition the determination results can be output by an external signal IM 701610 01E 1 33 suonoun 1 7 Other Useful Functions Displayed Data Output Functions lt Chapter 10 gt You use these functions to print the screen image to the optional built in printer or an external USB printer or a network printer to save the image data to the storage medium internal flash memory floppy disk Zip disk PC card or network drive Ethernet interface option Also the instrument can display a thumbnail miniature sample of the screen data saved to the storage medium This is useful for checking the contents of saved image data files Floppy Disk Drive Zip Drive or PC Card Interface DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Printer Note The instrument provides a function which enables you to use the keyboard displayed on the screen or the USB keyboard to enter and display a comment If you enter a comment which indicates the contents of the displayed waveforms before printing a hard copy it will help you to distinguish between different printouts Storage Medium Saves and Loads lt Chapter 11 gt 1 34 The instrument standard configuration includes a floppy disk drive Zip drive or PC card and the optional configuration includes an Ethernet co
441. s and stores AA Moves and stores BB When string HH is confirmed next When string JJ is confirmed next Stores HH Stores JJ Moves and stores GG Moves and stores HH Moves and stores AA Moves and stores FF Moves and stores GG Moves and stores AA Moves and stores BB Deletes AA IM 701610 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e Recall Note that the string that is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard is overwritten when a string is recalled using the procedure in step 1 below 1 When you press the 9 soft key repeatedly the eight most recently confirmed and stored strings are displayed one at a time from newest to oldest in the keyboard entry box If the Y soft key is pressed again after the eighth string the display will return to the first string 2 Make appropriate corrections to the recalled string and confirm it according to steps 1 to 4 that were described above in Entering a Character String and Operation to Temporarily Store Character Strings At this point the confirmed string is temporarily stored Keys other than Characters DEL Deletes the character on the cursor INS Switches between insert and overwrite modes The indicator is lit when in insert mode SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters suoieiadQ uowwoy gt CAPS Toggles uppercase and lowercase characters Number of Characters and Types Available Num
442. s slow e When printing accumulated waveforms using the optional built in printer they are printed using two tones e Only the latest waveform can be output to an external printer e Ifthe waveform acquisition is forcibly stopped by pressing START STOP the accumulation is temporarily suspended When the acquisition is restarted the display is cleared and accumulation continues Clearing Accumulated Waveforms You can clear accumulated waveforms by pressing CLEAR TRACE IM 701610 01E 8 7 Turning the Translucent Mode ON OFF Relevant Keys NAP OO HELE kuer a mse eano G0 PHASE ee 200 someon aca stanr sr0P HORIZONTAL fv neo O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY 2a Operating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Te DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine y G AY ON ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the Translucent soft key to selectO ON or OFF _ DISPLAY_ anslucent Mapping eo OFF Auto When this is turned to ON the pop up menu becomes translucent The contents underneath the pop up menu can be seen g D p D lt Explanation Translucent OFF Translucent ON BALATA 19 00 17 E Mi a Soppa E Cod tbo Ct Cy Cy foretold Cr oe Cen ee Cee Coy nez Coe Cer Ce en Cry Ly mea CT Ce Ce LERH ne A mii bi cH1 FOI Ciiirt Tat din ti Ege CHI 2 a
443. s that you can save high resolution data exceeding 8 bits in a high resolution format When the high resolution mode is ON the record length is halved For the DL1620 DL1640 8 Mwords gt 4 Mwords for the DL1640L 32 Mwords gt 16 Mwords 7 6 IM 701610 01E 7 5 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function see pages 1 7 and 1 16 gt NAP SNAP HELP III LII Soo A TM MATH PHAS MENU M X Y ENU Gerur _ PISPLA COPY mace SAvE o SHEET TRIGGER 0 SEARCH O TRIG D 2 aje V DIV TIME sDIV o a ACTION DELAY OO OEE SB Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701610 01E 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Repetitive soft key to select ON or OFF Record Mode fe Count i Res ModeRepetitive Time Base Length 1M Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext You can select whether or not to use repetitive sampling If the repetitive sampling mode is ON the sampling rate for certain T div settings is set to 500 MS s or above 200 MS s or above when the high resolution mode is ON If repetitive sampling mode is OFF the maximum available sampling rate is 200 MS s or 100 MS s when the high resolution mode is ON and the instrument will add interpolation to the displayed waveform if the number of display points is less than 500 However even if the repetitive sampling is turned OFF the mode is set to repetitive sampling depending on the time axis setting
444. same error occurs this instrument cannot format the medium Check using another medium If the same message still appears servicing is required Check the file Check using another medium If the same message still appears servicing is required Check the medium Check the floppy disk s format type Files stored on other models DL AG series cannot be loaded Execute after accessing is finished Press START STOP to stop thewaveform acquisition Check the file Upgrade the ROM version upper compatible Check the presence of data to be stored Check whether the data file in a format that is supported Change the file extension Turn OFF the P P compression Reference Section Chapter 11 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 4 15 3 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnoIL 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code 700 701 702 703 704 705 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 741 743 744 745 746 747 751 752 753 766 767 768 769 770 T71 772 773 775 15 4 Message Illegal printer head position Paper empty Printer overheated Printer overheated Printer is not installed Printer time out The printer has malfunctioned Printer error Turn the power of the printer from OFF to ON Printer offline Out of paper Printer is in use Cannot detect printer Turn ON the printer Check connectors No files supporting the thumbnail dis
445. selected from the following three types INT Internal clock signal EXT IN Clock signal input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal When EXT IN is Selected Input a clock signal to the EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN terminal on the rear panel The clock signal must conform to the specifications given below Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Maximum Permissible Input Voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms 10 kHz or less Frequency Range 40 Hz to 5 MHz continuous clock only Minimum Input Level 0 3Vp p for the DL1640 DL1640L 0 1Vp p for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 1Vp p for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ and 28 pF Threshold Level 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1640 DL1640L 1 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1620 with the 1 V range selected 10V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1620 with the 10 V range selected Sampling Jitter 10 ns or less Minimum Pulse Width 10 ns or more for both High and Low levels Input Terminal DL1640 DL1640L DL1620 Rear Panel Front Panel EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN lt 40Vpk 1M 1MQ 28PF lt 40Vpk 1MQ CAUTION If a clock signal exceeding the above maximum permissible input voltage is input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN terminal damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result When Sampling Using an External Clock e The clock signal must be continuous No burst signal is allo
446. sent operational details Briefly explains the significance and use of the unit s controls connectors and screen displays Includes page references to help you find detailed information quickly Presents safety precautions and explains how to install connect up and switch on the unit Also explains how to connect the probes and how to set the date Explains basic operations including acquisition start stop automatic setup parameter reset snapshots trace clearing and calibration Explains settings related to vertical voltage and horizontal time axes Vertical axis settings include channel on off input coupling probe attenuation and voltage sensitivity Explains how to set up and use triggers to control timing of waveform acquisition Includes description of trigger modes trigger types trigger source and trigger level Explains acquisition parameters acquisition mode sampling mode record length history and use of overlapping accumulated waveform display Explains display format interpolation zoom X Y display graticule and other display related parameters Explains cursor based measurements automatic measurements statistical processing mathematical operations and GO NO GO determinations Explains how to print screen data to internal printer or to a printer connected through the USB interface and how to store screen display to the storage medium Explains how to save and reload waveform data
447. set the start point of the measurement range Set the measurement end point of Area1 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle action to T Range2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end point of the measurement range Set the measurement range of Area2 in a similar fashion by pressing the T Range3 T Range4 soft key Stopped 339 T SOOkS S 2ZMs div lt lt Mainf 10k gt gt 2600 11 08 16 34 10 J fick Normal CH1 10 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Uzdi v DC Full Edge CH1 F 11667E 00 User 1 43 44E 03 3 User 3 2 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Selecting the Target Waveform of Distal Mesial and Proximal Points 22 Press ESC 23 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 24 Press the Trace soft key to display the target waveform selection menu 25 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform to select the target waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Next 2 72 Unit for Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Dist Prox 26 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 27 Press the Dist Prox soft key to select the unit for distal mesial and proximal points Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Distal Medial and Proximal 28 Press the Nex
448. set the time axis so that the sampling rate is greater than 200 MS s high resolution mode ON 100 MS s Under this mode the oscilloscope produces a single waveform by taking samples over several periods of a repetitive signal so that the sampling rate appears higher than it actually is An apparent sample rate of up to 50 GS s can be used Furthermore even in the real time sampling mode if the sample rate exceeds 200 MS s high resolution mode ON 100 MS s due to the time axis and the displayed record length settings the sampling mode automatically changes to repetitive sampling There are two repetitive sampling methods sequential sampling in which a signal is sampled sequentially at a fixed interval and random sampling in which a signal is sampled at random to produce a waveform This instrument uses a random sampling method which also enables observation of the waveform up to the trigger point Time Axis Setting and Roll Mode Display If the time axis is set within a certain range see Appendix 1 then the display will not be updated by trigger anymore update mode but the mode will switch to roll mode when new data is acquired In roll mode the oldest data is deleted and the waveform shifts from right to left on the screen A waveform can be observed in the same way as it is recorded ona pen recorder This mode is useful when you are observing a signal which repeats or which fluctuates slowly This mode is also useful when you w
449. sible to zoom a power spectrum of 1 k FFT points A power spectrum with 10 k FFT points can be zoomed to a maximum of 10x 8 16 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function lt For a description of this function see page 1 26 gt Relevant Keys ey SHOT P HELP e oe a MENU __ MENU SETUP oer DISPLAY COPY MAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT vertical O TRIG D D o2 vV DIV TIME DIV o3 ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION o sora Operating Procedure When Performing a Edge Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key displays the search method menu Type a 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searchea Setup Pattern Exec Edge x2 000di4 No Match 4 Press the Edge soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto Scroll Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Condition Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn 5 i the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the item or changes the selected item Level Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard fa Polarity Hysteresis Count Start Point 8 17 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Source 6 Turn the jog sh
450. soft key to the desired frequency to set HF rejection ON or OFF SIMPLE Source e Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis gHold Off us CH1 0 000 UIF ft AC nim z 0 08 Setting the Hysteresis 9 Press the Hysteresis soft key to select A4 or ZV Setting the Hold Off 10 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time An edge trigger is generated when the trigger source signal crosses a specified level Selecting the Trigger Source Select from the following list of choices CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1620 Ext EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel or EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1620 see section 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Line power signal see section 6 7 Generating Trigger on the Power Signal SIMPLE Bbunebbiyp 2 Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div You can also reset the trigger level to the current offset voltage with one key operation Setting the Trigger Slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level fa
451. splays the save setting menu FILE File Item Data Type a a a a Save Load Unload Waveforn Binary 7 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu File ListjaFile Name Trace Range Length bs es 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel you wish to save CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Selecting the Range of the Waveform to be Saved 9 Pressing the Range soft key displays the save range selection menu 10 Press one of the Main to Z1 amp Z2 soft keys to select the range of waveforms to be saved Selecting the Compression Format 11 Press the Compression soft key to select PP or Decim Selecting Compressed Data Length 12 Turn the jog dial to select the length of the compressed data If you select Auto the entire display record length is saved Selecting the Destination Medium Directory 13 Pressing the File List soft key displays the file list dialog box 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with parentheses Path PC_Card Space 5312512 byte File Name Flash_Men PC_Card NetWork l lt _Restore lt old lt RECYCLED 2602 07 02 10 19 2602 06 24 11 29 1999 16 03 16 21 20027 07712 18 34 R U 2602 07 12 18 34 R U 2602 07712 18 31 RU 2602 07 12 18 31 R U 2002707712 13 27 R U 20027 07712 13 27 RU 2002707712 13 24 R U z D 0001 0001 0000 0000 CYCLE0006 CYCLE0006 CYCLE9605 agag2 zj zj
452. state H L and X is met or not met When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the window condition of each channel is met or not met ENHANCED aTimetuS Window figHold Off us Type idth Type fa rs et Patter Level Width Pulse lt T Coup ing 0 0075 OFF DN 0 08 Setting the Hold Off 15 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 26 IM 701610 01E 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Explanation IM 701610 01E Pulse gt T When the time during which the status pattern is met is longer than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated when the condition changes Pulse lt T When the time during which the status pattern is met is shorter than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated T1 lt PLS lt T2 When the time during which the status pattern is met is between the two specified pulse widths the trigger is activated T1 lt PLS lt T2 When the time during which the status pattern is met is not between the two specified pulse widths the trigger is activated Time Out The trigger is activated when the time during which the status pattern is met becomes longer than the specified pulse width The point at which the trigger is activated differs between Pulse gt T and Time Out as indicated in the figure b
453. surements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas lt For a description of this function see page 1 23 gt Relevant Keys NAP NAP HELP MENU __ MENU SETUP oe DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT HORZONTAL v neo O TRIG D D smPue ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ce Operating Procedure 1 Press MEASURE 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON feT Range2 1 2 5 600di Press the ON soft key to set the automated measurement mode MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics 5 900d i T Range2 5 600di Selecting the Measurement Parameter 4 Press the Item Setup soft key Dual Area is displayed at the right end of the soft key menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod f T Rangei Iten Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON f6T Range2 a 5 000di 5 Press the Dual Area soft key to turn it ON To return to the usual automated measurement screen press the Dual Area soft key again to turn it OFF CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 vessore e Ces msc Teano acl mam me Gea sre ACTION DELAY P P co Freq AYgFreq o Max 0 Period AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTY Avg Fall Int2TY 5 Rms Width Intixy Sdey 6 Width Int2xY High Duty Low Bursti co 0Shot B
454. t IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing an Auto Scroll Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate the shift mode 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH Type fa 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 2 000di4 No Match E 4 Press the Auto Scroll soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel uto Scrol ipSearched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Selecting the Scroll Direction 5 Press the Direction soft key to set the scrolling direction Type Direction Result Z1 Mag Window Xx 2 5 Auto Scroll lt lt 22 22 Mag x 2 5 Setting the Search Results Display Position When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 6 Press the Results Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Type Direction Result Window x 2 5 Auto Scroll lt lt 22 fw 22 Mag x 2 5 Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 7 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 8 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 Setting the Scroll Speed 9 Press the Speed soft key then use the jog shuttle to set the scroll speed from 1 to 7 Executing the S
455. t lt Molin 3 T Y 9 1797E 66 Y The Rectangular window is effective for transient signals such as impulse waves which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning window allows continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is effective for continuous signals The frequency resolution of the Hanning window is higher than that of the Flattop window However the level accuracy of the spectrum of the Flattop window is higher than that of the Hanning window When the waveform being analyzed is a continuous type signal select the appropriate window that suits the application FFT computation generates 1000 or 10000 measurement data points but only half points are displayed on the screen Sine woe AAE gt t FFT Function iS Hanning Window a a a gt Flattop Window L Window Integral Rect sindon Nagi Dae m SS AAN REN A Rectangular Window W t u t u t T Hanning Window Hanning W indow l l l l l l l l A A U t Step Function Power Spectrum Wit 0 5 0 5c0s 2n W t 0 54 0 46 cos 2n ty sin 2n 1 20T T 2n 1 2t T When the complex result of FFT computation is G R jl the power spectrum can be expressed as follows Power Spectrum 10 lo
456. t 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 29 Press the Distal Mesial or Proximal soft key 30 Set the distal point mesial point and proximal point using the jog shuttle Setting the High and Low Points 31 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 32 Press the High Low soft key to select Auto or MaxMin 9 29 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Explanation You can perform automated measurement of various measurement parameters waveform parameters on the data retrieved in the acquisition memory over two areas You can also perform computation on the measurement parameter waveform parameter values that are determined in the two areas Waveforms Excluded from Measurements The following waveform measurements are not possible in the automated measurement of waveform parameters e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Automated Measurement Mode ON Performs computation between arbitrary items in Areal and Area2 Statistics Performs statistical processing on the computed results between arbitrary items in Areal and Area2 See section 9 3 Statistical Processing Note Statistical processing for each period Cycle Statistics is not possible Selecting the High Low Assignment Method High Low High indicates the 100 level in measurements such as the rise or fall time And Low indicates the 0 leve
457. t Keys SEAR CH O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Changing the File Attributes 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Delete soft key ka 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Utility FIE Delete Exec IM 701610 01E 11 31 wnip BHe10 S By wo pue o eeg Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Note By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp ps jpg or png extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list lik 2002 06 24 19 19 23 Stopped 26 Path PC_card Space 5955584 byte File Nane Flash_Men PC_Card 1 NetWork 1 lt old gt 2002 06 24 11 29 lt RECYCLED gt 1999 16 03 16 21 CYCLE0003 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 16 R W CYCLE0002 TIF 38574 2002 06 24 19 09 R U CYCLE0001 TIF 38574 20602706724 19 07 R W CYCLE
458. t Point and the search start point described above are separated by an interval larger than the specified interval the search start point is set back in units of the specified interval to a point so that the interval between the Start Point and the search start point is within the specified interval The search start point must be to the right of the start point in this case Within the hysteresis range of Clock CH the rising or falling edge cannot be checked Detection Reference Point Thr Upper Thr Lower B A A A A Interval h Start Point J RENCE SAAE ON B Interval 2 Start Point Detection Reference Point i Thr Upper Thr Lower B Af A A Interval l C A A B Interval 2 A A C lt Interval A Search Start Point Start Point Originally this position is the search start point However the position is moved because the interval between the Start Point and search start point is greater than Interval Defermination During a Parallel Pattern Search The hysteresis points are normally evaluated as true conforming to the specified status High Level Hysteresis A B Always Determined as True 8 32 IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Display Position for Pulse Width Searches The position of the waveform displayed in the zoom screen will change in the following manner depending on the Type setting An example in which the polarity is H is shown bel
459. t e External trigger External clock input terminal Use a BNC cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e Trigger output terminal Same as the above external trigger input terminal e CH1 OUT connector Same as the above external trigger input terminal e RGB VIDEO OUT terminal Use a D Sub 15 pin VGA shielded cable Serial RS 232 interface connector Use an RS 232 shielded cable and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e USB PERIPHERAL connector Use a USB cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e USB interface connector Use a USB cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e GO NO GO output terminal Use a GO NOGO cable YOKOGAWA model 366973 sold separately Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e Ethernet connector Use a Ethernet cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side e Power connectors for the probes Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side Immunity 1 Complying standard EN61326 Industrial environment apply for 701605 7
460. t from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning the HF Rejection ON OFF Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Pattern Trigger When the trigger type setting is changed the pattern trigger setting is no longer valid However if the pattern trigger is selected again the previous settings are enabled Even if the trigger mode is set to auto level mode the operation will be in auto mode Set the trigger status on all trigger sources If the channel selected is a clock channel select the trigger slope When activating the trigger in sync with the clock signal specify at least 1 ns for the pattern to setup and at least 1 ns for the hold time 6 23 Bbunebbiyp 2 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 9 gt Relevant Keys NAP ste HELP eee Oe outer oe SEARCH o T O TRIG D Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu 3 Press the Width soft key Setting the Width Type 4 Pressing the Width Type soft
461. t least 10 ns for both High and Low 1 As measured under standard operating conditions See section 16 11 after warmed up 2 1 digit may be unreliabel depending on the sampling 16 4 Display Item Display Screen Size Total Picture Elements Waveform Picture Elements Specifications 6 4 inch color TFT liquid crystal display 130 6 mm width x 97 0 mm height 640 x 480 dots 500 x 384 dots 1 The liquid crystal display LCD may contain a number of defective pixels Up to 40 pixels per million of the color LCD may be defective Therefore there may be a small number of lit or dead pixels on the LCD This is not a malfunction 16 5 Functions Acquisition Display Item Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode High resolution Mode Record Length Zoom Display Format Interpolation 16 4 Specifications Select from four modes Normal Averaging Envelope Select realtime or repetitive sampling Availability depends on time axis settings If combined with a filter improves the S N ratio up to a maximum of 13 bits DL1620 DL1640 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 8 Mwords DL1640L 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 4 Mwords 10 Mwords 32 Mwords Can zoom up to 2 time axis ranges of displayed waveform s 1 2 or 4 waveform windows Display samples using dot display sine interpolation linear interpolation or pulse interpolation IM 701610 01E Item Graticule Auxiliary Disp
462. ta acquisition is in progress and Stopped when it is stopped Waveform Acquisition State and the Number of Acquisitions Waiting for Trigger trigger wait state Pre pre trigger Post post trigger Value the number of waveforms acquired Display Position Zoom Position zi 22 Na S al Display Record Length lt Zooming Waveform gt Record Length Sample Rate Sampling Mode Varies depending on the T div and record length settings Normal Env Avg Real time sampling mode Norm Rep Repetitive sampling mode Avg Rep Repetitive sampling mode in the averaging mode T div Setting that has been Changed after Waveform Acquisition Trigger Level Display Format 1 2 and 4 windows are possible or 1 and 2 windows bor the DL1620 See section 8 1 Ground Level IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 2 3 Screens L Probe Attenuation V div Input Coupling and Bandwidth Limit Settings If a signal exceeding approximately 10 div is input the input coupling position overflow is indicated by a M Soft Key Menu N Trigger Level Trigger Mode Trigger Type and Trigger Source Settings O Internal Processing Status The current processing can be determined by the color of the Green Performing an operation power spectrum or overwriting a history waveform Yellow Performing an automatic parameter measurement or a search Red Sending e mail executing an FTP server function command or HTTP
463. talled For details see section 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer USB PERIPHERAL Connectors When connecting a USB printer to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L connect a USB cable to the USB PERIPHERAL connector There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors 12 3 4 Port 1 Port 2 Pin No Signal Name 1 Veus 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Printers that can be Used USB printers conforming to USB Printer Class Ver 1 0 that support the following output commands can be used Note Connect only the printers that are allowed For USB printers that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Format You can select the type of command that is output to the USB printer from the following list of choices ESC P e PCL5 LIPS3 e ESC P2 BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35V native commands 10 8 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Option Connection Procedure When connecting a USB printer directly connect the keyboard to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L with a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of the power ON OFF state of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L supports hot plug Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L connect the type B connector to the printer When the power switch is ON the printer is detected and enabled appro
464. tely for each channel although you are limited to a total of 12 parameters to display There are 27 parameters available for selection The measurments are made for data in the acquisition memory Statistical Processing Section 9 3 Statistical processing is performed on the automated measured values described above The following five statistics are determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters e Maximum value Max e Minimum value Min e Average value Avg e Standard deviation Sdv Number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt 2960 16 31 12 03 30 SS Norma 1 Stopped 98 500k5 S ZMs div Automatic Measurement Value of the Statistical Processing Parameters Statistical Processing Results The following three methods are available in the statistical processing Normal Statistical Processing While acquiring waveforms statistical processing is performed on all the waveforms acquired up to that point 1 22 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Statistical Processing for Each Period Divides the displayed waveform using a period that is automatically calculated and performs statistical processing on the measured values over the determined period Statistical processing is performed from the oldest measured data of the displayed waveform Example in which CH1 is selected as the target waveform for determining the period The paramet
465. the directory containing the selected file or directory Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e x Displays all the files on the medium 11 37 wnip BHe10 S ay Wo pue o e eq Buipeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 11 Copying Files 11 38 Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note You cannot copy files while the data acquisition is in progress If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error will not be copied Directory attributes cannot be changed If a file with the same name exists at the destination copying is not allowed You cannot copy the same files to another directory immediately after copying those files You must again select the files you wish to copy This function can not be used in conjunction with
466. the following cases e When the main window is not displayed e When the target waveform is not displayed The zone waveform does not exist The zone is being edited To perform other operations select Quit to exit zone editing Zones determination is not possible in the following cases e When the main window is not displayed e When the target waveform is not displayed e When the zone waveform does not exist Processing statistics To perform other operations abort the statistical processing Settings cannot be entered in the current trigger mode Set the trigger mode to Single Setting not allowed Invalid byte or bit Cannot be set when CS channels are not specified Corrective Action Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode Setting or set the trigger mode to a different mode Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the T div setting or shorten the record length Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the T div setting or shorten the record length Change the record length Change the record length Unload the files Abort the search Change the search conditions Abort the search Check the record number using Show Map History record is not created in the average mode repetitive sampling mode or roll mode Set the history Display Mode to One Set the history Display Mode to One Turn OFF the color Displ
467. the trigger position The measured value will display if the measurement is not possible IM 701610 01E 9 11 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM e 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function see page 1 22 gt Relevant Keys NAP NAP HELP vessore e Ces msc Teano acl mam me Gea sre MENU __ MENU SETUP oe DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT CHORON CRY O TRIG D S S a V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY ro Operating Procedure 1 Press MEASURE 2 Pressing the Mode soft key displays the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 1 2 5 000di Press the ON soft key to set the automated measurement mode MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Rang tatistics Btatistics 5 ead T Range2 5 000d i Selecting the Measurement Parameter 4 Pressing the Item Setup soft key displays the measurement parameter dialog box and the measurement channel dialog box MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di E ON Setup Setup ON feT Range2 5 600di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 P P co Freq o AvgFreg 0 Max c Period o AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTY Avg Fall Int2TY 5 Rms Width 3 Intix
468. tic Test Self Test Executing the Key Test 7 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 8 Press the Key Board soft key to be test ey Board Memory ZIP Printer f Accuracy est idii e self set 9 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the key test Test Item Soft Key ise Exec Key Board COPYTEST 10 Press all the keys To terminate the key test press ESC twice self Test MISC Testing the Soft Keys 11 Pressing the Soft Key soft key displays a keyboard 12 Using the jog shuttle and SELECT check that the characters on the keyboard can be entered correctly Pressing ESC twice clears the keyboard Executing the Printer Test 13 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 14 Press the Printer soft key to be test Key Board Memory rinter Accuracy est EE self set 15 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the printer test self Test MISC Test Item St Exec Printer Testing the FDD Zip Drive PC Card Drive or Accuracy 16 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 17 Press the soft key corresponding to the FDD ZIP PC CARD or Accuracy test Key Board Memory PC CARD Printer Accuracy st 18 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the selected test ie set Test Item st Exec Accuracy Note self Test MISC Insert a floppy disk a Zip disk or a PC card before executing the FDD Zi
469. ting the Target Waveform Trace From the Trace list select the target waveform for the trend display from the following Chan1 to Chan4 or Chan1 to Chan2 channels 1 to 2 for the DL1620 channels 1 to 4 Math1 to Math2 or Math1 only for the DL1620 computed waveforms Selecting the Waveform Parameter From the Parameter list select the target waveform parameter for the trend display Same expression as the communication command from the following For the meaning of the waveform parameters and the marker cursors see the explanations in sections 9 1 or 9 2 Parameter DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Menu Parameter DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L Menu None Not selected NOVERSHOOT OShot AVERAGE Avg NWIDTH Width AVGFREQ AvgFreq PERIOD Period AVGPERIOD AvgPriod PNUMBER Pulse BWIDTH1 Burst1 POVERSHOOT OShot BWIDTH2 Burst2 PTOPEAK P P DELAY Delay For a detailed setting use Delay Setup on the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L DUTYCYCLE Duty PWIDTH Width FALL Fall RISE Rise FREQUENCY Freq RMS Rms HIGH High SDEVIATION Sdev LOW Low TY1INTEG Inti TY MAXIMUM Max TY2INTEG Int2TY Marker M1 lt 2 gt M1 lt 2 gt XY1INTEG Intl XY marker cursor for cursor measurements MINIMUM Min XY2INTEG Int2XY Setting the Marker Position You can set the marker position if Marker M1 or Marker M2 is selected as the waveform parameter Setting the Conditions for Retrieving the Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Common Number of Displayed Measurement Values Data
470. tion Explanation 13 20 6 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action and select Send Mail 7 Select Mail Count to set a limit for the number of mails that are sent 8 Press the Exec soft key to start GO NO GO Note e The e mail destination is the Mail Address set in MISC NetWork Mail Setup For mail sent by this instrument the sender s address will be the same as the specified recipient address This function can be used in conjunction with 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Turn the Interval OFF only when using the action mail function Before uisng this function see section 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings You can send the trigger time and other information to the specified network mail address as the action of a GO NO GO determination or an action trigger Mail Settings For details see section 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Data Sent from the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L The following five items are sent e Acquisition status Start Stop acquisition counter Trigger time e GO NO GO success fail information Time of GO NO GO determination only see sections 9 9 and 9 10 e Cause of failure Time of GO NO GO determination only see sections 9 9 and 9 10 e Results of waveform parameter measurement Automatic measurement of waveform parameters see sections 9 2 and 9 4 and the time of GO NO GO determination by waveform p
471. tion Displaying and Saving the Screen Image Image Control The screen image of the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L can be displayed on the computer screen and then saved Updating the Screen Image Monitor amp Capture Play Click Play The update indicator becomes green and the screen image begins being updated at then specified display update interval see below Stop Click Stop to turn off the update indicator and stop the screen image updating Update The screen image is updated when you click Update Interval Set the display update Interval to 10 s 30 s or 60 s Update indicator IARE OONO Monitor and Capture li Play Stop Update Selecting the Display Color of the Screen Image Color Select the display Color from ON OFF Reverse and Gray For a description of the information displayed with each setting see the explanation in section 10 4 IARE Cantal Monitor and Capture li Play Stop Update Interval i Os ka Note The time it takes to display the screen image on the computer screen varies depending on the color setting In descending order of time the color settings are ON Reverse Gray and OFF Saving the Screen Image on the Computer Right click the screen image A shortcut menu appears as shown in the following figure Click Save Picture As to save the current screen image Open Link Open Link in Mew window Save Target As Pring Target Show Picture Save Picture 45 E mail Pi
472. tion conditions are changed The maximum number of files and directories that can be displayed in the File List is 2400 This function can not be used in conjunction with the FTP LPR client or Web server functions Waveform wvf and header hdr files are saved as file pairs If you set the filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the files become unloadable When loading waveform data of the maximum record length automatic measurement of waveform parameters and statistical processing cannot be performed on calculated waveforms is displayed for the measured results Files without the archive attribute are not displayed in the File List dialog box Data Format when Storing Multiple Records When multiple records are stored history memory for example the following data format is used ASCII Format CR LF is inserted between records lt Header gt Measured data 1 1 of CH1 Measured data 1 1 of CH2 Measured data 1 1 of CH3 e o e CR LF Measured data 1 2 of CH1 Measured data 1 2 of CH2 Measured data 1 2 of CH3 eee CR LF Record 1 Measured data 1 m of CH1 Measured data 1 m of CH2 Measured data 1 m of CH3 e e e CR LF CR LF Measured data 2 1 of CH1 Measured data 2 1 of CH2 Measured data 2 1 of CH3 e e e CR LF Measured data 2 2 of CH1 Measured data 2 2 of CH2 Measured data 2 2 of CH3 e e e e CR LF Record 2 Meas
473. tion stops This mode is useful when you are observing a single shot signal Single N Mode This mode is useful when using the sequential store function see section 7 3 Waveforms are acquired and stored in different memory areas each time a trigger is activated then acquisition stops and the waveforms are displayed Acquisition is performed the specified number of times Acquired waveforms can be displayed together or they can be displayed individually This mode is useful when you want to detect a sudden abnormality in a waveform 2nd Acquisition Nth Acquisition 1st Acquisition Action On Trigger lt Section 6 15 gt The displayed waveform can be output to the optional built in printer buzzer or saved to a floppy disk a Zip disk or a PC card each time a trigger is activated Also sends a mail Ethernet interface option Trigger Coupling lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Input coupling can also be switched for trigger sources as it is for input signals Select the type of input coupling which is most suitable for the trigger source signal The following two types of input coupling are available for trigger source signals DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any process AC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source after DC the content has been removed from it A trigger can always be activated if the trigger level is set to O V as long as the signal s amplitu
474. tle You use these dials to set numerical values move the measurement cursors select items from menus and perform other such selection operations The jog dial changes the value in fixed steps as you rotate it With the shuttle dial the step size increases as you turn the dial further RESET Key Resets values that you have changed using the jog and shuttle dials SELECT Key Activates the menu item that you have highlighted using the jog or shuttle dial Arrow Keys lt gt keys Use these keys to shift the column position of the numerical value to be set by the jog or shuttle dial SNAP SHOT Key Section 4 6 Repeats acquisition while retaining the currently displayed waveform on the screen CLEAR TRACE Key Section 4 6 Deletes the currently displayed waveform HELP Key Section 4 8 Sets help window ON or OFF Soft Keys Selects the menu that is displayed at the bottom of the screen 2 5 Hed 4283 JO 9S pue oweN 2 3 Screens A 2000 11 17 radh B Stopped 248 7 C i rr fF T H Eny 5nsfdiv OOkS Ss 2NSfliv CH1 10 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Udi DC Full p Edge CH1 F Auto Accumulate OFF ps Trace Label pF on Format Interpol Graticule Dual Sine y H Date and Time For the procedures used to set the date and time see section 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Operation State Displays Running when da
475. to eliminate the predetermined voltage so that only the changes in the signal can be observed with higher voltage sensitivity Normally the offset voltage does not affect the cursor measurement values automated measurement of waveform parameters and computed values However you can turn ON offset cancel to apply the offset voltage to them See section 14 4 When offset cancel is OFF 1 V div Offset 0 V Position 0 div 1 V div Offset 2 V 500 mV div Offset 2 V feed A Ie ead eI EESE Weta Moe Tee TERRE NAIT NYA E py Ie I ptt Ett ttt ES eae ea VIN VIN VIN AEA NAT PEt Et tT ET ty Input Coupling lt Section 5 3 gt When you only want to observe the amplitude of an alternating current signal eliminating the direct current components from the input signal makes observation easier You may also want to check the ground level or observe the input signal waveform with the offset voltage removed In these cases you can change the input coupling setting This will switch the coupling method which determines how the input signal is input to the vertical control circuit voltage axis The input coupling method can be chosen from the following AC The input signal is sent through a capacitor to the attenuator Input ero in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you just want to observe the amplitude of the alternating current signal eliminating the DC components from the input sign
476. tox 500 iok 500 10k ois o ja po tk toe te iok fik 10 500ms ak tk ak tk x tk ak 10 200ms fsk 10k sk tox sk tk kK 10 100ms jaok 10k tok rox tok iok 10k 10k 50ms 20k 10k j2ox_ 10k 20x _ tok 20k __ 10k 20ms sok 10k sox tok 50k __ tok 50K 10k 10ms took fiok jiook tok took iok 100k __ 10 5ms 200k 10k 200k tok 200k _ tok 200k _ 10 _2ms 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k __ 10 o ims jm po jm jio tM pjo tM 10 2M 10k 5M 10k 1oM 10k Bus 2us _500ns_ 200m tk faq 10k 100m 500 2G jok _200ns 200m _ 400 sG_ 10k toom 200 sa jok tle fis eee Ye iat tae bie _50ns__ 2oom_ 100__ 20a 10 208 10k 20ns 50G 50G 10k 5o lios f5oe 10k 10ns 50G 50G 5k 50G 5k 50G 5k 5ns 50G 50G 25k_ f5oe 25k _ soe 2 5k 2ns 50G 50G 1k 0G 50G__ 1k 1 When the envelope mode is ON the maximum and minimum are displayed as pairs 2 For the settings enclosed by the bold lines repetitive sampling is active App 2 IM 701610 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 100 kwords When envelope mode is ON set at 200 MS s When the high resolution mode is ON 100 M s Rep Repetitive sampling mode When a mode other than the envelope mode is ON Setting Standard resolution High resolution Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displaye
477. ts or higher to minimize calculation errors Further limiting the bandwidth improves the S N ratio and enables data exceeding 8 bits in length Using the DL164 DL1640L the S N ratio can be improved to allow data of up to about 13 bits When the high resolution mode is ON calculated data is saved in acquisition memory as 16 bit data Therefore data obtained through filtering that exceeds 8 bits can also be saved However when the bandwidth limitation is set to Full the resolution does not improve even if the high resolution mode is ON because there is no filtering When the high resolution mode is ON the following restrictions apply These restrictions do not apply when high resolution mode is OFF The maximum sampling rate of the real time sampling mode is halved 100 MS s The maximum recording length is halved DL1620 DL1640 4 Mwords CH DL1640L 16 Mwords CH The number of triggers that can be held in history memory is halved When the high resolution mode is OFF all data is saved as 8 bit data regardless of bandwidth limit settings 1 44 IM 701610 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Acquisition Modes lt Section 7 2 7 4 gt When storing sampled data in the acquisition memory it is possible to perform processing on specified data and display the resultant waveform The following data processing methods are available Normal Mode In this mode sampled data are stored in the acquisition memory without processing
478. tsetoatensolents nash aotyacde cette a e R 5 11 Displaying Inverted Waveforms ccccccscccccssseeeceeeeeecceeseeceeeeeeesaaueeessesseeessasseeessnaaees 5 13 Using the Linear Scaling FUNCTION ccccsssesecccecceeseeeeececaeeeeeeecaueaeeeeeesuaseseesessaaases 5 14 IM 701610 01E Contents Sd SEISCING ING TIMED ASS soproni ne seta edad wi ila dee eaten anraeew 5 16 o2 ENNO NY CIN alas Sart a A auth eee ea ye cid tan see onen 5 18 Chapter 6 Triggering 6 1 Selling the Trigger MOUS ssanie dnnt a aE Tio aTa EEE boca ia TiS 6 1 6 2 Setting the Trigger Delay sononnonnnnnnneonessenrnrnnrrererrenrnnnnnteresrearannnnnnttercerennnnnntterereennnnn 6 3 6 3 Selting the THOGSrFOSIION aduse e a a deci P uid Sanetendebaete 6 4 64 Seting Te IO AO TINE ag tet octet het cied cent cba a a E ethenaeuitases 6 6 6 5 Setlingsthe Edge Tigger SIMPLE r n r a a tienes 6 8 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE i ceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeauaeeeeeesaaaaeeeees 6 11 6 7 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE eeeeeeeeeeeeetetteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 6 13 6 8 Setting the AAEB N Trigger ENHANCED ce ccccceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeeseaaaaeeeees 6 14 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED cece ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesaanneeees 6 17 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED ccc ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeaaaaeneeees 6 2
479. tting to select how much pre trigger area and how much post trigger area to show on the display Display Record Length i Trigger Position 100 o o Pre Trigger Range Post Trigger Range N 7 M A N 1 N 1 13 suopuny 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Record Length lt Section 7 1 gt The term record length refers to the number of data points per channel acquired in the acquisition memory Displayed record length refers to the number of these data points that are actually displayed on the screen Note that sampling rate and record length will vary according to the time axis setting see section 1 2 It is possible to set the following record lengths The maximum record length that can be set varies depending on the status of the high resolution mode DL1620 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 8 Mwords in high resolution DL1640 mode 4 Mwords DL1640L 1 kword 10 kwords 100 kwords 1 Mword 4 Mwords 10 Mwords 32 Mwords in high resolution mode 16 Mwords The displayed record length is identical to the acquisition record length For details see Appendix 1 High resolution mode lt Section 7 4 gt Ordinarily data converted to digital values by the 8 bit A D converter is processed according to the settings and saved by the device as 8 bit data in the acquisition memory For filtering that uses the FIR filter or IIR filter digital calculation methods data is processed at 8 bi
480. ttings dialog box is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to select a setting item Press SELECT to display the setting menu for the selected item or change the current setting Setup Type Pulse lt T_ Source CH1 Level 0 500 V Settings for these items can be input directly Polarity CH using a USB keyboard i8 Hysteresis 6 3di Time 0 002m3 i Start Point 5 966d iv Type Ja Zi Nag J6 21 Pos Searchea Setup Pattern Exec Width x 2 000di4 No Match IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Type 6 Use the jog shuttle to choose either Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 T1 lt PLS lt T2 or Time Out then press SELECT Source Level Pulse gt T Polarity T1 lt PLS lt T2 Hysteresis T1 lt PLS lt T2 Tine Time Out Start Point 5 O00div Setting the Source 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired source channel then press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Level Polarity Hysteresis Time Start Point Setting the Level 8 Use the jog shuttle to set the level then press SELECT Use the arrows to move between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to O V Setting the Polarity 9 Press SELECT to select H or L Setting the Hysteresis 10 Use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press
481. um Relevant Keys SEAR CH O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Snap soft key FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Cursor Image Utility Saving Snapshot Waveforms Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the File name Comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note When you save a snapshot waveform Comment is not available IM 701610 01E 11 21 WINIPs y 8BHe10 S 34 Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes Ey 11 7 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms Saving the File 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort File ListlaFile Nane cof T O Canceling the Saving Operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec FILE ave Exec Snap Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 5 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading Snapshot Waveforms 11 22
482. um and minimum symbols If there are multiple points that are of the same value the maximum and minimum values are marked on the oldest data The number of data points that can be listed is 32000 If this value is exceeded the most recent 32000 points of automated measurement parameters of historical waveforms or data are displayed In this case the maximum and minimum values may exist outside the displayed list In such cases the maximum f and minimum values outside the range are not displayed In the list of statistical processing of historical data you can select a waveform using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the selected historical waveform For the statistical processing per period statistical processing is performed only on the data that can be listed In the list displaying the first cycle statistical processing results use the jog shuttle to select a cycle number and press SELECT to zoom the waveform of the selected cycle Notes when Performing Statistical Processing All soft keys except the Measure Abort soft key are disabled while the statistical processing is in progress When loading waveform data of the maximum record length statistical processing cannot be performed on calculated waveforms is displayed for the measured results Note When performing statistical processing for each cycle the completed percentage is displayed 9 25 SISAJEUY LWUIOJOARM e 9 4 Performing Automated Mea
483. um record lengths when the high resolution mode is ON Waveform Display Method You can recall waveforms from memory in the same way as you do when working with the history function For details see section 7 6 Using the History Memory Restrictions and Precautions You can not use this mode together with repetitive sampling or roll mode e If you stop waveform acquisition by pressing START STOP sequential storage also stops It then restarts again from the beginning when acquisition resumes IM 701610 01E 7 5 7 4 Using the High resolution Mode lt For a description of this function see page 1 14 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP LI Yoo Foa X Y MENU _ MENU PHAS GeTuP JpisPLa Cory mace sae Ghr No SEARCH O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY Se TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Hi Res Mode soft key to select ON or OFF ACh Record Mode i Count i Res ModeRepetitive Time Base Length 1M Norna1 Inf inite ON ON Ext Explanation When Bandwidth bandwidth limit is not set to Full high resolution data exceeding 8 bits can be handled because noise included in the data is reduced through filtering Ordinarily data is saved in the acquisition memory as 8 bit data so the resolution of high resolution data that exceeds 8 bits is reduced to 8 bits and then saved By turning ON the high resolution mode you can save this data as 16 bit data This mean
484. up M1 Label OFF pN Pscc1 Z Display Janz Setup ON C3 C4 _MATH__ Z Display janz Setup MZ Label ON C3 C4 athz CH1 10 1 0 500 Udi DC Full Mathi PS C1 Edge CH1 F MATH M2 Label Math2 IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 9 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum This function displays the power spectrum of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 and CH2 and Math1 on the DL1620 waveforms Number of Computing Points Point Select 1 kor 10 k If the record is longer than the total number of computing points the data is thinned to match the number of computing points then FFT is performed Selecting the Time Window Window Select from the following windows Rect Rectangular Best suited for transient signals that attenuate completely within the time window Hanning Hanning Best suited for continuous and non periodic signals Flattop Flat Top Best suited for improve the accuracy of the level even if the frequency resolution is to be compromised Power Spectrum Calculation Range You can select the power spectrum calculation range from the following choices Main Calculate using the range displayed on the main screen Zoom1 Calculate using the range displayed on the Zoom1 screen Zoom2 Calculate using the range displayed on the Zoom2 screen Note If you perform the calculation with the range set to Zoom1 or Zoom2 when zooming the calculation results you must use a zoom screen with no calculation
485. up Log List Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Drive Setup FIP server C O UU Login Name anonymous Password Time Out sec The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard 8 MISC a a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Enter the IP address of the FTP server address If you are using DNS you can specify it by name Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter a login name of 15 characters or less Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press SELECT to display the keyboard 13 11 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function 8 Enter the password of 15 characters or less for the login name Net Drive Setup FTP Server 156 6 222 111 Login Name YOKOGAWA Password WHOOO Time Out sec MISC Pns TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 9 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout then press SELECT to set the timeout time The available setting range is 0 to 3600 s Note e For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e If Login Name
486. ur SEARCH Cl O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu 3 Press the TCP IP Setup soft key to display the TCP IP settings menu a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Setup Account Setup Setup Setup DHCP ON OFF 4 Move the cursor to DHCP using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to turn DHCP ON or OFF If you select ON then it is not necessary to the set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If you wish to set up the DNS please skip to step 11 If you do not wish to set up the DNS check the network cable connection and restart the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L The IP address subnet mask and default gateway are automatically set MISC Connect Log List DHCP IP Address LaL aL 4 9 Net Mask 255 255 255 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 DNS Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i MISC Connect Log List a a a a a User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Account Setup Setup Setup Setting the IP Address Set the IP address if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 5 Move the cursor to the IP Address field with the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the settings menu 6 Enter the IP address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle El IM 701610 01E 13 3 uodo d9ej190 U 3U 19444 E
487. ured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 e e e CR LF CR LF Float Format Stored in blocks of channels Measured data of record 1 of CH1 Measured data of record 20f CH1 Measured data of record N of CH1 Measured data of record 1 of CH2 Measured data of record 2 of CH2 Measured data of record N of CH2 11 15 WINIPs y 8BHe10 S 34 Wo pue o e eq Hulpeo pue Hulaes Ey 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data A N CAUTION Never remove the medium or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or storage medium icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME sDIV 4 3 ACTION DELAY OILO o s Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu 3 Press the Setup soft key FILE Setup Waveform Snap Measure Cursor Image Utility Selecting the Setup Data Selecting the Destination Medium 4 Pressing the Save soft key displays the save setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 5 Pressing the File List soft key displays the file list dialog box File ListjaFile Nane ave Exec PC_Card 0000 Setup 11 16 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Setup Data 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with parentheses
488. urst2 OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 9 26 IM 701610 01E IM 701610 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 6 10 11 12 13 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the waveform parameter dialog box Areal Areaz Mode Trace Iten Ope Trace Iten Unit sert DFFTON cH EF o Cow Fax User2 PFF ON L CH3 Min LcH4_ RMS User3 PFFTON Math Period Math pegero C User4 DFFTON None IWeIRY 7 ponse Cez E Const1i Const2 Const3 Const4 MEASURE re f T Rangel Jfl Range3 Dual Area Iten 5 000di 5 000di Setup 6T Rangez 6T Range4 OFF DN 5 600di 5 606di Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode of User1 and press SELECT to turn it ON Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace of Areai of User1 and press SELECT to select the trace from CH1 through CH4 Mathi Math2 None and Const1 through Const4 CH CH2 Math1 None and Const1 through Const4 for the DL1620 If you select None or Const1 through Const4 waveform parameters are not measured in Areat 5e lect 5e lect Const1i Const2 Const3 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Item of Area1 of User1 and press SELECT to select the measurement parameter from P P through Int2XY tSelect tSelect A Burstz AugFreg Pulse AvgPer iod De
489. uttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1620 Level Polarity Hysteresis Count Start Point Setting the Level 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to O V Setting the Polarity 8 Press SELECT to select f or 4 Setting the Hysteresis 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div Setting the Count 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the count to 0 Setting the Start Point 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the position to 5 div 12 Press ESC to close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the Display Position of the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 13 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Result a 7 Fag ay 5zi Pos Searched Es ty 6 006di4 Pattern Ea Edge zz o zz fag 6 ee No Match Executing the Search 14 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed wav
490. uttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us SIMPLE Type a a E Count gHold Off et Pattern Level us A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 Note The hold off time setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701610 01E Explanation IM 701610 01E 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time This function prevents a trigger from being activated for a specified time even if the trigger conditions are met during this time The following two methods can be used to prevent the trigger This is useful when you wish to activate the trigger in sync with a signal that is periodic as shown in the figure below Repetitive Period T Trigger Level Input sia j Trigger Source Signal Trigger Signal during Hold Off Period t When Trigger Slope is Set to Rise Hold Off Time Setting Range 80 ns to 10 s default 80 ns The setting resolution is 20 ns Points for Attention Updating of the waveform may be slow in repetitive sampling mode In this case set the hold off time to a smaller value If holdoff time is set to 100 ms or above the trigger mode should be set to normal When used with the A gt B N or A Delay B trigger the holdoff time operates with respect to condition A only Bbunebbiyp 2 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE lt For a description of this function see page 1 8 gt Releva
491. value at Cursor Movement Range of the Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform H Cursors can be moved in the range from 4 to 4 div from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 01 div V Cursors marker cursors angle cursors and vertical history cursors can be moved in the range from 5 to 5 div from the center of the screen The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Movement Range of the Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform H Cursors and V Cursors can be moved in the range from 4 to 4 div from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Marker cursors can be moved in the range from 5 to 5 div from the center of the screen The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Cursor Jump When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform You can make Marker cursors V cursors angle cursors and vertical history cursors jump to the center of the zoom window The cursors can be jumped in the following manner For marker cursors to Z1 Make the selected marker jump to the Z1 window to Z2 Make the selected marker jump to the Z2 window V cursor angle cursor and vertical history cursors C1 to Z1 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z1 window C1 to Z2 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z2 window C2 to Z1 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z1 window C2 to Z2 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z2 window Notes when Making Cursor Measurements The time axis values are measured from
492. waveform using the history memory function only the waveform selected for Selected Record No is long copied Long copy is not possible when displaying X Y waveforms Long copy of snapshot waveforms and accumulated waveforms is not possible 10 5 e eqd UB919S JO nd no 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Option Relevant Keys X Y Ma N SEARCH O TRIG D oO m SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY SEX TIME DIV Operating Procedure 1 Connect the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L and a USB printer using a USB cable For details see the explanation page 10 8 Confirming the Type of Printer that is Connected To confirm the type of printer that is connected to the DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L carry out the procedure below 2 Press MISC 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key a alibrationRemote Cnt1 Netuork Bystem Cnfg 4 Press the USB List soft key to display the USB Device List Check the printer that is connected USB Device List Device Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Mitsumi USB Keyboard Printer 3 USB Printer MISC A a a A LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 272 10 6 IM 701610 01E 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Option Selecting the Printer 5 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 6 Press COPY 7 Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu COPY Co
493. waveforms or trigger points is called the delay between channels Measurement Range 1 count N1 count Setting Example eEdge Polarity Rising eEdge Count N1 1 to 9 l l l l l l Mesial Line l l l Delay between Channels 7 l 1 count N2 count Waveform eEdge Polarity Falling eEdge Count N2 1 to 9 Setting Example of Measurement If Mode is set to Time or Degree measurements will be made The default setting is OFF Time Display the delay between channels as a time Degree Display the delay between channels as a degree Degree Delay s Period s x 360 deg The period is that of a standard waveform e Select rising f or falling f for the slope of the edge to be detected in Edge Polarity The default setting is rising f Set the number of edges to detect before actually considering it a detection point in Edge Count The range is an integer from 1 to 9 The default setting is 1 The voltage level at the detection point is the mesial point SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 18 The parameter name when the measured value is displayed is Dly Note If the Mode is set to Degree and the reference waveform is Trig the measured value shows OKKKKK 1 Setting Proximal Mesial and Distal Dist Prox Unit According to Dist Prox setting Proximal Range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolut
494. wed Only real time sampling mode is available Even if you set the acquisition mode to envelope mode the sampling is performed in normal mode Display of waveforms is not possible in roll mode No function to divide the clock signal is available Since the time axis setting cannot be changed expand the time axis if you want to change the display range For a description of expanding waveforms see section 8 9 The trigger delay cannot be set The deskew function cannot be used The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement function is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal No unit is displayed 5 17 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 12 Setting T div lt For a description of this function see page 1 6 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR NAP Sed a a a a A e 5O aca stanrisroP ca mse leonoso SETUP a DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT HORZONTAL v ED at ang O TRIG D Sime ENHANCED ACTION DELAY Se V DIV as Operating Procedure 1 Turn the TIME DIV knob to set the desired T div Note Turning the TIME DIV knob while acquisition is stopped displays the new T div value in parentheses on the upper right of the screen The new setting will come into effect the next time the acquisition is started When repetieive sampling mode is OFF see section 7 6 the maximum sampling rate is 200 MS s or 100 MS s when the high res
495. window condition of each channel is met or not met Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes Af Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The values above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select ON when you wish to use a signal source obtained by removing the high frequency components from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701610 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function see page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP 0 fa Gemelli S E SEA N O TRIG D TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a fe Count gHold Off et Pattern Levels us A gt BCN Coupling
496. ximately 6 seconds after it is connected DL1620 USB Printer DL1640 DL1640L o AT Connect the printer directly without going through a hub Connect only a USB keyboard printer or mouse to the USB PERIPHERAL connectors Do not connect multiple printers You can connect a single printer keyboard and mouse Never turn OFF the printer or remove the USB cable while the printer is printing Output Resolution when Printing using the BJ Format When printing the screen image data to a USB BJ printer select the output resolution from 180 dpi 300 dpi 360 dpi and 600 dpi Comments A comment string of up to 20 characters that is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen can be printed Color Select from the following list of choices ON Prints the image using the same colors as the screen no background color grid printed in black OFF Prints the image using the same colors as the image printed using the built in printer Precautions when Printing on a USB Printer Images may not print properly on some printers Use USB printers that have been tested for compatibility You can also print to a USB printer that is connected to your PC Save the screen image data to a floppy disk or a Zip disk according to the procedure given in section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Then load the data on the PC and print it Note 8 The DL1620 DL1640 DL1640L does not detect out of pa
497. ximum Absolute Input Value Approx 20 mV or more assuming 1 1 probe attenuation Type Repetitive waveforms that are not complex When the input coupling is set to DC Note The auto setup function may not operate properly in some cases such as when the waveform contains a large DC offset or high frequency components Settings Made by Auto Setup Waveform Acquisition and Display Acquisition Mode Normal Acquisition Count Infinite Record Length 10 k High resolution Mode OFF Timebase Int Accumulation Mode OFF Zoomed Waveforms Vertical Axis Settings Vidiv Offset Voltage Coupling Bandwidth Display ON OFF Position Horizontal Axis Settings T div Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Trigger Type Trigger Source Trigger Level and Slope Trigger Coupling HF Rejection Hysteresis Holdoff Time Trigger Position Trigger Delay Math Setting Scalling Traces set ON for display Set to a value so that the absolute value of the input waveform is between 1 6 div to 4 div approximately O V If Adjust Mode is 0 V DC FULL Turns ON the channels of which the absolute value of the amplitude is at least 20 mV 1 1 0 div Set so that screen displays 1 6 to 4 periods of the auto setup waveform with the shortest period Auto Simple Channel with the longest period and an amplitude of at least 1 div Level is 1 2 the trigger source amplitude Slope is rising The center level of the maximum and mi
498. ximum and minimum values within the measurement range are set to High and Low respectively This method is most suitable for measuring sine waves and saw waves It is not suited to the measurement of waveforms that have ringing and spikes Setting the Distal Proximal and Mesial Values Distal Prox Select the appropriate method to set the three levels that are to be used as reference for such measurements as rise and fall times Percentage The distal mesial and proximal values are set in terms of percentages when High of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 and Low are taken to be 100 and 0 respectively e Unit Set the distal mesial and proximal values of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1620 to arbitrary voltage values Setting the Measurement Range T Range With the default setting the 5 div of the time axis display frame is the measurement range However this range can be shortened The measurement range is set using two vertical cursors The position of the fine dashed line is the measurement start point and the position of the coarse dashed line is the end point 9 15 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM e 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Measu rement Parameters Items You can select among the 26 types of measurement parameters shown below and delay between channels Up to 32000 combinations of parameters of all traces CH1 to CH4
499. y lt Section 8 8 gt This feature plots the voltage values of one input waveform on the X axis against the voltage values of the others on the Y axis which have their display turned ON The X Y plot lets you view the relationship between the signal voltages The X Y waveforms and normal waveforms a waveform displayed using voltage and time axes can be displayed simultaneously Use of this X Y waveform display function enables measurement of the phase angle between two sine wave signals For example two X Y sine waveforms are displayed to obtain an X Y waveform called a Lissajous waveform from which the phase angle can be obtained Lissajous Waveform Frequency Ratio Expanded Waveform lt Section 8 9 gt Waveforms can be expanded in the time axis direction This function is useful when you want to change the T div setting after the waveform has been displayed in single mode or when you want to extend the acquisition time to observe a particular part of the waveform thoroughly Zooming is not available on areas with less than 11 data points You set the zoom position according to its time axis location Zoom Display Arrangement You can display one or two zoom windows on the screen Four display arrangements are available as follows Main Main area Z1 Z2 Zoom area IM 701610 01E 1 19 suonoun 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions If you display the main area normal waveform display t

DL1640 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents